Otis Sigma SI210 PDF [PDF]
Test & Commissioning IRIS I System MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering Test & Commissioning for SI210
63 0 7MB
Papiere empfehlen
![Otis Sigma SI210 PDF [PDF]](https://vdoc.tips/img/200x200/otis-sigma-si210-pdf.jpg)
- Author / Uploaded
- Anthony Rafaga Ortiz
Datei wird geladen, bitte warten...
Zitiervorschau
Test & Commissioning IRIS I
System
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 0/17
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Index 1. System Overview…...…………………………………………………..………………. 1 1.1 General...……………………………………………………………………………….1 1.2 Major Specification………………………………………………………………….....3 2. Comparison between DI210 & SI210 Controller…...................................................7 2.1 Summary…………………………………………………………………………….….7 2.2 Major changed parts………………………………………………………………..…8 Appendix1. Cut view of traveling cable………………………………………….……..15 Appendix2. Cut view of EVV cable………………………………………………...…...16 Appendix3. PCB application………………………………………………………...…..16
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 1/19
1. System overview 1.1 General 1) Sigma Elevator Power Distributed and Inverter Control Elevator 2) What is the distributed control system? This system distributes and assigns separate micro processors to their functional properties and transmits control data required for independent operators through the transmitting media network so as to be processed independently. Thus, this system possesses enhanced reliability, safety and flexibility through additional functions. 3) System configuration - Si210 controller system configuration
MCCB
EMI
RCRC1VD
INVERTER
CONVERT ER
AC 380V
DVR
FI LC
DVR
FI LC
High frequency REACTOR HCT- U 고주파 HCT- V
C1ST
DOC- 120
Supervision125K BPS
CPU: 80C186
SCG1
HALL NET
SCG2
Prallel NET
HAND PC
SCG3 RS- 232C
( 9600 BPS)
I/F
CAR- NET Aut o announc e (DOV-200)
78K BPS
SCC ( 2PORT)
1024 P/ R
B DPP- 131, 111
CWT
DPB- 100( Ext ensi on)
I PM dr i ve STACK Er r or det ect
BRAKE Current control BRAKE Error detect
DPC- 120, 121
+
FLU
LDU LDC LDD
S.G.
UL SD1U SD2U
FI RE FULL
B
CRT
DAS
TM
15Kw or above RE
CISPR Pub21 CLASS A standard satisfaction
Driv e control
I.M
Protection circuit / Failure detect Speed, current control Parallel comm. With DOC-PCB PWM, current command A/D signal convert BRAKE control
FI RE FULL
DCL- 242 DCV- 100
+
DOM- 110A
DHG- 160, 161
Hoi st way si gnal Car si gnal
M/C Room, Hoist way, Controller signal I/O junction board
SD2D SD1D
LON c ontrol
DL
( 1PORT)
RS-232
Micro leveling RELAY PCB
DCD 201 203 204 Supervisory panel
Fire, Emerg. RELAY PCB
Private power RELAY PCB
DOOR cont r ol ( SAV, MAV, DAV)
CAR- NET
FLD
HALL NET
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 2/19
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
4) Main functions of distributed control -. Diagram DOC-120 PCB
186 (16 Bit)
Relative E/L DOC-120 PCB
G/A-3
DPRAM (256B)
DPRAM (2 KB) G/A-1
M-LON (8 Bit)
G/A-2 I/O PORT
DSP(16 OR 32 Bit)
CLON(8 Bit)
DPC PCB
DCL PCB
G/A (COM. ELM) DHG-161PCB #1~32
G/A (COM. ELM)
EMBEDDED CONTROLLER(8Bit)
CRT
DCD- PCB
Voi ce synt h. DOV-100 PCB
-. Main functions of distributed controller
Processor Name
Function
Capacity
Operating Freq.
186
16 Bit
20 MHz
E/L operation and position control
DSP
32 Bit
40 MHz
MOTOR and speed control
16 Bit
16 MHz
MOTOR and speed control
M-LON
8 Bit
10 MHz
CAR NETWORK transmitting host
S-G/A
8 Bit
16 MHz
G/A-1
8 Bit
16 MHz
G/A-2
8 Bit
16 MHz
G/A-3
8 Bit
16 MHz
C-LON
8 Bit
10 MHz
EMBEDDED CONTROLLER
8 Bit
12 MHz
Control of input/output signal of hall side equipment HALL NETWORK transmitting host Supervisory network (CRT,ESMI…) Transmitting HOST Host of parallel network Control of input/output signal of car side equipment Door motor INV control
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 3/19
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
1.2 Major Specification 1) Specification
Items
DI1 60 m/min
DI1 90~105 m/min
Operation CPU : KU80C186EC-20 (16 bit)
CPU
Speed CPU : TM320C32PCM40 (32 bit,DPC-111,112) Communication(COMM.)
Speed CPU : 320F(C)240 (16 bit,DPC-120) Control panel ↔ Operating board (OPB) : LON COMM. Control panel ↔ HALL(B/T B/D) : G/A COMM. Control panel ↔ CRT&ESMI : G/A COMM. Control panel↔ Control panel:G/A COMM(DOC-120 PCB) Control panel ↔ Auto announcement : CAR LON,RS232C CP(Speed CPU) ↔ MAIN CPU : Parallel signal processing Control panel ↔ DOOR : Parallel signal processing INV DOOR
DOOR
Duplex operation
Parallel operation Service floor
24
32
Max. stroke
60m
80m
Min. floor height Max. load capacity Traction machine
2500 mm 1600kg (24 Persons) H438B-2,H317C,H422B-2 TKXS,TKM,TKL,TKXL,H438B,H422B(Di1 M/C) 1 : 1 ROPPING
ROPPING Position/Speed detecting Load detecting device MOTOR
ROTARY ENCODER (1024 P/R) STRAIN GAUGE,POTENTIO METER,MICRO S/W
Rated power
5.5, 7.5, 9.5, 11, 13, 15, 18KW
Voltage/Freq.
310 V / 50(43) Hz
Pole Cont r ol
INVERTER
Type
CONVERTER Br ake t ype
4 Pole INV distributed control All wave rectifier circuit using by diode Regenerative resistance brake type
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 4/19
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
2) Functions of control panel block
NO
Block Configuration Power Noise Noise filter 1 processing section Surge absorber 3-phase diode P Converter module o section
Functions
E/L power end conduction noise damper (CISPR Pub 22 Class A) Lighting surge damper Converts 3-phase AC voltage to DC voltage. Regenerative braking method (Not a converter control) w e Chemical Smoothes and charges the DC power. r DC link condenser Arranged in serial or parallel by INV capacity section Divided voltage Divides DC link voltage when s resistance condensers are arranged in serial 2 t Regeneration Regenerative IGBT Drives to consume regenerative electric a processing Regenerative power produced by operating condition c section resistance used of loads as regenerative resistance. (Built-in type S-IPM is used up to 15kW ) k IPM Converts DC voltage into AC voltage Inverter (INTELLIGENT of the frequency by the number of motor section POWER MODULE) turning Charging resistance Protect DC link end condenser after power Charging circuit 3 section ON Charging circuit Composed of C1VD contactor 4 contactor (OPTION)
5 Power section
6 Reactor section 7
Brake control section
Generates AC VOL and door supplied power used for in/out-side CTRL board Control transforme by getting down 3-phase power AC VOL and DC VOL by connecting to DOP-PCB SMPS Power supplies for PCB, Encoder(DC) As a filter on the side of motor, INV of 13kW capacity or more fitted Brake PCB Current control type brake PCB (DPB PCB) Wire wound resistor
8
Contactor section
9 Terminal section
Current limiter of traction machine Composed of main circuit power driving (C1ST),brake driving charge(C1BR), discharge driving (C1VD,Option) Connects control panel and outer equipment (DOM PCB)
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
NO
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Block
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 5/19
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Functions
Configuration
Composed of power earth, panel frame GND connecting 10
P C B
11
in/outside equipment and DC panel.
Earth bar
(Digtal and Analog GND's are connected at power earth)
DOC-120 PCB
Operation controlling CPU PCB which controls operation sequence and Position, detects security circuit, perform external COM I/O I/F. Speed controlling CPUB/D which controls motor speed
I
and current, checks power section security circuit and
n
DPC-120, 121 DPC-140 PCB PCB
performs a rescue operation in ALP operation.
c
DPP-131:
o n
~15kW
DPP-1XX PCB
DPP-111:
t
18~22kW
IPM driving(built-in Regen.IGBT),Detecting DC LINK safety Driving Inverter IGBT,regen.IGBT,Detecting DC LINK safety
r
Inputs machine room OPR and EEPROM displays E/L
o
DOA-100 PCB
and TCD conditions.
l l
As a local monitoring board B/D, performs a gate array
e
*DOS-100 PCB
communication, using DOC-120 CRT port
r
(Relay contact output). DC power supply(CAR LON:24V,I/F:48V, Contactor: 110V), DOP-116 PCB
control power fuse, and LED indicating status of fuse
*DOR-131 PCB
For emergency, Micro leveling operation
*DOR-101 PCB
For Supervisory panel, RELAY PCB
*DOR-110A PCB
For emergency (export),RELAY PCB
*DOR-120 PCB
For private power operation, RELAY PCB
DOM-110A PCB
*: OPTION PCB
Connects control panel and outer equipment
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 6/19
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
3) Applicable external equipment
Unit Name
NO
Applicable Standard
1
TR M/C and Motor
* Refer to item 4)Table of applicable units by speed & capacity.
2
ENCODER
* ROTARY ENCODER : 1024 P/R
3
Position Detector
* 1B(1 B contact) Type position detector applied * 1 LDC applied is basic.(Applied if LDU and LDD slack rope increase) * MAGNETIC LEAD SWITCH * Door Type : SAV1(DCD-201 PCB), MAV1(DCD-203 PCB), DAV1(DCD-204 PCB) 4
Door Device
* Unit configuration is a integrated model of link configuration. * CONTROL : INVERTER CONTROL (DCD-20X PCB) * MOTOR Power : 3Φ AC110V * WINDOW type CRT supervisory panel for SIGMA
5
CRT & ESMI
6
Load detection device * 60~105m/min : STRAIN GAUGE(0%~110%) ,PTM,MICRO S/W
7
Limit switch
* Remote monitoring board (Elevator Status Monitoring Interface) * 60 m/min: (SDS1U, UL, FLU)(SDS1D, DL, FLD)
8
* 90~105m/min:(SDS1U,SDS2U,UL,FLU)(SDS1D,SDS2D,DL,FLD)
PCB parts of outside C.P
* Refer to installation manual for install position and adjustment DCL-242 PCB DCL-243 PCB * Perform a LON comm. with C.P through OPB LON PCB. (DCL-241 PCB) * Inputs by button and outputs by lamp * Parallel comm.(DOV-200 PCB) with auto announcement * Inputs by additional function S/W and load compensation device. DCD-20X PCB
* INV. DOOR(=SAV1,MAV1,DAV1) CONTROL PCB (CPU: P80C31) * Adjusts spec. speed pattern and closing force with DIP switch. * Detects absolute position of 32 point by disc and photo-sensor.
DHG-161 PCB
* L-Door Button PCB : G/A comm. With C.P * Inputs by button and outputs by lamp * Inputs by 2 additional hall function switches. * Indicator(BCDoutput) + direction light + additional light +Lantern output
DOV-200 PCB
* Auto announcement , parallel comm. with DCL-242 board
DHI-2XX,4XXPCB * Landing Indicator PCB (Vertical type ,Horizontal type)
* Indicates 19SEG floor, direction light, additional light DCM-10X PCB
* Landing and Car DML PCB : A combination Hall and Car
DCM-11X PCB
* DML Floor & direction light, additional light(10X:Vertical,11X:Horizontal)
DCM-12X PCB
* Car INDICATOR PCB : LON comm. * Hall indicates DOT MATRIX, Indicates direction light, additional light
MMR Elevator_SI Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 7/19
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
2. Comparison between Di210 & unified Si210 Controller. Note: - Si210 Control Panel applied for Di1 elevator from January 2003. - The type of Control Panel can be realized on the name plate of Control panel. 2-1. Summary Unified Control Panel (hereafter: CP) means that CP of mid rise elevator (Si1, Di1) are unified to Si210 CP.
Model numbering is not changed as Si210 CP applied. For example:
1) Di1-PA15(1000)-CO-060-08/08 for Di1 elevator,
2) Si1-PA15(1000)-CO-060-08/08 for
Si1 elevator* - The type of CP is written on CP. Before unification Si1 Machine, load detector for S.G* Si1 CP (Si210)
Si1 T/M*: WLC,WMC(Brake: Current control) Si1 DOOR: SBD1(Distributed control) Si1 OPB:Si1 OPB : Si1 extemal,DCL-243 external, DCL-242 applied Si1 applied Si1 IND : Si1 external, DOT* essential
Di1 Machine, load detector for M/S*,PTM* Di1 CP (Di210)
Di1 T/M : TK Type(Brake: Resistor control) Di1 DOOR: SAV1(Distributed control no applied) Di1 OPB : Di1 external, DCL-240 applied
Di1 OPB:Di1 extemal,DCL-244 applied
Di1 IND : Di1 external, 7-SEG* essential
After unification Si1 Machine, load detector for S.G* Si1 T/M*: WLC,WMC(Brake: Current control) Si1 DOOR: SBD1(Distributed control) Si1 OPB : Si1 extemal,DCL-243 external, DCL-242 applied applied Si1 OPB:Si1
*: 1) Si1 elevator: SIGMA elevator only for Korean market, 2) S.G: Strain gauge, 3) T/M: Traction Machine, 4) DOT: Dot matrix 5) 7-SEG: 7 Segment
Unified CP (Si210)
Si1 IND : Si1 external, DOT* essential
Di1 Machine, load detector for M/S*,PTM* Di1 T/M : TK Type(Brake: Current control) Di1 DOOR: SAV1(Distributed control applied) Di1 OPB:Di1 Di1 OPB : Di1 extemal,DCL-243 external, DCL-242 applied applied
Di1 IND : Di1 external, 7-SEG* essential
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 8/19
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
2-2. Major changed parts : This document shows changed items as installation view when Si210 CP is applied for Di1elevator. 1) Door part : The difference between Di1(SAV1,MAV1,DAV1,HAV1) and Si1(SBD1) is whether distributed control is applied or not. Distributed control means communication function between door PCB(DCD) & DCL PCB, and this function was applied for Si1. Unified CP that is for Si1 & Di1 applies for the function. But there is no reflected connector for Di1. Therefore the function can be realized by using CONN PCB of apparatus box.
DCL-243 PCB
When one of SAV1, MAV1, DAV1& HAV1 door is applied, DR CABLE(#AEG05C372) is to be wired and connected between DCL PCB and CONN. PCB additionally.
(Related to TCD 145)
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 9/19
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Figure of DR CABLE: For the connection, refer to name tags on cable.
- When starting up Di1 with Si210 CP, following works are required for the door parts. ① Wire and connect DR CABLE(# AEG05C372) ② Insert the plugs of DR CABLE into DRIN/DROUT cap of DCL-243 PCB. ③ At another side of DR CABLE, connect receptacles into Y3-01,02, Y4-08,09 and fork terminal to TERM1-01. ④ Caution: TERM1-01 is not the ground but P48V line. (If not connect, TCD 145 may occur) ⑤ Check if SPEC DATA in address $0014 is $01H. ⑥ Apparatus box on car top is not changed as comparing with Di1.
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 10/19
⑦ In case that there is any error on door PCB, TCD 192 may occur. (Refer to the connection of Y4-08) 2) OPB PART DCL PCB changed Di1 with Di210(Di1 CP): DCL-244 PCB applied Di1 with Si210(Unified CP): DCL-243 PCB applied
② The function of DIP S/W on DCL PCB SPEC DATA for load detector(Potential meter) is different.
PCB > NO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 1 0 1 0 X X X
2 0 1 1 0 X X X
3 0 0 0 1 X X X
D IP SW 1 4 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X X X X X X
6 0 0 0 0 X X X
※ 0: OFF, 1: ON, X: N/A
7 X X X X 1 X X
8 X X X X 0 0 1
PCB >
HEX
O PB ID & T.R.*
NO
01 02 03 04 40 00 80
MAIN FR O NT SUB FR O NT MAIN DISABLED SUB DISABLED PTM * APPLIED T.R.* O FF T.R.* O N
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 1 0 1 0 X X
2 0 1 1 0 X X
3 0 0 0 1 X X
D IP SW 1 4 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X X X X
6 0 0 0 0 X X
7 X X X X X X
8 X X X X 0 1
HEX
O PB ID & T.R.*
01 02 03 04 00 80
MAIN FR O NT SUB FR O NT MAIN D ISABLED SUB D ISABLED T.R.* O FF T.R .* O N
* T.R.: Terminal resistor
3) Car part The decorative concept is differs between Di1 & Si1, but this document describes the difference concerning control system. Application of load detector is as follows: - Di1: Micro switch and potential meter applied - Si1: Strain gauge applied
① Above application is followed even unified CP. ② Installation procedures are same as before. ③ The adjustments of load detector(Micro switch and potential meter) are as follows:
★ SPEC DATA Address: $0018H 1) Micro switch: $00H
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 11/19
2) Potential meter X 1EA: $41H 3) Potential meter X 2EA: $42H
★ Load compensation (In case potential meter applied) 1) NO LOAD POINT SET: “A61E“(Same as Di1 CP) 2) FULL LOAD POINT SET: “A62E” (Keep 100% load in car, and set “100E” by annunciator) → For the details, refer to below.
A62E - FULL LOAD POINT SET [Preparation] - Locate the car at bottom floor and keep the car 100% load. - Switch NORMAL/STOP S/W on DOR-131 PCB to STOP. - Place SW2 on DOC-1XX PCB to WE. - Check if R5SC(Safety Check) relay is off. - FULL LOAD POINT SET is to be done after NO LOAD POINT SET. [Checking LCD] - Press “A62E” and check if LCD is follow: A C D = 0 3 1 1 0 0 1
0 0 %
[ 1 6 ]
E 0 0 0 - 0 0
1 0 0
0 0
S
1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 K : A 6 2 E
A C D =
0
3
E 0
0
0
-
0
1
1
0
0
1
L
O A D
[ 0 1
0
?
1
6
]
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
K :
1
0
0
E
% S 1
When “LOAD?” is displayed, enter “100E”. - When finishing FULL LOAD POINT SET, “SUCCESS” is displayed in 4th row. If failed, “FAIL” is displayed in 4th row. 1 6 ]
1 0 0 %
A C D = 0 3
1 0 0
0 0
S
E 0 0 0 -
1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
1 1 0 0 1
A C D = 0 3 E 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
[
0 0
S U C C E S S
K :
And check if current load is displayed on LCD.
F A I
L
[
0 0
1 6 ] 1 0 0
0 0 % 0 0
S
1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 K :
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 12/19
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Note: - If the car is not on bottom floor, “MOVE BOT” appeared on 4th row. - If R5SC is not off, “R5SC” appeared. - If SW2 is not WE, “W ENABLE” appeared. - If there is a problem on NO LOAD SET, “CHK NOLD” appeared. 4) Traction Machine part The difference between Di1 and Si1 concerning Traction Machine(hereafter: TM) ① Brake control system concerning TM - Di1: TM type(TKXS,TKM,TKL,TKXL) / resistor control by using BSR,BDR resistor - Si1: TM type(WLC,WMC) / current control by using DPB-100 PCB. ② Connection of Rotary Encoder(hereafter: R.E) Di1: The end of R.E CABLE consists of plug housing and connect to AD housing on DOC-1XX. Si1: It consist of cables with fork terminal and connect “TMLRE” terminal on DOM PCB After unification ① Brake control system concerning TM - Di1: TM type(TKXS,TKM,TKL,TKXL) / current control by using DPB-100 PCB. - Si1: TM type(WLC,WMC) / current control by using DPB-100 PCB. ② Connection of R.E (Same as before) - Di1: The end of R.E CABLE consists of plug housing and connect to AD housing on DOC-1XX.
Remove AD cable between DOC and DOM PCB, connect
the plug from R.E into AD housing on DOC-1XX. - Si1: It consist of cables with fork terminal and connect “TMLRE” terminal on DOM PCB.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 13/19
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
5) EE part ① Figure of unified CP: 1273(H)*750(W)*395(D)
Front Side View
DPB-100 PCB DPC-14X PCB
DOC-120 PCB DPP-1XX PCB
DOR-1XX PCB
DOM-110A PCB
DOP-116 PCB
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 14/19
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
② Auto announcement : When applying unified CP for Di1 elevator, follow the works as follow:
◆ Auto announcement system is not changed as comparing Di1 CP. ◆ Traveling cable for speaker(Y3-19,20) is same like Di1 CP. ◆ Traveling cable Y3-19,20 is not connected to DOM PCB but SC-08,09. ◆ DOV-200 PCB is located behind DOC-1XX PCB. ◆ When applying for DOV-200 PCB set SPEC DATA address $0014 to $01.
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 15/19
③ C1BR, C1ST contactor(hereafter: CTT.) (Maker: LG→ INDIA TELCO) Item C ontactor (C 1B R, C 1S T)
D rawing NO
S tandard
application
Remark
A E G04C 690*D
TP 1-D 18(C 1B R)
Motor 5.5~22kW
A E G04C 691*B
TP 1-32+D N22
Motor 5.5~11kW
A E G04C 691*C
TP 1-50+D N11
Motor 13~15kW
A E G05C 437*C
TP 1-80+D N11
Motor 18~22kW
④ IPM, DPP PCB
1E A /1S E T(C 1B R) 1E A /1S E T(C 1S T)
Application
IPM
R .IGBT*
DPP PCB
Motor 5.5kW
2R25370A (MIG50Q201H)
N/A
D PP -131(A EG05C267*A)
Motor 7.5kW
2R25371A (MIG75Q201H)
N/A
D PP -131(A EG05C268*A)
Motor 9.5~11kW
A EG05C 441*A(P M100RS E120(LG))
N/A
D PP -131(A EG05C269*A)
Motor 13~15kW
A EG05C 440*A(P M150RS E120(LG))
N/A
D PP -131(A EG05C270*A)
◆ IPM (AEG05C440*A, AEG05C441*A) in unified CP is named as S-IPM, other IPM is just IPM. ◆ 15kW stack has same structure with 11kW stack depend on applying S-IPM. That is, R.IGBT* is not used, applying DPP-131 PCB, other stack devices are equal to 11kW. *R.IGBT: Regenerative IGBT
⑤ Cable color application
⑥
Volts
C able for signal
C able for communication
10V & below
Blue
Blue/W hite
11~50V
B rown
-
51~415V
Red
-
Vinyl color(cap) of motor power cable application (from 23th manufacturing week of 2002)
DIV.
R,U
S,V
T,W
Color
Black
Red
Blue
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 16/19
⑦ Transformer for control power application. The transformer is different depending on door type. DIV.
Drawing NO
Application
SBD1
AEG02C272*A,B
-
Korean market only
SAV1,MAV1
AEG05C368*A
380, 400, 440V
Terminal 12P
DAV1,HAV1
AEG05C368*B
380, 400, 440V
Terminal 12P
Remark
⑧ ROM VERSION (Dated on Mar. 2003) DIV.
Version
OS ROM
V2.02 / V2.03
M_LON ROM
V2.00 / V2.01
DPC-140 PCB DPC-121 PCB
OS ROM
V3.01 / V3.20
DCL-242 PCB DCL-243 PCB
C_LON ROM
V2.00 / V2.01
Remark
ROM Type: M27C2001-12F1
DOC-120 PCB
TKXS TR M/C: V3.01 (TCD58)
⑨ Traveling Cable & EVV Cable ★ Standard: Signal cable(36C)+Power cable(6C)+Communication cable(2C) In case of DAV1 door type: Signal cable(42C)+Power cable(6C)+Communication cable(2C) applied. ★ In case that Y5, 6 are applied, additional signal cable(30C) would be added. (Observation elevator, Air conditioner, VMD, Car Door Locking Device, etc)
※ Cut view of the cables are shown on appendix.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Appendix1. Cut view of Traveling cable
*BK: Black, WH: White
Appendix2. Cut view of EVV cable
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 17/19
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 18/19
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Appendix3. PCB application 1) PCB in Control Panel DIV.
PCB
DWG. NO
Application
Remark
DOC PCB
DOC-120 PCB ASY
AEG02C257*B
Standard
OS ROM MC272001
DOA PCB
DOA-100 PCB ASY
3X06304*A
Standard
DPC PCB
DPC-140 PCB ASY
AEG10C432*A
Standard
DOV PCB
DOV-200 PCB ASY
AEG05C369*A
Auto announcement
DPB PCB
DPB-100 PCB
AEG02C265*A
Standard
Brake PCB
DPP-131 PCB ASY
AEG02C267*A
Motor 5.5~15kW
15kW S-IPM
DPP-111 PCB ASY
AEG02C293*B
Motor 18~22kW
IGBT
AEG05C281*B
SAV1, MAV1 DOOR
Door Fuse[3A]
AEG05C281*C
DAV1, HAV1 DOOR
Door Fuse[6A]
AEG05C338*A
Fire, private power
R1HI RELAY N/A
DPP PCB DOP PCB
DOP-116 PCB ASY DOM-110A PCB ASY
DOM PCB DOM-111A PCB ASY DOR-100C PCB ASY DOR-101 PCB ASY DOR-110A PCB ASY DOR PCB
DOR-120 PCB ASY
DOR-131 PCB ASY
IFMAIN2 PCB
IFMAIN2 PCB ASY
Di1 machine
AEG05C338*B
Fire, private power
R1HI RELAY
AEG05C322*A
Standard, emergency
R1HI RELAY N/A
AEG05C322*B
Standard, emergency
R1HI RELAY
AEG05C288*A
Korean emergency
AEG00C697*A
Supervisory panel
AEG00C697*B
Korean supervisory panel
R4FSX RELAY N/A R4FSX RELAY
AEG05C290*A
Fire
R4FMX RELAY N/A
AEG05C290*B
Emergency (export)
R4FMX RELAY
AEG02C262*A
Private power
AEG05C286*A
Standard
AEG05C286*B
Micro leveling
R1ML RELAY
AEG05C286*C
Emergency
R4LF RELAY
AEG05C286*D
Micro leveling & emergency
R1ML&R4LF RELAY
2R25081*A
VMD
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 19/19
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
2) PCB in others DIV.
PCB
DWG. NO
Application
AEG08C734*A DCL PCB
DCL-243 PCB ASY
AEG08C734*C AEG08C734*D
Standard
AEG08C734*E DCD PCB
DHG PCB
17~24 floor 9~16 floor 1~8 floor
DCD-201 PCB ASY
2R24690*A
SAV1 DOOR
DCD-203 PCB ASY
2R24690*C
MAV1 DOOR
DCD-204 PCB ASY
2R24690*B
DAV1 DOOR
AEG02C376*A
Standard
DHG-161 PCB ASY
Remark 25~32 floor
AEG02C376*B
Duplex
HUC,HDC,HI2,HF1,HF2,HC1,HC2 MIC
DHI-201 PCB ASY
3X08831A
2 digits(vertical type)
IND TYPE :VID TYPE INDICATOR
DHI-221 PCB ASY
3X08837A
2 digits(horizontal type)
IND TYPE :HID-A/C132
DHI-231 PCB ASY
3X08840A
2 digits(horizontal type)
IND TYPE :HID-A/C122
DHI-430 PCB ASY
AEG05C867*A
2 digits(vertical & slim type)
IND TYPE :VID-M532S
DHI-440 PCB ASY
AEG05C868*A
3 digits(vertical & slim type)
IND TYPE :VID-M532S
DCI-210 CB ASY
3X03440A
1 digit
CPI TYPE : CID-10
DCI-230 PCB ASY
3X03442A
0 digit
OPB TYPE : CBM-10,21,31C
DHF-120 PCB ASY
AEG02C264*A
H.Lantern, H.Chime
DHF-121 PCB ASY
AEG02C264*B
MULTI PCB
MULTI PCB ASY
AEN06C601*A
OPB sharing
EM.UNIT
EM UNIT ASY
3R45835A
12V DC
INTERPHONE PCB
OPB INTERPHONE PCB
2R23182A
OPB INTERPHONE
DAC PCB
DAC-200 PCB ASY
AEG00B205*A
ALP
DHI PCB
DHF PCB
SIMPLEX DUPLEX (HF2,HFP2,HFU2,HFD2 MIC) SUB, disabled OPB
Annunciator
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 0/20
Date
July.2006
Doc. No.
Index 1. Description of ANN screen………………………………………………………. 1 1.1 Initial screen of annunciator ………………………………………………..…1 1.2 ACD MODE ……………………………………...……………………………..2 2. ANN Function Mode ………………………………………………………...……3 3. Annunciator Mode………………………………………………………...……….6 4. Trace Data reference Method ……………………………………………..…...16 4.1 Mode for Error Log Table reference …………………………………….......16 4.2 Key function………………………………………………………………..…...16 4.3 Additional Information Flag Table ………………………………………..….18
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 1/21
1. Description of ANN screen 1.1. Initial screen of annunciator Initial screen : When the main power turn on, LCD display will show as below. C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
R1
A
C
D
=
0
4
R2
E
0
0
0
-
0
R3
1
1
0
0
1
C7
C8
[ 0 1
0
R4
C9 C10 C11 C12 C13 C14 C15
0
1
]
1
0
0
0
0
0
K
:
0 1
0
0
1
1
0 0
① ACD=27(Column1~ 6) : Operation Code( ex: 27*Auto operation, 4*Maintenance ※ Refer to the MODE Description
② 01FL(Column 8 ~11) : Present floor ③ 00%(Column 13 ~ 16) : On stop, present load weight (%) of the elevator. 2) Row 2 : When an error occurs, it shows the trouble code of the top level error, condition of the operation, output of main signal and direction of elevator. ① E000(Column 2 ~ 4) : Trouble code of top level error.(TCD No. 1 ~ 255) ex)
031
DC LINK Overvoltage
116
POSI ON error(LDU)
052
INV reverse running detection
172
SD1U input error
084
R5SC RELAY ON error
200
CNET LON comm. Error
② 00(Column 6 ~ 7) : Operation condition of the top level error ex)
01
R5SC Cut
10
FAST RUN Cut
02
R5SC Cut possible
20
SAFETY Drive operation possible
04
C1ST Cut
40
REST operation possible
08
C1ST Cut possible
80
HALL CALL Cut possible
③ 100100(Column 9 ~ 14) : Displays output of main signals.
% S
1) Row 1 : Operation mode, present floor, load weight and speed of elevator.
operation...)
C16
1
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 2/21
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
- "1" : Means that switches, relay and contactors, etc. are operating. - "0" : Means that switches, relay and contactors, etc. are not operating. - Each column means as follows;
R5SC
C9
C1ST
C10
DOOR OPEN command
C13
C1BR
C11
C1BS
C12
DOOR CLOSE command
C14
④ S(C16) : Displays the present direction of elevator. -
"S" : STOP
"U" : UP
"D" : DOWN
3) Row 3 : Displays input condition of main signal such as switches, relays and contactor, etc.
C1
R5SC
C5
LDC
C9
C1ST
C13
CDS
C2
48V
C6
LDCX
C10
C1BR
C14
DCLS
C3
UL
C7
SDS1D
C11
SUPPRESS
C15
DOLS
C4
DL
C8
SDS1U
C12
LDS
C16
SES
- "1" : Means that switches, relay and contactors, etc. are operating. -
"0" : Means that switches, relay and contactors, etc. are not operating.
1.2 ACD MODE Mode
Description
Mode
Description
Description
Mode
00
Stop
01
ALP operation
02
Earthquake control door open
03
Failure
04
MAINT operation
05
Earthquake control finished
06
Earthquake control
07
Earthquake ctrl slow opr
08
Bottom F slow opr (Spec.ROM F height error)
09
F/H measurement prep.
0A F height meas. Opr
0B
Bottom F slow opr (C.RAM F height error)
0C Unused
0D Unused
0E
2
0F 1st fire operation
10
Arrival opr finished
11
All Fs opr after earthquake ctrl
12
Emergency return opr.
13
Fireman opr
14
Fireman return opr
15
Rescue arrival opr.
16
Rescue opr
17
Rescue arrival opr finished
18
Rescue return opr.
19
Fire operation finished
1A
Fire opr
1C TM temp. detecting opr
1D
Unused
1E EGN driven opr finished
1F
EGN driven opr
20
CP temp.detecting opr finished
21
CP temp. detecting opr.
22
REST
23
Standby opr finished
24
ATT operation
25
Semi-auto opr
26
Backup opr
27
Auto-operation
28
Aircon. drain oper.
1B
TM temp. detecting opr finished
nd
fire opr
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 3/21
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 4/21
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
2. ANN Function Mode
Annunciator function mode MAIN MODE
Classification
SUB MODE
MAIN MODE
KEY Input
Operation
Floor height measurement Op.
★ A12E
related mode
Input lowest floor call
★ A13E
Memory
Input middle floor call
★ A14E
Input highest floor call
★ A15E
Input lowest floor call (Hold)
★ A16E
Input middle floor call (Hold)
★ A17E
Input highest floor call (Hold)
★ A18E
KEY Input
3
FFFF
FFFF
CxxE
DATA READ & WRITE
★ A21E
Address INC
0
★ A22E
Address DEC
8
Address Input
xxxxE
TRACE DATA READ
Address Re-input
BBB
PROTECTION release
AAE
Data Input
xxE 0
(TRACE when error occurs
Item DEC
8
5000h ~ )
Block INC
1
Block DEC
9
Item INC
0
(TRACE when reset occurs
Item DEC
8
4400h ~ )
Block INC
1
Block DEC
9
Item INC
0
Item DEC
8
Statistics Data read &
A23E
xx -> Floor
Item INC
TRACE DATA READ
A24E
A25E
Deletion
Statistics Data deletion
A26E
Reset count without power failure
A27E
Emergency stop TRACE
A28E
Data read
related mode
KEY Input
Input random floor call
related mode
Spec
SUB MODE START
Resetting
SPEC DATA READ & WRITE
DATA Deletion
CCCC
Deletion check
E
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
FFFF FFFF
Item INC
0
Item DEC
8
Deletion all
CCCC
★ A31E
Address INC
★ A32E
Address DEC
8
Address Input
xxxxE
0
Address Re-input
BBB
PROTECTION release
AAE
Data Input
xxE
FFFF
FFFF
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 5/21
※ ★ mark is same function as DI1 model. ※ ★ mark is same function as DI1 model
Annunciator function mode MAIN MODE
Classification
MAIN MODE Error
SUB MODE KEY Input
TCD DISPLAY
★ A41E
ERROR LOG DISPLAY
★ A42E
related mode
SUB MODE
Resetting KEY Input
KEY Input
TABLE INC
0
FFFF
TABLE DEC
8
TABLE INC
0
TABLE DEC
8
First error
1
Last error
9
Display mode change
C
FFFF
(Time->Trace)
DSP mode
ERROR LOG CLEAR
★ A43E
TCD CLEAR
★ A44E
DSP READ
★ A51E
Address INC
0
Address DEC
8
Address Input
xxxxE
Address Re-input
BBB
FFFF
DSP SPEC WRITE
★ A52E
Parameter
NO LOAD POINT SET
★ A61E
related mode
FULL LOAD POINT SET
★ A62E
Load Input
xxxE
FFFF
HALF LOAD POINT SET
A65E
Load Input
xxxE
FFFF
C
FFFF
RTC SET
★ A69E
FFFF
Date/Time mode change Data Input
xxE
State check
OS ROM version check
A01E
FFFF
mode
DSP ROM version check
A02E
FFFF
PCB Protection check
A03E
FFFF
Multi-step deceleration value check
A06E
FFFF
Door condition check
A71E
FFFF
Car Load display
A86E
FFFF
Device Test
Hall Check Mode
A82E
FFFF
mode
Car Check Mode
A83E
POSI measurement mode
★ A85E
110% Function test mode
A87E
SDS Test mode
A89E
FFFF UP operarion
UP Switch
DN operation
DN Switch
Testing Load Input (%)
FFFF
xxE
FFFF
SDS Test (UP)
3
FFFF
SDS Test (DN)
7
MMR Elevator_SI Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 6/21
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
※ ★ mark is same function as DI1 model
Annunciator function mode MAIN MODE
Classification
3. Annunciator MAIN Mode MODE
Other mode
LCD INITIALIZE
SUB MODE KEY Input
SUB MODE
Resetting KEY Input
KEY Input
" 00000 "
FFFF
DCO On Mode
A84E
FFFF
110% Cut mode
★ A88E
CRT Data reset
A90E
ESMI Control(Maint)
A91E
A93E
ESMI Control(Inspection)
A92E
A93E
ESMI Control Reset
A93E
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 7/21
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
00000 = LCD Initialize ** Preparation ** 1. Set the S/W 3 on DOC-120 PCB to the DOA Off position. 2. Set the S/W 3 to the DOA On position after connects between DOA-100 and
DOC-120.
** Screen check ** 1. Press the '0' over 4 times and then LCD will be displayed within 3 sec. A01E = OS ROM Version check ** Screen check ** 1. Check the Ver. No and Date at Row 4 after input A01E. 2. Ex) Version 1.0, creation date is July 15th 1999.
A C D = 2 7 E 0 0 0 - 0 0
[
5 ]
5 0 %
1 0 0
0 0
S
1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 V 0 1 . 0 0 9 9 / 0 7 / 1 5
3. Auto-reset about 2.5 sec passed. A02E = DSP ROM Version check ** Screen check ** 1. Check the Ver. No and Date at Row 4 after input A02E. 2. Ex) Version 1.0, creation date is July.1999.
A C D = 2 7 E 0 0 0 - 0 0
[
5 ]
5 0 %
1 0 0
0 0
S
1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 V 0 3 . 0 0 9 9 . 0 7
3. Auto-reset about 2.5 sec passed. A03E = PCB Protection check ** Screen check ** 1. In case that the PCB Protection function is not applied (for export) - Shows "PROTECT DESABLED" at Row 4.
A C D = 2 7 E 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
[
Protection function is applied (for domestic) - Shows "PROTECT ENABLED" at Row 4.
A C D = 2 7 P e r mi
Auto-reset about 6 sec passed.
1 0 0
0 0
S
D I S A B L E D
[
s s i
R E MA I N P R O T E C T
3.
5 0 %
1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
P R O T E C T
2.
5 ]
:
5 ] o n
5 0 % :
X
3 3 6 H o u r E N A B L E D
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 8/21
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
CXXE = Random floor call ** Screen check **
A C D = 2 7
1. If makes call of 8th floor : 'C08E' Input.
E 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
If makes call of 12th floor : 'C12E' Input.
[
6 ] 1 0 0
5 0 % 0 0
S
1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 K : C 0 8 E
A06E = Multi-step deceleration function Parameter check ** Screen check ** 2
1. Multi-deceleration function is not applied,
S t e p
D e c e l
annunciator will be shows 'DISABLED'
- - >
e r a t i
o n
D I S A B L E D
Auto-reset if press the any key.
K :
2. Multi-deceleration function is applied, annunciator will be shows as picture.
T 9 = 1 . 0 T 1 0 = 0 . 5 A c c = . 3 3 J e r k = . 3 3
Row 1 Data (unit=sec)
P l
T9 : Time setting of 1st deceleration zone velocity : Rising Time Set (Multi-step deceleration
a t e :
U P : [ 1 4 ]
4 9 6 0
m m
D N : [ 0 3 ]
function)
T10: Time setting of 1st deceleration zone uniform velocity Row 2 Data Max. acceleration and
Jerk of 1st deceleration zone according to setting of T9 and T10.
Row 3 Data (unit=mm) Running distance from 2nd deceleration start point to stop position of E/L, it is corresponding to above data (Row 2 Data) ; Min. distance from last floors level to shelter plate Row 4 Data shelter plate fixing distance
3. Auto-reset if press the any key.
A23E = Error TRACE Data read (Error TRACE DATA clear A22E $3FF2 =>”00”)
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 9/21
** Screen check ** 1. "TRC X-Y" will be displayed after input A23E X : Traced Total Block No.
Y : Present
Block No.
Screen of A23E
A C D = 0 3
[
F ]
E 0 0 0 - 0 0
1 0 0
5 0 % 0 0
S
0 0 : 5 0 0 0 = 0 8 2 4 1 6 2 2 T R C 5 3 0 - 1 K :
Item No.
Address Traced Block No.
Total Block No.
2. To read the Item No. on the higher, input '0' or lower , input '8' ex) If you input '0' two times on A23E initial screen, indicates as below.(Address will be increase 4 per one) LCD Screen A C D = 0 3
[
F ]
5 0 %
E 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 S 0 2 : 5 0 0 8 = 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 1 T R C
3 - 1
K :
The displayed data and address are Hexadecimal value. 3. To read the Block No. on the higher, input '1' or lower , input '9' ex) If you input '1' one time on A23E initial screen, indicates as below. (Address will be increase 400 per one) A C D = 0 3
[
F ]
5 0 %
E 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 S 0 0 : 5 4 0 0 = 0 8 2 4 1 6 2 2 T R C
3 - 2
Note] Refer to the Trace Data reference Method
K :
4.To cancel A23E mode, input 'FFFF' A24E = Reset TRACE Data read ** Screen check ** 1. The method is same as above A23E mode. (Address start from 4400)
A C D = 0 3
F ]
5 0 %
E 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 S 0 0 : 4 4 0 0 = 0 8 2 4 1 6 2 2 T R C
2.To cancel A24E mode, input 'FFFF'
[
3 - 1
K :
MMR Elevator_SI Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 10/21
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
A25E = Statistic Data read ** Screen check ** 1. "STA DATA" will be displayed at Row 4 after input A25E. LCD Screen A C D = 2 7
[
F ]
5 0 %
E 0 0 0 - 0 0
1 0 0
0 1 =
4 5 . 0 2 3 k M
S T A
D A T A
0 0
S
Note] Refer to the Trace Data reference Method
K :
Statistic data Number
Statistic value
2.To read data number on higher, input '0' or lower '8' ex) If you input '0' two time on A25E initial screen, indicates as below. LCD Screen A C D = 2 7
[
F ]
E 0 0 0 - 0 0 0 3 = S T A
5 0 %
1 0 0
0 0
S
2 3 8 5 c n t D A T A
K :
Statistic data Number
Total running count
3.To clear the value of Data number, input 'CCCC'.
But, number 1~9 are impossible to clear.
ex) If you input "CCCC"at data number 12, the original data will be changed to '0'. LCD Screen
Note] The Units of statistic data
A C D = 2 7
[
E 0 0 0 - 0 0
F ] 1 0 0
1 2 = S T A
5 0 % 0 0
S
0 c n t C C C C K :
D A T A
1) Distance [km] 2) Time 3) Count
[hh:mm:ss] [cnt]
4) Rate [%]
4.To cancel A25E mode, input 'FFFF' A26E = Statistic Data Clear ** Screen check ** 1. All statistic data in Data number 10~22 will be clear after input A26'E'. A C D = 2 7
[
E 0 0 0 - 0 0 S T A
F ] 1 0 0
D A T A
[ E ] E N T E R
5 0 % 0 0
S
R E S E T K :
2.To cancel A26E mode, input 'FFFF' without clear.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 11/21
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
A27E = Non power failure Reset Count read ** Screen check ** 1. "ResetCnt" will be displayed at Row 4 after input A27E. LCD Screen A C D = 2 7
[
F ]
5 0 %
E 0 0 0 - 0 0
1 0 0
C n t = 0 0 1
1 1 0 1 1 3 3 1
R e s e t C n t
0 0
S the latest occurred reset (Nov. 1st 13:31)
K : Non power failure Reset Count
2. To cancel A27E mode, input 'FFFF' 3. Non power failure Reset Count will cleared when the Log Clear(A43E) mode is accomplished. 4. To clear the reset count when the maintenance finish by A43E.
A28E = Emergency stop Trace Data read ** Screen check ** 1. "ESTPxx-yy" will be displayed at Row 4 after input A28E. LCD Screen A C D = 2 7 F L = 0 5
[
F ]
D A T A =
D A T E = 0 7 / 1 0
5 0 % 0 0 0 2 1 6 : 1 5
E S T P 0 2 - 0 1 K : Total Traced data count
The rank of the present Traced data count
2. Row 2 "FL=" Emergency stop occurred floor, "DATA=" The reason of the emergency stop, it is related toTCD 164. Row 3 "DATE=" Data of emergency stop occurred time. (Occur on July. 10th 16:15 at 5th floor by safety circuit off) 3. '0' key for displaying the next data and before data is displayed by '8' key. To clear all data has been stored, input 'CCCC' and auto-reset the mode. 'FFFF' is reset this mode without data clear
A65E = Half Load point set (50% precision load setting)
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 12/21
** Preparation ** 1. Loading weight
40% ~ 60% on the cage at bottom floor.
2. NORMAL/STOP S/W to STOP position in controller. 3. S/W2 to WRITE position on DOC PCB 4. Check if R5SC(Safety circuit check) Relay is OFF 5. Make sure that NO LOAD POINT setting passed and then try to HALF LOAD setting. **
Screen check **
1. Input A65E LCD Screen A C D = 0 3
[
E 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
1 ] 1 0 0
4 2 % 0 0
S
1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
A C D = 0 3 1 1 0 0 1 L O A D
K : A 6 5 E
Indicates 'LOAD ?' at Row 4, input the percentage ex) 50% --> 050E,
[
1 ]
E 0 0 0 - 0 0
1 0 0
4 2 % 0 0
S
1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 ?
K : 0 5 0 E
of the loaded weights with decimal value.
60% --> 060E
2. When the weight compensation for comp. chain/rope is done. Indicates 'SUCCESS' at Row 4, if fail, the process will show 'FAIL'. LCD Screen A C D = 0 3
[
E 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
1 ] 1 0 0
5 0 % 0 0
S
1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
S U C C E S S
K :
** Reference ** When the car is not located in bottom floor, indicates 'MOVE BOT'at Row 4. 'R5SC OFF': Safety relay is OFF
** -
A C D = 0 3
[
E 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 F A I L
1 ] 1 0 0
4 2 % 0 0
1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 K :
Check below if failed the Half Load point setting * NORMAL/STOP S/W position (STOP) * S/W2 (WRITE)
The present situation for Half Load Point ** The real load in car is detected by set value of no load and full load point. But in case the relation of detecting feature graph is not line symmetry but curved line symmetry, some error may occur around half load about 8% even the detected value around of no load and full load are almost exact, Then performing the half load point setting, it will reduce the load detecting error.
A71E = Door condition check
S
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 13/21
** Screen check ** 1. "INV DOOR" will be displayed at Row 4 after input A71E. LCD Screen A C D = 0 3
[
E 0 0 0 - 0 0 O : 0 0 0 I N V
Row 3
1 ] 1 0 0
0 0 % 0 0
S
I : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
D O O R
K :
Door output status
O:0 0 0 Disabled persons door signal ( '1' On ) Nudging signal output ( '1' On ) Door CPU Retry signal ( '1' On )
Row 3 I:0
Door input status
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 DOOR CPU WDT Signal( '1' Normal ) DOOR Error #1 DOOR Error #2 DOOR Error #3 MON Signal CLS
( '1' Detection )
Signal
( '1' Detection )
** Door Error ** ** Caution ** Door Er r or 3
Door Er r or 2
Door Er r or 1
Posi t i on er r or
0
0
1
SAV1,MAV1,DAV1,HAV1
Temper at ur e er r or
0
1
1
door. Door Error1 will set
Vol t age er r or
1
0
1
Cur r ent er r or
1
1
1
over voltage, over current.
Command er r or
1
1
0
2. Refer to TCD 192 and Door
1.In case the site has applied
when an error occurring as Door thermal, low voltage,
H/W Ske. for more Information.
A82E = Hall Check mode
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 14/21
** Caution ** This mode for checking the Hall B/T ID,Indicator,Hall call register lamp,Hall Lantern... ** Screen check ** 1. "HALL CHK" will be displayed at Row 4 after input A82E. This mode is available under attendant operation and OLS ON status. LCD Screen A C D = 2 7
[
E 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 H A L L
F ] 1 0 0
0 0 % 0 0
S
1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 C H K
K :
** Check point ** 1). Dip S/W setting condition of Floor ID on DHG PCB.(HEX value) 2). DC 24V check between HA connector 3 and 4 . 3). Check if light on of B/T lamp till 2~3sec after press the B/T under HA is connected condition. 4). Check if IND Digital, Direction lamp, Additional lamp(Inspect ,Full)
are in due order
flickling. 5). Separates the HA connector from DHG PCB, when above 2,4 items are normal condition. 6). Repeats above 1)~5)items on each floors B/T. § Separates the HA connector from DHG PCB, when all indicators are turned off for protection of PCB from electric shock. 2. To cancel A82E mode, input 'FFFF'. A83E = Car Check mode ** Caution ** This mode for checking the DCL PCB ID in car side. ** Screen check ** 1. "CAR CHECK" will be displayed at Row 4 after input A83E. This mode is available under attendant operation and OLS ON status. LCD Screen 1) Displays the floor character (B2~B1, 1 ~ 10, 20, 30...) in due order.
A C D = 2 7
[
E 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 C A R
F ] 1 0 0
per 6 sec.
2. To cancel A83E mode, input 'FFFF'. A86E = Car Load Mode
S
1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 C H K
K :
2). Lights on the CPI lamp (UP,DOWN,FULL,OUT OF SERVICE) in due order. 3). Repeats above 1)~2) items
0 0 % 0 0
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 15/21
** Screen Check ** 1."WD:XXX%" will be displayed at Row 4 after input A86E. XXX is counted the present car load (%) . LCD Screen A C D = 2 7
[
F ]
0 4 %
E 0 0 0 - 0 0
1 0 0
0 0
1 4 F
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
WD : 0 0 4 %
S AD Converter data of Potentiometer or DFTR
K : AD Converter input data of second POT(DFTR)
AD Converter input data of first POT(DFTR)
Row 4 "WD:XXX%"
XXX means changed load data from load sensors input loads.
2. To cancel A86E mode, input 'FFFF'. A87E = 110% Function test mode ** Screen Check ** 1. "110->
" will be displayed at Row 4 after input A87E.
LCD Screen A C D = 2 7
[
E 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
F ] 1 0 0
0 4 % 0 0
S
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0
1 1 0 - >
K :
1) The availableness data for input on "110->XX" is from 0 upto 99. ex) When you try to 110% load test with 20% of car load, input "20E". "110->20" will be displayed at Row 4 after input "20E". 2) If the load is heavy then displayed data, light in "FULL" lamp, BZ operation and Door close holding. 2.To cancel A87E mode, input 'FFFF'. A88E = 110% Cut Mode * 110% Cut Mode is a function that E/L can running one time with 110% load in car under superintendent
inspects.
** Screen Check ** 1. "110% CUT" will be displayed at Row 4 after input A88E then disappear after about 2.5 sec passed.
A C D = 2 7 E 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 %
2. The mode will be auto-canceled after car running start. A89E = SDS Check Mode
[
F ] 1 0 0
0 4 % 0 0
S
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 C U T
K :
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 16/21
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
** Screen Check ** 1. "SDS CHK" will be displayed at Row 4 after input A89E. LCD Screen A C D = 2 7 [ F ] 0 4 % 1 U : 0 0 0 0 1 D : 1 7 3 9 2 U : 0 0 0 0 S D S
2 D : 2 6 7 3
C H K
S/W operates distance (unit:mm)
K :
2. Check of SDS operates position -> If the car is not reached at top floor, 1U/2U data will be show "0000". After running to top floor, will be shows measured data as below; A C D = 2 7 [ F ] 0 4 % 1 U : 1 7 3 4 1 D : 1 7 3 9 2 U : 2 6 6 8 2 D : 2 6 7 3 S D S
C H K
K :
3. Compulsion deceleration function test ** Caution : Testing without passenger and under door closed (DMC S/W ON).
A C D = 2 7 [ F ] 0 4 % 1 U : 1 7 3 4 1 D : 1 7 3 9 2 U : 2 6 6 8 2 D : 2 6 7 3 S D S
C H K
K : 3
Key in "3" for the Up direction test after the car is located at below than middle floor. Check if the car deceleration is changing well by SDS operates. Deceleration running till UL S/W operates) Key in "7" for the Down direction test after
A C D = 2 7 [ F ] 0 4 % 1 U : 1 7 3 4 1 D : 1 7 3 9 2 U : 2 6 6 8 2 D : 2 6 7 3 S D S
C H K
K : 7
the car is located at above than middle floor. Check if the car deceleration is changing well by SDS operates. (Deceleration running till DL S/W operates)
4. To cancel A89E mode, input 'FFFF'. A90E = CRT Data Reset Mode All recorded CRT control data reset in Main B/D . (Service floor data, Door
timer)
** Screen Check ** 1."CRT Reset" will be displayed at Row 4 after input A90E then disappear after about 2.5 sec passed
4. Trace Data reference Method
A C D = 2 7
[
E 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 C R T
F ] 1 0 0
0 4 % 0 0
S
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0
R e s e t K :
2. MODE Auto cancellation
MMR Elevator_SI Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 17/21
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
4.1. Mode for Error Log Table reference : Key in ‘A42E’ under normal mode 4.2. Key function ‘0’ :
Log Table Index Increment
‘8’ :
Log Table Index Decrement
‘1’ :
Scanning of the first occurred TCD
‘9’ :
Scanning of the last occurred TCD
‘C’ :
Displays TCD occurrence time ÅÆ Displays Trace Data (Toggle)
‘FFFF’ :
Escape from Error Log Table reference mode
* Key usage is same as under trace data displaying mode.
< Occurrence time displaying > Breakdown time
A C D = 2 7
[
E 2 2 3 - 0 0 C n t = 3 L O G 1 1 - 0 1
1 2 ] 1 0 % 0 5 1 5 1 4 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 K :
Each 2 digit display Month, day, hour, minute May 15th14H 20M
Trouble solved time
Displays Occurrence sequence: The first breakdown of all 11 trouble Breakdown times : Initialized when log table be cleared
Trouble code
< Trace Data Displaying >
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 18/21
Lift position when breakdown Operation mode when breakdown
Running speed when breakdown
[ 1 0 ]
A C D = 0 3
Current
E 2 2 3 - 0 0
reference TCD
Car run direction
6 0 M
1 0 0 %
C 1 F 0 0 0 0 0 0 T R C 1 1 - 0 1 K :
when breakdown
U
0 0 0 0 Load when breakdown
Displays Log Data Sequence and Trace
Additional
Data reference mode Output contact
Step when break
when breakdown
Input contact when breakdown
information
Sped Profile
down
Refer to B.
About each breakdown
Refer to C.
Refer to A.
A. Input contact Bit Table 23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
R5SX
SCS
R5SC
SUPRS
C1ST
C1BR
DOLS
LDS
CDS
LDU
LDC
LDD
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
UL
SD1U
SD2U
SD2D
SD1D
DL
SHOE
RDMC
Maint M
High
R1MM
CLS
* SUPRS : DSP RUN Flag
* R1MM :
MSK operation signal input
* Maint M : Machine room Maint signal Input
* High : Car high switch input
B. Output Contact Bit Table
7 R5SC
6 SUPRS
5 C1ST
C. Speed Profile Step
4 C1BR
3 R2OP
2 R2CL
1 R1ML
0 R2DM
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
0
1
Stop
Smooth wave in beginning part accelerati on
2
3
Steady accelerati on
Smooth wave in finishing part acceleratio n
4
5
Normal speed running
Smooth wave in beginning part deceleratio n
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 19/21
6
7
8
Steady decelerati on
Smooth wave in finishing part decelerati on
Finish speed Profile
4.3. Additional Information Flag Table
TCD
5
0
Servo
2
1
I/O Car
10
56
Hexa decimal value
High mode
70
74
DOC B/D
Gear
R7RD
T/M Rated speed
3 CRT Error Duplex
D C B A
9
8
7 6 5 4
Hall
ANN
Encoder Motor IGBT CT turn Shelter plate No. Floor No.
96
97
98
99
ΦB miss
ON CAR
CLS
CLS
R5SC
OFF error
ΦA miss
IN CAR CDS
CDS
C1ST
ON error
Normal (CAR) Normal (Russia m/c room)
LDS
LDS
C1BR
OLS
OLS
R2LD
OLS LDC SD1U SD1D M/C room maint Normal (CAR)
Dispatc h Spec SVC. 2 stepdecelera t-ion time
Set bit is input of error detected
Remark
F
E
Additional Information Bit
Mode
92
114
5
4
CLS
SD2D CDS CDS CDS CDS
2
117
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
SD2U LDS LDS LDS LDS
SD1U OLS
SD1D
119 126 130
Hexadecimal Value (m/min) Hexadecimal value
132
Doc. No.
133 134
Compu lsion deceler ation OLS OLS OLS
RDZ RDZ RDZ
Input contact when error detected (When activated ‘1’)
0
CLS
3
1
CLS
OFF error ON error
Input contact when error detected (When activated ‘1’)
6
116
Input contact when error detected (When activated ‘1’)
7
CLS
OFF error ON error
Input contact when error detected (When activated ‘1’)
8
TCD
Load status when error detected (15th bit : minus load)
E D C B A 9
Field Industrial Engineering
Counted speed in operation controller when error detected.
F
Bit
FOD
Set bit is off error detected switch.
Remark
MMR Elevator_SI Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 20/21
Date July. 2006
135
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
188
R5SY Off
Detect over speed
Over speed
R5SC Off
LDS
Operation error Floor height Sum Operation cut
LDS Off
OLS
Safety cut
IN CAR On Error detection Normal Off C1BR Off
7 8 A 9
CDS
July. 2006
190
191~195
Paramet er SPEC error Off error
Door error 1
Down On error Up On error
196 Reopen count excess
Door error 2 Door error 3
Abnormal speed when power fault Abnormal direction when power fault SDS Over Speed Abnormal Backup RAM
ON CAR On
Bit
4
3
ALP error
CDS Off
Level 500mm overshoot
CLD
0
171
1
168 Detect low speed
2
164 R5SX Off
5
136 Mode error
Date
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
6
TCD
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 21/21
C1ST Off
Photo-shoe input Time over in case Bit #0 is reset.
Refer to “A71E” mode in ANN manual
Set bit is a reason of error
Input contact when error detected (When activated ‘1’)
Set bit is a reason of error
Set bit is a reason of error
Set bit is a reason of error
Set bit is a reason of error
Remark
F
E D
C
B
DL activated UL activated
Pcb
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 0/45
Date
July.2006
Doc. No.
Index 1. PCB application…………………………..…………………………………..…1 2. DOC PCB…………..………………………………….………….…………......3 3. DOA-100 PCB…………………………….…………..………………….…….11 4. DOP-116 PCB………………………..……………………..……..……….…..11 5. DPC PCB……………………………………………………………………….14 6. DPP-10X PCB…………………………………………………..……….….…19 7. DCL PCB…………………………………………………………..…………...23 8. DOV PCB………………………………………….………………..………….27 9. DOS PCB………………………………………………………………………29 10. DHG PCB……………………………………………….……………………34 11. DCM PCB…………………………………………..………………………...40 12. DPB PCB…………………………………………………………………….42 13. DOR PCB…………………………………………………………………….43
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 1/46
1. PCB application 1.1 PCB classification 1) Classification by name
A
B
Type
Location
C
D
E
F
Function
Speed
Seg.
Work. seg. Working Segment When works are
Function
segmented within a PCB, mark with 0~9.
PCB Segment When the PCBs of the same
PCB speed segment
function has various
1 : 60 ~ 105m／min
forms and are not cla-
2 : 120 ~ 150m／min
ssified in A,B,C and
3 : 180 ~ 240m／min
D, mark with 0~9,
When the PCB is used commonly
A, B… sequentially.
regardless of speed, use the type name developed and applied first.
PCB function segment C : Control P : Power (Power supply) A : Annunciator S : Supervisory panel
PCB location seg.
D:Distributed control
L : LON
P : Power electronics
R : I／O(Input／Output)
O : Operation
D : Door
H : Hall
G : G／A (Gate Array)
C : Car
I : Indicator
D : Door
V :Voice(Voice synthesizer)
S : Monitoring panel
F : Flickering M : Dot Matrices
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 2/46
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
2) PCB application standard Segment
Usage
Speed
Si210 60~105 m/min
Main CPU PCB for operations
DOC-120(Expansion, Unified model)
Control
DSP PCB speed control
DPC - 120, 121
Panel
GDC PCB
DPP - 111,131
Power rectifying section
DOP -116
ANN PCB
DOA - 100
Mic PCB
DOM - 110A
Relay PCB
DOR - 101,110A,120,131
Panel for local Supervisory
DOS-100
Brake Control PCB
DPB-100(Expansion, Unified model)
Safety Relay PCB
DOR-131(Expansion, Unified model)
Car LON PCB
DCL-242
CPI PCB
DCM-10X,11X,12X. DCI-2XX
Hall PCB
DHG - 161
Vertical type PCB
DCM - 1XX,DHI-20X,430,440
Horizontal type PCB
DCM - 11X,DHI-2XX
INV. DOOR PCB
DCD-20X,
Car
Hall
Door
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 3/46
2. DOC PCB 2.1 Layout of DOC PCB 1) Diagram of DOC-120 PCB SW2 1 ST
1
TD1
Green
TD2
Green
1 SM
1 SL
SH
DIR
CA 1 HA 1
Function
SD
DEBUG
ST
HPC I/F
SH SM
HALL Communication
SL
Spare(No use)
TD1
CRT Communication
TD2
CAR Safety SW(1,2fire operation)
CA HA AC
CAR DOOR(OPB SW,SES..) HALL,PIT SW
TD3
INPUT(Fire,Airconditioner...) OUTPUT(Fire,Airconditioner...) R/E power,Φ A,Φ B phase detection
SC
CAR Communication
AF
SW connection in CP
CT
CTT connection in CP
○
Stand by
Comm.Check
⊙
Comm.OK
CRT Comm.
○
Stand by
⊙
Comm.OK
○
Stand by
MIANT
AA
4 5 6
RDZ
ABNORMAL Red
Red
Red
Red
R1ML
Red
R7LF R7FN
AB
R5SC R2LD
RDZ
R1ML
R7LF
○
Safety Error
●
Safety
○
Hall door condition
●
CLOSE
○
DZ
●
Out of
condition
○
CTT OFF
Each CTT
●
CTT ON
Door Zone
opened forcedly
Red
DIR
Red
ALM
Green
SYS1
Green
SYS2
Red
PF
Green
LON
Red
CDS
Normal
●
Detect
ALM
○
Normal
●
Detect
SY S1
⊙
Normal
SY S2
⊙
Normal
Speed CPU WDT
PF
○
Normal
●
Detect
Power failure detect
to VA
R/E direct. detect
connector
Alarm sign. detect
of DPC PCB
Run CPU WDT
LON comm.
LON
⊙
Normal
CDS
○
OPEN
●
CLOSE
check
DSP
Car door operation
5V 15V GND GND G48
condition
LED Condition
BUZ
1
JP1
Function
○
condition
R7FN
SW that detect door open zone with beeping when MG Brake
AF
Safety CTT condition
OPEN
Display ing Condition
LED
Spare
Door open is available at out of DZ under Mainte
R2LD
RAM BackUp Battery
Check
DZ checking during power failure
R5SC
BAT1
TMR1
Function
NOR/ABNOR
NORMAL
MAINT
Red
Hall
Seg.
AB
1 2 3
1
⊙
Comm.OK
DIR
AD
1
Function
Additional output
TB1 PCB power supply(5V, 15V, GND)
AC
Display ing condition
LED
CB
AA
Main CPU Reset
MRES
SW3
CAR Comm. Terminal resistor
SPEC2
1
R/E Direction setting :TR-M/C Normal set :TR-M/C Rev ered set
SM SL
Conn
DOA-100 POWER S/W
SPEC1
LEFT
CB
HJP
RIGHT
1
: able to Write : unable to Write
EXT1
G/A Comm. Terminal resistor set. (Jumper in case of terminal)
ANNUNCIATOR CONNECTOR
EEPROM : Write Enable
Green
TD3
SH
WE
SC
SD
ANN
+5V
○
OFF
⊙
Blinking
●
ON
1 DOC-120 AEG02C257
CT
3 A
2.2 Function of DOC PCB 1) Details DIR (red): Indicates rotary encoder direction setting. If there is any error on the direction setting, LED will light up. If normal, LED will remain off. ALM (red): Indicates alarms. If there is one error among the following 5 conditions, relative LED will light up.
TB1
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Conditions
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 4/46
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Error detection method
1
Safety relay error
R5SC Relay remains OFF
2
DOC PCB Watchdog error
SYS1 LED remains ON or OFF
3
DPC PCB Watchdog error
SYS2 LED remains ON or OFF
4
P48V error
PF LED remains ON (Lights up)
5
LON communication error
SER LED remains ON
SYS1 :Flickers when DOC Watchdog is normal. If abnormal, remains ON or OFF. SYS2 :Flickers when DPC Watchdog is normal. If abnormal, remains ON or OFF. PF : Remains OFF when P48 is normal. If abnormal, remains ON. LON : LED for checking LON communication. If the communication with CAR LON is normal, it will flicker. If abnormal, remains ON or OFF. TD1 : G／A Com checking LED. Flickers during communication and remains OFF other times. TD2 : G／A Com checking LED. Flickers during communication and remains ON other times. TD3 : G／A Com checking LED. Flickers during communication and remains OFF other times. CDS : Car door switch checking LED. When door is closed, it will be turned on. ( Open: OFF) R5SC :Safety checking LED. If normal, remains ON R2LD : Hall door checking LED, it will be turned on when all of hall door are closed RDZ : Door open Zone checking LED. If car is at Door Zone it will be turned off. But it is at out of door zone, it will be turned on R1ML,R7LF, R7FN : CTT work checking LED. when related CTT work, they will be turned on Caution Green LED will flicker and red remains OFF in normal conditions. Yet, TD1 , 2 , 3 LED flicker in a shorter internal than other green LED.
MMR Elevator_SI Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 5/46
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
2) Function table of switches, jumpers and dip switch(located in PCB) No.
Name
Switches
Function
1
SW2
Slide switch
WE : EEPROM writing
2
RESET
Tact
Run CPU Reset
3
SPEC2
DIP SW(8P)
Spec. setting 2
4
SPEC1
DIP SW(4P)
Spec. setting 1
5
TMR1
HEX SW
Light timer of car
6
NOR/ABNOR Jumper 6P
7
DIR
Jumper Pin
Selects rotary encoder direction
8
SH
Jumper Pin
Terminal R setting 1 G／A
9
SM
Jumper Pin
Terminal R setting 2 G／A
10
SL
Jumper Pin
Terminal R setting 3 G／A
11
JP1
Jumper Pin
Terminal R setting 4 G／A
12
SW3
Slide switch
ANN(DOA-100) Power switch
13
MAINT
Jumper Pin
Detects door zone in emergency
Usually + 5V position
Normal
Door open out of DR zone in maint.OPR Removed
① SW2 : WE position → EEPROM writable : when spec.is changed into DOA PCB at the side +5V position → EEPROM unwritable : normal +5V
W
Slide
After spec. modification, JP1 shall be positioned on +5V to prevent the spec. data from deletion. Reset : Reset Run CPU ,Speed CPU and LON CPU
③ SPEC setting 2 : SPEC2 SPEC2
Setting during ON
Setting during OFF
1
Forcedly door closing is invalid
Forcedly door closing is valid
2
Door time fixed(5 sec)
Door time is flexible( SPEC data)
※ Non-defined switch shall be
3
used for other
4
purpose.
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 6/46
SPEC setting 1 : SPEC1 SPEC
Setting during ON
Setting during OFF
1
With duplex operation( DOC-120)
Without duplex operation
2
Lift # 2( DOC-120)
Lift # 1
4
Load detector - Potentiometer
Load detector - MICRO S／W
5
Setting to verification mode
Normal position
6
With voice synthesizer
Without voice synthesizer
3
With emergency and control setting ( In case returning to reference floor by CRT is applied)
7
8
Without emergency and control setting Normal (TCD 41,199)
In-factory checking mode
Car 1 and 2 of Bit 2 can be set only when 1st bit is ON. checking mode of 5th bit is ON, checking points can be registered through CRT monitoring system. In-car light timer setting(TMR1) BIT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
Seg.
No limit
1
2
3
4
5
6
10
15
20
30
45
60
90
E
120 180
Factory set value is BIT A (30 min).
TMR1,
In-car light timer setting, is to set the time SPAN for in-car light to turn OFF when there is no hall call or car call.
Setting Bit value to 0 means, light will be turned ON／OFF by switch.(Remains ON status) Hexa switch is weak, be sure to use cross-shaped driver of a proper size. NOR/ABNOR : Jumper that checking Door Zone in a rescue by handle. - Normal position : NORMAL -
Position during handle operation : ABNORMAL
Jumper 1-2,4-5:Normal
F
MMR Elevator_SI Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 7/46
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
(Fig. 1)
If 1-2 and 4-5 are connected by setting the switch to "Normal" in a normal condition as shown above Fig.1, 48V power is input through LDC and processed in LDC process section. If a rescue operation is required in case of power failure or other errors, set the switch to "Abnormal". Then, the buzzer operated by battery power will sound beyond door opening zone and will not sound in a door opening zone. This function is very convenient for a manual rescue. Reference
: H/W SKELETON. " Hoistway Input Circuit Diagram"
Buzzer will not sound without R5SC relay is not energized, be sure to energize R5SC relay. Be sure to set main MCCB to OFF in a manual rescue operation. Verify that the buzzer sounds beyond door opening zone with this switch in Abnormal position during connection check. Be sure to set the switch in Normal position after operation checking. Auto/Mainte selection :
It is located at DOR-13X PCB in case DOC-120 PCB
is applied. DIR : Decision of the direction of rotary encoder. - Right arrangement
LEFT
: RIGHT
SHORT PIN RIGHT
DIR
- Reverse arrangement: LEFT
In case jumper pin is not jointed, System will consider that right direction. SH : Terminal resistor setting for hall net Set the terminal resistor at 'SH' at each elevator in case of single operation. But in case of parallel operation, set as below Fig.2 E/L #2
E/L #1 Remove SH Jumper Pin
Set 1st rise of Hall Net
Set SH Jumper pin in case of (1 line Hall Net). But remove it in case of 2 line hall nets
SL CONN.
Set 2nd rise of Hall Net
(Fig.2) Hall network for parallel operation
Do not set the terminal resistor 'SL' connector In case of single elevator, insert jumper pin on TRM1 In case of duplex system, remove SH jumper on both elevator, and set the hall type by dip switch( SPEC1-7th pin ON) on DHG PCB of E/L #2
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 8/46
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
SM : Terminal resistance setting of CRT monitoring net.
Remove SM Jumper pin
E/L #2 SM
E/L #1 SM
CRT monitoring panel
Set SM Jumper pin
(Fig.3) CRT monitoring panel network in duplex operation
In case of duplex operation, insert jumper pin into only the side to which CRT monitoring panel is not connected directly.(Farther side from CRT SV panel) SW3 : Power switch for ANN Whenever it is connected to DOC PCB, surely turn off this switch if main power is turned on. After ANN connection, turn on this switch. If you key in '0' 4 times on key pad, the screen will be initialized. Function of each connector in DOC PCB Connector
Number of Pin
Function
CA
18 PIN
Car input signal and door input／output signal
CB
8 PIN
Car side switch input
CT
18 PIN
CTT wiring in Control panel(DOC-120)
AA
8 PIN
Input in control panel
AF
8 PIN
Switch Input in control panel(DOC-120)
AC
8 PIN
Output in control panel (Relay drive)
AB
18 PIN
Input and output(Relay drive) in control panel
HA
10 PIN
Hoist way limit switch input
TB1
TERMINAL BLOCK
SD
9 PIN
RS-232 Serial Port(for DOV-200 Announcement Comm.)
ST
9 PIN
RS-232 Serial Port(for HPC)
AD
4 PIN
Rotary encoder power supply and signal
SH
4 PIN
Hall board G／A communication
SM
4 PIN
Monitoring panel & GEMS G／A communication
SL
4 PIN
G／A communication in Parallel operation(DOC-120)
SC
2 PIN
Car LON communication
DC power supply in DOC PCB
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 9/46
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
2.3 Program IC (Board) Program IC is likely to be removed or changed by light or static electricity as it is written electrically. Much care should be taken in handling. Program element is attached by DOC-XY TYPE sticker. X represents horizontal coordinate(1 15) and Y vertical coordinate(A M) as shown in Fig. 4 1) DOC-120 PCB
①
②
③
④
⑤
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 10/46
Fig. 4. Program IC in DOC-120 PCB
Program IC of DOC PCB Name
Loc. Coor.
Applied IC
Function
U51(EVEN) ①
1A M27C1001,M27C2001 Contains driving CPU O/S and driving program
U52(ODD)
②
2A M27C1001,M27C2001 Contains driving CPU O/S and driving program
U55
③
3A 28C64
Sets spec.
U40
④
5C GAL22V10
Drives speed CPU and output side
U51
⑤
5D 27C256
LON CPU O／S and program
*IC ,M27C2001, is applied to unified type control panel * If each program has erased or damaged, following symptoms will happen Name
Function
Symptoms
U51(EVEN)Operates run CPU
SYS1 LED does not blink.
U52(ODD) Operates run CPU
SYS2 LED does not blink.
U55
Sets spec.
Floor information is garbled.
U40
OUTPUT DRV
Each relay and contactor doesn't operate.
U51
Operates LON CPU
LON CPU O/S and LON program communication is invalid
2) Checking point at failure When SYSI LED doesn't flicker - Verify that +5V voltage is within +4.65V~+5V. - Verify that ROM(27C010) is properly inserted. (Verify that even side and odd side are not switched.) When no letter appears on LCD(Liquid Crystal Display) of DOA-100 PCB - Verify that ANN connector is properly connected. - Make LCD brighter by turning the variable resistance(VR1) of DOA-100 PCB ( New model has nothing) When floor information can not be written - Verify that the jumper of coordinate 3B is set to WE position. (Writing is possible only with WE position)
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 11/46
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
3. DOA-100 PCB 3.1 Description of DOA-100 PCB 1) DOA-100 PCB is composed of LCD and Key pad and connected by DOC PCB and 16P twist flat cable. 2) LCD displays the current state of control panel and can be inputted various commands, address, data, etc. through key pad. 3) As DOA-100 PCB has a timer, the back light turns OFF automatically without any key pad input for about 7 minutes. Press any one of "E", "A", "6" and "2" key on the pad to turn ON the back light again. 3.2 Layout and function of DOA-100 PCB
4. DOP-116 PCB DOP PCBs are the power source PCB of DI 1(60~105) E/L. This is the source of DC 24V(Car LON PCB), DC 48V (Relay,outer signal input I/F power), DC110V(C1ST, C1BR, C1VD contactor power) and AC power source and fuse. This also displays the fuse condition. 4.1 Applicable drawing Type
Assembly drawing
Application
DOP-116
AEG05C281*A
For unified type control panel(SDB1)
AEG05C281*B
For unified type control panel(SAV1,MAV1)
AEG05C281*C
For unified type control panel(DAV1,HAV1)
MMR Elevator_SI Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD Field Industrial Engineering
4.2 Outside view(SIZE : 170*270) of DOP-116 PCB
Fig.1 Layout of DOP-116 PCB
4.3 Input / Output of DOC-116 PCB 1) 3 Phase I/O part
변경
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 12/46
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
2) Single Phase I/O part
* 주기1.
* 주기1. SBD1: 5[A] SAV1,MAV1: 3[A] DAV1,HAV1: 6[A]
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 13/46
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 14/46
5. DPC PCB 5.1 Configuration and Diagram 1) Configuration drawing of DPC-140
OSC 8MHz
RAM KM6161002
EEPROM AT29C512*2
MAIN PCB Comm,& IOIF
Power WDT & CPU rest Circuits
DSP TMS320F(C)240
BUFFER 74F244(5)
PC SERIAL I/F
POWER STACK ERROR
RS422
DPP BOARD
ALP
Communication
ADS7862
HALL CT
ENC-A ENC-B
ROTARY ENCODER ( DOC 1**)
C1VD DRIVER
C1VD CONTACTOR
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 15/46
2) Diagram of DPC-140 PCB
CPU
VA VF VB VC VD VE VG SPI JTAG VDA VJ
POWER(+5,+-15,GND) POWER(+5,+-15,GND) HALL CT C1VD Drive ALP Comm. IO, I/F(DOC1XX PCB) DPP 1XX PCB connection For designer monitor
LED state OFF ON Flicker (2times/1sec)
VD
JP1 JP2 JP3
75/150[A] 100/200[A]
For DA CARD Brake Control
SI
Function
Remark
H/W error detection 1. Low voltage detection 2. Scanning CPU error detection
E/L Normal E/L Stop For normal E/L Monitor
LED1 Red LED2 Green
CPU error CPU error detection & EL condition monitoring
Function Norm al For Designer ROM Write Enable Norm al Sigm a Model set Di Model Set IGBT Type
CPU Normal(STOP) CPU Normal(RUN)
Remark
During ROM w riting SI Di1,2 IGBT Capacity
DA CARD
JP4
MP MC WE NC Sigm a Di1,2
China ALP
JTAG
Jumper Location
60m/m 90~105m/m
SPI
VC
OFF or ON Flicker(2times/1sec) Flicker(4times/1sec)
Remark
ALM CPU
VJ
ALM
Function
VG
VB LED
Seg.
VF
+5V +15V -15V GND
VA
DPC-140 DPC-120
VE VD
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 16/46
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
5.2 Detail of DPC PCB 1) Check connector connection before power input ① In case of 60~105m/min, verify that connector VA(Control power), VB(CT), VC(C1VD), VE(1/0,1/F), VG(GDC), VJ(DPC PCB= Brake control current) are connected. VD(Used for ALP function), VDA(D/A CARD), VH(SERIAL) and VF(Control power for 120~150m/min) are not connected. 2) Check Jumper - Verify that Jumper, inverter H/W over-current detector, are set according to the table Table 1) Setting of J5H(DPC-111,112) and JP4(DPC140) Jumper
Jumper No.
IPM, IGBT Capacity
Motor Capacity
No. 1 ~ 2
50A, 75A, 150A
4.4KW~7.5KW. 13KW~15KW
No. 3 ~ 4
100A, 200A
9.5KW~11KW. 18KW~22KW
Function
Motor Capacity
Table 2) JP1(DPC-140)
Jumper No. MP
50A, 75A, 150A
MC
100A, 200A
Table 3) JP3(DPC-140)
Jumper No.
Function
Motor Capacity
SIGMA
For Sigma Model
Same as unified CP, Brake control current
DI1,2
For Di model
3) Check J1J, J1G(DPC-111,112) or JP2(DPC-140) Jumper Jumper must be inserted to 1~2 pin of J1G at ordinary times(DPC-111.112) (Move jumper to 3~4 pin when you do DSP SPEC writing ) Jumper pin must be inserted to NC pin of JP2 at ordinary times(DPC-140) (Move jumper to 'WE' when you do DSP SPEC writing) Insert jumper to 1~2pin of J1J during software booting(DPC-111,112) Set the jumper to 1~2 of J1G(DPC-111,112) or 'NC' of JP2(DPC-140) when you reset the DOC PCB after DSP SPEC writing. 4) Check control power when inputting power As power voltage is set in the factory, checking is usually unnecessary.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 17/46
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
If circuit operation is abnormal, check the voltage according to the table 4. If the measured value is out of the regular range, never reset the value, and Measure again with another instrument in case of measuring equipment failure. Table 4) Power input terminal Measuring point
Voltage
VA (+5V - GND)
DC + 5V ± 2%
VA (+15V - GND)
DC +15V ± 2%
VA (-15V - GND)
DC -15V ± 2%
Error correction 1. Verify that AC 93~122V is applied to SMPS power input terminal 2. Check the output voltage of SMPS after removing connection between SMPS and DPC PCB. If each power is out of range from allowable error ± 2%, replace SMPS 3. Check the output voltage of SMPS after re-wiring between SMPS and DPC PCB If each power is out of range from allowable error ± 2%, replace SMPS 4. If SMPS is normal, replace DPC PCB
5) Check WDT Verify that CPU LED(Green) flickers at 0.5 second interval with power ON. The LED flickers at 0.25 second interval in motor operation. Caution: WDT(WATCH DOG TIMER) monitors that the program calculation of speed control CPU operates properly. If WDT does not flicker at 0.5 second interval during adjustment or it remains ON or OFF the speed control CPU may seriously fail. Thus every error shall be inspected thoroughly. In such case, check 5V ±15V power, ROM or ROM socket error, or connector connection error. 6) Check ALM LED Verify that LD1 ALM LED(Red) turns ON, and then, OFF after about 2 seconds. ALM LED is for inverter H/W safety check and turns ON when the followings are detected. - Over current is detected in inverter.( J5H (DPC-111,112) or JP4(DPC-140) Jumper is not inserted) - WDT of speed control CPU has failed. - U phase arm -short circuit in case of IPM and GATE SMPS power has failed. - IGBT U-phase ARM is short-circuited and GATE PCB power has failed. - IGBT V-phase ARM is short-circuited and GATE PCB power has failed.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 18/46
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
- IGBT W-phase ARM is short-circuited and GATE PCB power has failed. - Over current is detected on DC Link end. - Regenerative IGBT and GATE transformer power have failed. Caution: If ALM LED turns ON in inputting power and does not turn OFF, operation is impossible. Perform an inspection according to the above a)~g) as shown below. Verify that J5H or JP4 Jumper is properly inserted.(If not inserted, ALM LED turns ON) Verify that WDT LED is flickering normally. In c) ~ h) cases, check the connectors of DPC-111,112,140 PCB and verify that GATE SMPS, GATE TRANS input is applied by AC 110V+10%,-15%.. Check IGBT stack or IPM connection conditions(disconnection and loose bolts) 7) Check C1VD contactor input (Option) Verify that C1VD contactor is energized about 3 seconds later from power input. Caution: If DC Link volt. does not reach 330V even after 8 sec. (Low- voltage error), turn OFF C1VD contactor and then ON. Then, check the voltage after 8 seconds. If the voltage is still low, turn OFF the contact and generate charging circuit failure error. In this case, main power circuit connection, GATE SMPS(Trans) input or connection, charging circuit OFF, IPM, IGBT or regenerative IGBT ON may have failed. Thus, check these conditions. 8) Check pin There are check pins in DPC-111,112,140 PCB for maintenance and installation. The following signals are allocated to check pin. PIN No.
Function
PIN 1(labc_PEAK)
Outputted peak voltage of 3phase current
PIN2(+5V-CHK)
5V power WDT
PIN3(/IAS_CHK)
Reverse(-) value of motor U-phase current
PIN4(/IBS_CHK)
Reverse(-) value of motor V-phase current
PIN5(/ICS_CHK)
Reverse(-) value of motor W-phase current
PIN 8
GND
9) Cautions for adjusting of speed control gain value ① Adjusting of speed control gain value affects riding comfort and leveling accuracy of the car. Use accelerator to change gain. Speed control gain can be changed within -50 % ~ 150 %.(Refer to Annunciator data) High gain value causes excessive vibration and low gain value causes stalling or starting shock.
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 19/46
6. DPP-10X PCB The DPP-111,131 are each improved PCB of DPP-101,130. And they can be changeable each other. 6.1 Function and details As DPP-101,111 PCB is located in the back of DPC PCB, visual inspection is difficult. Thus, when ALM LED(Red) of DPC PCB turns ON or when inverter malfunctions, check DPP-101,111 PCB after removing the set screw.
10
9
1
No.
Function (TP7)
1Pin 2Pin 3Pin 4Pin
Regen.IGBT +15V pow er Regen.IGBT - 9V pow er Regen.IGBT Gate output Regen.IGBT Ground
4
1
6
17
2
1
4 TP4
5
1
Seg. CONNECTOR func. GXW Separated pow er WGXV Separated pow er VGXU Separated pow er U-
1 4
3 5 GXU
Seg. CONNECTOR func. GU U- IGBT signal GV V- IGBT signal GW W- IGBT signal
1 4
3 5 GXV
Seg. GP GLX
TP1
4
CONNECTOR func. Regen.IGBT signal Temp. SW(radiator) Power supply(each phase) (separated TRANS)
1 4
5 4
4
3 GXW
1
1
9
DPP -101
Seg. Function ON DC Link end, 50V or less OFF DC Link end, 50V or less
TP2
5
5
Function Remarks Arm +15V pow er TP1:U-phase Arm - 9V pow er TP2:V-phase Arm Gate output TP3:W-phase Arm Ground
7
Don't touch stack w hen light ON after pow er OFF.
Upper Upper Upper Upper
4
6
LED1
CHG
TP3 1 No. 1Pin 2Pin 3Pin 4Pin
Caution
4
GV
OV BR
Regen. volt. setting VR(700∼ 730V regen.)
VR1 Red
Over current setting VR(detected at 770V)
1
TP5
TP4:U-phase TP5:V-phase TP6:W-phase
1 VR2
9 5
Remarks
7
Low er Low er Low er Low er
Function 기 능 Arm +15V pow er Arm - 9V pow er Arm Gate output Arm Ground
GU
1Pin 2Pin 3Pin 4Pin
30
29
VA
No.
4
4
TP6 1
1
To VG7 CONNECTOR of DPC-111 PCB
GP
TP7
GW
1
GLX
1
1) Diagram of DPP-101 PCB(IGBT 200A, Motor 18kW~22kW)
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 20/46
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
* The outward appearance of DPC-111 may different but its function and connectors are same.
2) Diagram of DPP-131 PCB( IPM 50A,75A,100A, motor 5.5kW~11kW, S-IPM 50A,75A,100A,150A motor 5.5kW~11kW, Function 15V
GU2
Ground_U
Seg
Function
GV1
15V
GV2
Ground_V
Seg
Function
GW1
15V
GW2
Ground_W
Seg
Function
GX1
15V
GX2
Ground_W
GX3
-9V
Seg
Function
TH1
Thermal1
TH2
Connected to IPM
Seg GU1
Connected to 'VG' connector of DPC PCB
Caution Don't touch stack w hen light ON after pow er OFF.
SIGMA
Thermal2
Seg
Explanation
GW1
Ov er 50V on DC link
GW2
Below 50V on DC Link
LED100
6.2 Main performance Item Detecting short-circuit
Performance Detects short just like arm short-circuit, IPM & IGBT short within 5~6㎲ by output short, and outputs an error signal.
GATE soft cut circuit
Cuts driving circuit within 10㎲ after a short-circuit is detected. This process is carried out slowly for 10㎲ to protect IPM & IGBT from spike voltage resulting from short circuit.
Timer & reset circuit
When a short-circuit is detected, the timer starts counting at the same time that GATE cut circuit operates and turns off 10~20ms. Driving output is cut regardless of the input signal of driving circuit until timer finishes. When the input signal of driving circuit is OFF after timer finishes, resetting circuit operates and stops the cut state.
Detecting the power voltage Breakdown of power circuit and 15V power is drop to 12±0.5V during error
power failure, it displays error.
Driving circuit
IPM class is lower than 100A, it will controlled by DPP-130,131 (IPM150A : DPP-120,121 / IGBT 200A: DPP-101 )
Overheat detection
If radiating plate temp. reaches 85℃, it detects error.
Detecting error of IPM inner Maintains breakdown condition about 2ms when IPM error occurs
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 21/46
6.3 Variable resistance 1) OV variable resistance sets DC Link over current level. The factory setting is 770V. This setting may be changed temporarily for testing by turning the
volume.
After testing, be sure to return to the origin position. * Measuring point a. Each end of R31 on DPP101,111 b. TE40 and TE100 on DPP130,131
DPP-101,130
DPP-111,131
8.02± 0.5V
7.9±0.5V
2) BR(brake) variable resistance sets regenerative operation starting voltage level. The
factory setting is 730V. This setting may be changed for testing by turning
the volume.
After testing, be sure to return to the origin position. Each end of C12 is
7.6+/-0.5volt. * Measuring point a. Each end of C12 on DPP101,111
DPP-101,130
b. TE40 and TE70 on DPP130,131
DPP-111,131
All should be 7.5± 0.5V
3) In case of DPP-111,121,131, the potential difference between regenerative voltage and over voltage * In case of DPP-111,131, variable resistance adjustment point is not exist. 6.4 Check connector and connection before inputting power 1) Checking the type name of DPP-1XX PCB according to IGBT capacity shown below. PCB type name DPP-131(130)
IPM, IGBT capacity IPM 50,75,100A Drive motor: : Max. rating- lower than 11kW S-IPM 50,75,100, 150A Drive motor: : Max. rating- lower than 15kW
DPP-111(101)
IGBT 200A 18kW ≤ Drive motor≤ 22kW
2) Check the connection condition of each connector. Verify that all connectors are connected to their proper positions. 6.5 Check the control power when inputting power
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 22/46
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Caution: As DC link voltage(500~700V) is input to DPP-1XX PCB after inputting power, special attention should be paid to safety. 1) Usually control voltage needs no checking. If any error is found in circuit operation, verify that GATE SMPS or GATE TRANS input is within AC110±10% and check the connectors. 6.6 Verify that charging(discharging) detecting LED lights is ON 1) LED(Red) on PCB lights ON if DC Link voltage is 50V or more and it and dims (goes) lights OFF if the voltage is less than 50V. LED lights ON again when the DC link begins to be charged with FFB is inputted Caution: As it takes about 15 seconds for DC Link voltage to be discharged completely after power OFF, never touch DPP PCB and stack while LED light is ON. 2) When LED does not light ON though main power is inputted, IPM & IGBT short, or regenerative IGBT OFF error, wrong wiring of recharge resistance(RCR), Recharging circuit ON error, or luminescent diode may damaged. Inspection should be carried out after DC link voltage discharged. * DC Link voltage is condenser power, Surely check the voltage for safety.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 23/46
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
7. DCL PCB 7.1 Function DCL-243 PCB is car operation PCB(CLON) mounted with MC143150BIFU neuron chip and is applied to 60~240m/min. 1) Installed in OPB in single elevator and forms a serial communication network with CNL LON of CP 2) Detects call button in car, open, close and ex_open(elongates door close time for 3 minutes and closes the door regardless of door time with a close button registration)buttons, control board switch, on car connection box switch input, and car load, and it transmits them into DOC PCB through network. 3) Controls car call B/T, open, close and ex_open response lamp and Up/Down direction lamp, full lamp, CPI, and car-chime(gong) with display commands through the network of DOC PCB. 4) The additional command signals from CP that are related with door are transmitted to DCD PCB. And it receives some error signals of door through parallel communication for easy installation & maintenance 5) It transmits voice synthesis guide data to the voice synthesis board in OPB through LCD connector. 6) Functional Classification No.
C la s s ific a tio n
Ite m
S p e c ific a tio n
1
C o n n e c tio n
S ig n a l
R e fe r to T a b le 1 ∼ 9 .
2
M e m o ry
ROM
O n e 2 7 C 2 5 6 3 2 K B yte
3
In p u t/O u tp u t
In p u t
1 ) N o n v o lta g e s w itc h in p u t b y c o m p a ra to r : 3 9 E A C a r c a ll b u tto n in p u t:3 2 flo o rs (M A X . 6 4 flo o rs ) O p e n , c lo s e , e x o p e n b u tto n : 1 re s p e c tiv e ly U p , d o w n , s ta rt, b y p a s s b u tto n o n O P B : 1 re s p e c tiv e ly .
2 ) V o lta g e s w itc h in p u t b y c o m p a ra to r : 2 4 O P B s w itc h :1 5 . O n c a r c o n n e c tio n b o x s w itc h :5
C a r lo a d d e te c tin g s w itc h : 3 . P h o to s h o e s w itc h : 1 3 ) A n a lo g ~ d ig ita l c o n v e rte r in p u t: 4 c h a n n e ls D F T R (D iffe re n tia l tra n s fo rm e r): 2 , P o te n tio m e te r: 2 . O u tp u t
1 ) T R d riv in g b y I/O m a p p e d I/O m e th o d : 7 C P I d riv in g : 3 . 1 1 0 % o v e rlo a d b u z z e r d riv in g : 1 C h im e 1 ,2 s trik e d riv in g : 2 . L C D b a c k lig h t: 1 2 ) T R d riv in g b y m e m o ry m a p p e d I/O m e th o d : 3 9 C a r c a ll b u tto n re s p o n s e la m p : 3 2 O p e n , c lo s e a n d e x o p e n re s p o n s e la m p : 3 U p , d o w n a n d fu ll la m p o n o p e ra tin g b o a rd : 3 . B u tto n b u z z e r: 1
4
5
D C power
PC B spec.
V o lta g e
+24V±5%
C u rre n t
TYPE 3 A
S iz e
2 3 9 × 1 3 3 .3 m m
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 24/46
7.2 Diagram of DCL PCB DRIN,DROUT: related distributed door CBL: Connector for 64 fl extention
POT: Potentiometer
LCD : Voice synthesis guide device(DCV-100)
IND : CPI connection
CCN1 : MAIN Connector
LD1:LED for PCB state indication
SW1:ID setting, terminal resistandce
U1:NEURON CHIP
setting
U2:DCL ROM DFTR : Differen. trans. input
LAMP:UP,DOWN, FULL LAMP CIN:IN-CAR (OPB)input
OP:OPEN B/T & LAMP EOP:EX OPEN B/T & LAMP
ONC:ONCAR INPUT
CL:CLOSE B/T & LAMP
BZ1:CALL B/T BBZZER
①
②
③
④
⑤
⑥
⑦
⑧
① CB1:CALL BUTTON 1~8F
⑤ CB3:CALL BUTTON 17~24F
② CL1:CALL BUTTON LAMP 1~8F
⑥ CL2:CALL BUTTON LAMP 17~24F
③ CB2:CALL BUTTON 9~16F
⑦ CB3:CALL BUTTON 25~32F
④ CL2:CALL BUTTON LAMP 9~16F
⑧ CL2:CALL BUTTON LAMP 25~32F
MMR Elevator_SI Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 25/46
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
(Fig.1) Layout of DCL PCB
DCL-200 BOARD 구성 NEURON CHIP ROM 32K
MAC Process
CPI
driving동 CPI구
Application
Process
I/O Port
RAM 2K
CAGE Input
Buzzer Output Chime Output
DC24 Volt
Power
전 원 supply DDC DDC
EEPROM 512B
CLOCK &CTL.
Differen. trans & Potensionmeter 차동 TRANS Input input
Control ( 제어신signal 호) Lamp Output
Serial Net Work
NetWork Process
RAM 32K
OPB Input ONCar Input WDInput Photo Shoe input
PULSE TRANS
COMM. Port
CAGE Output A-D CONV
For car type
Car Type 설정용 setting
DIP
DIP buf LCDOutput
S/W
(Fig.2) Configuration diagram of DCL PCB
7.3 Setting of DCL 1) Serial communication line(CCN1) connection DCL PCB application to sub & disabled type OPB is possible but we mainly apply it to Main OPB In case DCL PCB is applied to sub & wheel chair type OPB, set the PCB ID on Dip switch DOC PCB
Set the terminal resistance DCL PCB
SC-01,02 SC-01,03
CCN-1-01,02
Hoistway cable
Tail cord cable SC-01,03
SC-01,03
SC-01,03
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 26/46
(Fig.3) Terminal resistance setting in OPB
2) Car operating board ID and terminal resistance setting DIP SW1 is used for car operating board ID and terminal resistance setting. Table 1) Car operating board ID setting
DIP SW 1
No.
Hex
Car operating board ID terminal resistance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
1
0
0
X
X
X
X
X
01
Front side MAIN
2
0
1
0
X
X
X
X
X
02
Front side SUB
3
1
1
0
X
X
X
X
X
03
Disabled MAIN
4
0
0
1
X
X
X
X
X
04
Disabled SUB
5
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
0
05
TML. R. Non-setting
6
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
80
TML. R. setting
※ Legend;
0:OFF , 1:ON , X:Ignorance
(Note ; TML R : terminal resiste
3) Cautions for DIP switch setting When setting car operating board ID Attentions shall be paid so that car operating board ID may be a value among the above table1. Especially the car operating board ID of DCL PCB for on car operation switch input shall be set as front side of MAIN(01 HEX). If the setting is other than the above values, communication with DOC PCB of control panel is impossible. CPI will reset and call will not registered. setting a terminal resistance Terminal resistance is set on the final end of communication line(Refer to Fig. 3). 4) Check LED indication LED-LD1 indicates DCL-243 PCB operation condition as shown below.
NO
Indication
Conditions required
Remarks
1
OFF
CPU run error, COMM. error
No P24V power, PCB(H/W) error, etc.
2
ON(1 sec.interval)
CPU run normal, COMM error
Comm. line connection error, DIP SW car operating board ID and TML R setting error
3
ON(0.3 sec.interval)
CPU run normal, COMM. normal
5) Main OPB ID check by CPI when main power turned on Check if DCM-11X or 12X is connected to DCL-243 PCB The ID of main OPB "01" will be displayed on DCM-11X or 12X when main power
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 27/46
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
turned on.
8. DOV PCB 8.1 DOV-200 PCB( Auto voice synthesizer device) 1) Function DOV-200 PCB is for voice synthesizer. It is composed of CPU(PIC16C63,PIC16C73), RS232C communication section, DA conversion section, amplification section, and power detection & battery section and others. 2)
Diagram of DOV-200 PCB
3) System configuration DOV-200 PCB configuration Com. method: RS232 CPU : PIC16C63, PIC16C73 MEMORY :
ROM(27C040, 27C080) → Voice data stored
D-A converter : Converts digital voice data analog data Amplifier: Amplify analogized data and outputs through speaker (Max.output:2Watt, 8Ω)
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 28/46
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
4) Spec. setting Spec. setting method: Spec. can be modified by DIP SW(SW1). Table) Bit allocation chart Function.
Seg.
Bit 1~4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Refer the below " EX)" ON : ON : ON :Chime is operated ON : Announces for underground floor Announcement for Announcement for "Thank you" setting 4F is omitted 13F is omitted before Announcement
Ex.) In case underground floor is B4
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
OFF
* In case the lowest floor is 1st floor, please turn off DIP SW No. of 1~4 Underground (=lowest) floor
Dip SW
Underground (=lowest) floor
Dip SW
B1
ON: 1st
B4
ON: 3rd
B2
ON: 2nd
B5
ON:1st & 3rd
B3
ON: 1st&2nd
B6
ON:2nd & 3rd
Once the underground floor is set, other floors are set automatically. Announce recordings in sequence with bits 1~4 turned ON. Thus, voice synthesizer can be tested with this bit 1~4 in factory or field. Be sure to turn them OFF after testing. Bit 5 and Bit 6 should set same as floor setting spec. of the building. Bit7 sets addition or deletion of chime before broadcasting depending on user's requirements. Bit8 sets addition or deletion of 'thank you' message depending on user's requirements. 5) Volume adjusting switch Adjusting method of volume : Enable bits 1,2,3,4 Turning the volume(VR1) to clockwise will decrease volume sound (opposite direction will increase volume) After volume adjustment, bits1~4 should be set again referring above 4). 6) Power failure detection DOV-120 PCB detects power failure and announces power failure (twice). As power failure announcement uses local battery, it starts after 10 minutes when supplied the battery is charged. 7) Power switch
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 29/46
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Turns ON and OFF DOV-200 PCB power. 8) Indicator(LED1,LED2) LED1 : Indicates status of power. Lights ON with power ON. LED2 : Indicates the operation status of DOV-100 PCB. This lights ON announcement. 9) Connector connection CN1: For communication
CN2: For power supply and
(Connect CN1→DOC-120 PCB SD connector)
PIN NO
Function
1
-
2
Rx
3
Tx
4
-
5
GND
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
speaker connection (CN2→Power supply for speaker)
PIN NO
Function
1 2
SPEAKER1
3
SPEAKER2
4
GND
5
DC24V
10) Check points before operation Check CN2 connector for power(24V, GND) connection. Check power switch and LED1. Check speaker and matching transformer connection . (The rating of speaker matching transformer is 16Ω/8Ω.) Verify that BIT6 in DOC PCB(Spec. setting DIP SW) is ON. Verify that data of SPEC address "0034","0036" are"0xFF". Verify that data of SPEC address "0014" is"0x01".
9. DOS PCB 9.1 DOS-100 PCB(Local Supervisory panel) 1) General DOS-100 PCB is mounted inside the monitoring board. It is connected to the control panel (DOC-111, 120 PCB) by a line enabling it to monitor overall elevator conditions. Contact signal is non-voltage contact and the accepted current is 2 A or less.
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 30/46
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Lay out of DOS-100 PCB(Size 218*280 mm)
DOS-100 PCB configuration Block diagram of DOS-100 PCB is as shown below. DOS-100 PCB SM connect. in DOC-120 PCB
G/A com. sect.
MPU & BUS CTRL sect.
KEEP RY & RY sect.
External device
G/A Communication section G/A communication section communicates with inside G/A of DOC-111 & 120 through SM connector, decodes control board information received through communication, and transmits it to MPU in DOS-100 PCB. MPU & BUS control section The MPU used in DOS-100 PCB is one chip type 89C52. MPU analyzes the data transmitted from G/A, transmits it to bus controller, and controls relay. Keep relay & Relay section
MMR Elevator_SI Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 31/46
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
As the relay in DOS-100 is connected to seven segment lamp which shows floor information, E/L conditions can be informed to monitoring board. As the keep relay(keep type)in DOS-100 PCB maintains its conditions during power failure, the last condition of E/L can be seen with outside equipment power only. 2) Indicator Indicator DOS-100 PCB has 2 LEDs. LED NO
Function
Indication
LED1
Watch dog run
Flickers at 64ms interval with PCB normal
LED2
COM condition indication Flickers at every control panel call (128ms)
3) Switch DOS-100 PCB has 2 switches.
Switch
Function
S1
CPU reset
S2
Refer to Table 1.
Remarks Refer to Table1 and ID set chart.
Table 1) ID setting DIP SW set chart BIT 1
Function ON: Connects terminal resistance,
OFF: Deletes terminal resistance
2
ON: Invalid the call from C.P , OFF: Effective the call from C.P and In normal
3
ON: Voice synthesizer effective , OFF: Invalid Voice synthesizer
4
Plans its application when an option is received.
5
Plans its application when an option is received.
6
ON: "-" letter displaying, OFF: "B","b" displaying
7
ON: Korea SVP set only, OFF: Normal local SVP
8
ON:Lamp type OFF: Digital type
4) Connector PW connector(Power) :No.1=VCC(+ 5V), No.4:GND(0V) SM connector(Communication)
→ Connected to SM connector in DOC-111,
120 PCB. PIN 1 : Com. line 1
PIN 2 : Com. line 2
KA connector(22 PIN) → Connected to other equipment
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Relay Type
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
PIN No.
Ry No.
1
RY1
D0 7-SEG driving(a)
1st floor LAMP
BINARY1
2
RY2
D1 7-SEG driving(b)
2nd floor LAMP
BINARY2
3
RY3
D2 7-SEG driving(c)
3rd floor LAMP
BINARY3
4
RY4
D3 7-SEG driving(d)
4th floor LAMP
BINARY4
5
RY5
D4 7-SEG driving(e)
5th floor LAMP
BINARY5
6
RY6
D5 7-SEG driving(f)
6th floor LAMP
BINARY6
7
RY7
D6 7-SEG driving(g1)
7th floor LAMP
8
RY8
D7 7-SEG driving(g2)
8th floor LAMP
9
RY9
D0 7-SEG driving(A)
9th floor LAMP
Upper limit forced reduction error
D1 7-SEG driving(B)
10th floor LAMP
Lower limit forced reduction error
D2 7-SEG driving(C)
11th floor LAMP
Stop between floors
12 RY12
D3 7-SEG driving(D)
12th floor LAMP
Door open unable
13 RY13
D4 7-SEG driving(E)
13th floor LAMP
Door close unable
14 RY14
D5 7-SEG driving(F)
14th floor LAMP
Starting unable
15 RY15
D6 7-SEG driving(G1)
15th floor LAMP
Bad leveling
16 RY16
D7 7-SEG driving(G2)
16th floor LAMP
Brake operation failure
17 RY17
D0 7-SEG driving(h,j)
17th floor LAMP
18 RY18
D1 7-SEG driving(H,J)
18th floor LAMP
19 RY19
D2 7-SEG driving(N1,N2)
19th floor LAMP
20 RY20
D3
20th floor LAMP
21 RY21 Keep type
D4
21st floor LAMP
10 RY10 11 RY11
Keep type
DATA
22
Usage1 (7-SEG type CPI)
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 32/46
RY1~RY21 common line
Usage2 (Lamp type CPI)
RY1~RY21 common line
Usage3 (Binary type CPI)
Failure
RY1~RY21 common line
Caution: As spec. segment of use1,2 and 3 is input by communication, a separate setting is unnecessary. 7-SEG as configuration.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 33/46
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
KB connector(22 PIN) → Connected to other equipment PIN No.
Ry No.
1
RY22
2
RY23
3
Relay Type
DAT A
Usage1 (7-SEG type CPI)
Usage2 (Lamp type CPI)
Usage3 (Binary type CPI)
D0
22nd floor LAMP
D1
23rd floor LAMP
RY24
D2
24th floor LAMP
4
RY25
D3 Unit light
Unit light
Unit light
5
RY26
D4 UP direction light
UP direction light
UP direction light
6
RY27
D5 DN direction light
DN direction light
DN direction light
7
RY28
D6 Safety light
Safety light
Safety light
8
RY29
D7 OUT OF SVC light
OUT OF SVC light
OUT OF SVC light
9
RY30
D0 Fire light
Fire light
FIRE light
10 RY31
D1 Power supply light
Power supply light
Power supply light
11 RY32
D2 Self-generator light
Self-generator light
Self-generator light
D3 OPEN light
OPEN light
OPEN light
D4 CLOSE light
CLOSE light
CLOSE light
14 RY35
D5 MAINT light
MAINT light
MAINT light
15 RY36
D6 OVER LOAD light
OVERLOAD light
OVER LOAD light
16 RY37
D7 AUTO light
AUTO light
AUTO light
17 RY38
D0 ATT light
ATT light
ATT light
18 RY39
D1 INDE light
INDE light
INDE light
19 RY40
D2 PARK light
PARK light
PARK light
20 RY41
D3 EME light
EME light
EME light
Keep type
General 12 RY33 type 13 RY34
21
DN lamp driving
22
RY1~RY21 common line RY1~RY21 common line
RY1~RY21 common line
Caution: As spec. segment of usage1,2 and 3 is input by COM, separate setting is unnecessary.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 34/46
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
10. DHG PCB 10.1. DHG-160,161 PCB The DHG-161 is the improved PCB of DHG-160. And it can be changeable each other. 1) Outward appearance E/L#2, disable type button I/F(HUC,HDC)
SW1: ID setting switch
Normal Button I/F(HU,HD)
E/L #1 IND I/F(HI1)
CPU
E/L #2 IND I/F(HI2)
HC2:Hall chime HP: Parking HVF: VIP/Fire
SW2:No use
HA: Hall comm. and power
HF2:Hall lantern
HC1:Hall chime
HF1:Hall lantern
2) Feature This DHG-161 PCB has ASIC chip GVC14605 for serial communication and CPU 89C51. HUC,HDC,HF2,HC2,HI2 are used for E/L#2 (In case of duplex system) It composes serial communication network with DOC-111,120 PCB at hall under single elevator system. It transmits hall button and switch inputs to DOC PCB
through network.
It drives hall button lamps, indicators, hall lanterns and hall chimes with receiving output signal form DOC PCB Disable button input also proceeded
in a PCB as normal type button
(In case duplex system is applied, disable button port can be used for E/L #2) It has watch dog timer(LED2) that checking CPU down. LED1 checks the communication condition .
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 35/46
3) Power Voltage
Use
Power source
Drives Chime& Hall Lantern SSR Rectified power from control
DC24V DC5V
Supplies power to IND PCB
transformer power in CP
Circuit logic power
Downward graded transformer power form DC24 of PCB.
AC100V
Drives Hall Lantern lamp
Output power of control transformer
4) Function Floor ID setting by DIP SW1 － DIP SW appearance
－ DIP SW setting ON
ON
1 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
2
8
3
4
5
Floor ID Set section (HEX Value)
6
7
Button type segment section
－ It is possible to set upto Max 63 numbers ID by using FLOOR ID set section (No. 1 ~ 6) *A condition that all switches are 'OFF'
is not exist for Floor ID.
－ Set the button type by using button type segment section( No.7~8)
DIP switch No. 7
8
OFF
OFF
Button type
Remark
Normal Type(Including disable type)
－ Example of DIP SW setting Ex1) In case normal type ID setting for lowest floor (ID=01H) On
1 Off
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
Do not handling
MMR Elevator_SI Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 36/46
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
－ Dip switch setting method All switches are off position before ID setting. When the DHG PCB is installed, handle the dip switches. Non stop floors will not have ID ex) Normal Button types -Total 13 floors (over ground 10Fls, Under ground 3Fls) Building floors Service floors DIP SW set data(16 hexadecimal)
10
OK
BO
9
OK
OA
8
NON STOP
7
OK
09
6
OK
08
5
OK
07
4
OK
06
3
NON STOP
2
OK
05
1
OK
04
B1
OK
03
B2
OK
02
B3(Lowest floor)
OK
01
Remark
None button at hall
None button at hall
－Floor ID set table by using DIP Switch(SW1)
1 : ON 0 : OFF
(Normal type button DIP S/W 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
HEX value
1( Lowest)
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
2
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
3
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
31
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1F
32
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
20
Fl oor
MMR Elevator_SI Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 37/46
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Dip SW2 is not required any setting. Leave them all at 'off' position. 5）Communication and power cable connection It composes hall station in case of single operation( Sigma 60~105m/min) * Max. hall node numbers are 32 in single network
Power ＆ Communication DOT IND
G/A ★ B/T & controller -Up/Dow n button input ★ Up/Dow n lamp output
Sw itch
Hall input VIP, PARKING
Hall station network configuration of parallel operation( Sigma 60~105m/min) E/L NO.1
Parallel communication
NO.1 DOC PCB G/A Com m unication Line
network G/A
("SL" CONN.)
E/L #1: hall lantern & chime
Com m unication Line
DHG-PCB
NO.2 DOC PCB G/A
"SH" CONN E/L #2 DOT IND.
E/L #1 DOT IND.
G/A
E/L NO.2
E/L #2: hall lantern & chime
MMR Elevator_SI Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 38/46
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Hall station network configuration of one hall rise parallel operation ( Sigma 60~105m/min) E/L NO.1
Parallel communication
NO.1 DOC PCB G/A Com m unication Line
network G/A
E/L NO.2 NO.2 DOC PCB G/A
("SL" CONN.) "SH" CONN E/L #2 DOT IND.
E/L #1 DOT IND. E/L #1: hall lantern & chime
E/L #2: hall lantern & chime
Com m unication Line
G/A
DHG-PCB To next floor E/L #1,2 Button
Terminal resistance and network configuration －Network diagram under single operation system DOC B/D #01 Terminal resistance (SH of HJP) (It should be jumped always on DOC PCB)
#32 IND DHG-161 Hall #32 DHG-161 Hall #31
MMR Elevator_SI Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 39/46
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
④ Network diagram in case of 1 rise hall button for duplex system
Main board of E/L#1
Main board of E/L#1
DOC PCB of E/L #1 SH : Open SL : Open
DOC PCB of E/L #2 SH : Jumper(short) SL : Open
SL
SH
DOC B/D #01
SL
DOC B/D #01
SH
DHG-161 Hall #32 DHG-161 Hall #31
DHG-161 Hall #2 DHG-161 Hall #1
Terminal resistance
6) Connector name and function
Name
Function
HF1
Drives Hall Lantern of E/L#1
HF2
Drives Hall Lantern of E/L#2
HC1
Drives Hall Chime of E/L#1
HC2
Drives Hall Chime of E/L#2
HP
Parking Switch input(E/L #1) (In case of E/L #2, input goes to DOC PCB directly)
HVF
VIP switch input(E/L #1)
Remark
MMR Elevator_SI Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 40/46
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
11. DCM PCB 11.1.DCM-1XX PCB 1) outward appearance DOT of 1st digit(1 place) displaying
DOT of 2nd digit (10 place) displaying Direction displaying DOT
Additional Lamp3 Additional Lamp1
Additional Lamp2
HI: IND I/F
Additional Lamp4
2) Function and feature DCM-1XX PCB receives serial data from DHG-161(160) and DCL-242(241) PCB to DOT IND, and displays current elevator position, direction and additional information. ① It receives serial data as clock and enable signal from DHG-161(160) or DCL-242(241) PCB, and drives DOT and additional lamps.
In can display not only numbers but also alphabet(capital letter and small letter). It can drive 4 of additional lamps Button energy save mode function(It can be adjustable by SPEC in DOC PCB , only for VIX-532 type Indicator) 3) Power
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 41/46
DC 24 V is used for display drive power which is supplied from DHG-161(160) or DCL-242(241) PCB, and using for logic power by stepping down DC24V to DC5V 4) PCB types and application scope DCM-1XX PCBs in Sigma elevators can be classified to
DCM-10X, DCM-11X
and DCM-12X( 3 types) The usage purpose of additional lamp is classification standard.
Table) DCM PCBs PCB
Drawing No.
Usage
DCM-102
AEG00C767*A
Slim vertical (Sigma standard)
2EA (LAMP1,4)
DCM-103
AEG00C767*B
Slim vertical (Sigma standard)
3EA (LAMP1,2,3)
DCM-114
AEG00C769*A
Horizontal CPI (Sigma standard)
0EA
DCM-115
AEG00C769*B
Horizontal CPI (Sigma standard, EME)
1EA(LAMP2)
DCM-116
AEG00C769*C
Horizontal CPI (Sigma standard)
2EA(LAMP1,3)
DCM-117
AEG00C769*D
Horizontal CPI (Only Korea Domestic)
3EA(LAMP1,2,3)
DCM-124
AEG00C770*A
CPI, Mounted on OPB (Sigma standard)
0EA
DCM-125
AEG00C770*B
CPI, Mounted on OPB (Sigma standard, EME)
1EA(LAMP6)
DCM-126
AEG00C770*C
CPI, Mounted on OPB (Only Korea Domestic)
3EA(LAMP3,4,5)
DCM-127
AEG00C770*D
CPI, Mounted on OPB (Only Korea Domestic)
4EA(LAMP1,2,3,4)
Additional Lamps
5) Connectors DCM-10X Name
HI
DCM-11X, 12X Pin No.
Signal
1
Name
Pin No.
Signal
DC24V
1
DC24V
2
GND
2
GND
3
DATA
3
GND
4
CLK
4
DATA
5
ENABLE
5
CLK
6
ENABLE
HI
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 42/46
12. DPB PCB 12.1. DPB-100 PCB 1) DPB-100 PCB explanation Applied drawing No.
Type name
Drawing No.
Remark
PCB ASY
AEG02C265*A
It applied to expansion and unified type CP
DPB-100 PCB outward appearance(SIZE :100*140)
2) Main I/O of DPB-100 PCB "VK" Terminal(6P) NO
Function
"VJ" Connector(MOLEX,10P) NO
Function
1 Brake Coil_B
1 P4.5V
2 Brake Coil_A
2 BK_PWM
3 C1BR_N
3 BR_UV
4 P110V
4 BR_OC
5 C1BR_P
5 BK_I
6 EARTH
6 P5 7 GND 8 N15
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 43/46
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
"VK" is connected to "VK" of DOM PCB, and "VJ" is connected to "VJ" of DPC PCB LD1(LED) P110V is power input checking LED. When it is inputted to "VK-04", LED will be turned on. TP1,TP2(CHECK PIN) : It must be lower than
±2V when power is checked.
13. DOR PCB 13.1. DOR-13X PCB DOR-130(Expansion type CP) and DOR-131(Unified type CP) have same function Just the existence of E.STOP S/W is different. R5SC, R2LD, RDZ, R7LF and R7FN relays are applied for standard, R1ML is for micro leveling. And R4LF is applied in case 2nd pit switch is applied to elevator 1) DOR-130 PCB DOR-130 PCB outward appearance(SIZE :100*280)
DOR-131 PCB outward appearance(SIZE :100*280)
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
2)
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 44/46
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
DOR-110 PCB As for relay connection PCB , this PCB is used when fire fighting control option is applied. And R4FMX is applied in case 2nd pit switch is applied to elevator.
3)
DOR-101 PCB As for relay connection PCB , this PCB is used when supervisory panel is applied. R4FSX Relay is only for Korea domestic.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
4)
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 45/46
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
DOR-120 PCB As for relay connection PCB , this PCB is used when generator control option is applied to elevator.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 46/46
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 0/32
Date
July.2006
Doc. No.
Index 1. Start up in slow speed …………………………………………………………….. 1 2. Insulation measurement …………………………………………………………...4 3. Checking voltage …………………………………………………………………...8 4. Non-scaffolding method (MSK operation) …………………..…………………..12 5. Preparing high-speed commissioning …………………………………………..18 6. Potentiometer ................................................................................................25 7. Adjusting in high speed operation ……………………………………………….26
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 1/32
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
1. Start up in slow speed 1.1. Preparation for start up 1)
Tools and measuring instruments
Tools should be correctly verified before use. Spaners Drivers Plier, nipper, compressing tool, lantern Iron measure(15 ㎝), tape measure(3~5M) Mini clip : For measuring CHK terminal Common line : 2 wires longer than 1 meter with alligator clips on both ends. Digital multi-meter Input impedance : 1 ㏁ or more Min. voltage measured : 10 ㎷ Ammeter : AC 100A range Megger tester High pressure Megger(500V, Battery type, 200 ㏁ or more internal resistance) Manual type not permitted Speedometer Others : Electrical drawings 2) Checking and oiling Check on entrance and equipment of hoistway 1. Is the elevator free of any obstacles in its traveling?
2. Are the landing doors closed on all floors?
3. Is operating board installed? Are DCL-242 PCB connecting MIC JACK and
4. Are PCB MIC in apparatus box and
ROM
wiring MIC connected to the same names?
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 2/32
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
5. Is safety shoe connected to MIC in apparatus box? (Safety shoe line should be jumped if car door is not installed)
6.
Is the apparatus box properly connected to DOOR PCB(DCD PCB) connecting JACK "PJ1"?
7. Are "PJ1" No.
8. Are MIC JACK
(12) and (15) line removed from MIC?
No. 12 ,13 and 14 lines and the COMMON(EVV)Line connected
by the same line?
9. Are the?:
"ON CAGE operable";
"E.STOP S/W normal";
"AC_CUT(DMC-CUT1)","DMC(DMC-CUT2)" S/W cut ?
10.
Is S/W in operating board set to Normal mode (IN_CAR S/W applied)?
11.
Is car door closed? (CLS shall be ON .)
For Car & counter weight side 1. Is each PCB connecting MIC JACK connected properly in control board?
2. Is each IGBT connected tightly at the back of control board?
3. Are power inducing and electric motor wiring terminal properly connected?
4. Is RE line induced into control board separated from electric motor wiring?
5. Are MCCB and circuit breaker fuse cut ? Do they have the rated capacity?
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 3/32
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
6. Is ground wire with each equipment and building ground wire secured?
7. Is the shield line of rotary encoder grounded?
8 Is MIC line insulated properly? (0 5 MΩ or more)
9. Is control board properly connected to TAILCODE wiring and MIC?
10.
MIC of LSU and LSD is common?
☞ Common point when without COM JACK :DOM PCB TML1 terminal (1~2 7~3 7~8)
11. Are GRS and MB MIC JACK inserted in control board?
12. Are main power of U, V and W on motor side and power cable connected according to the drawing?
13. Check each PCB and IGBT , power cable for connection and contact conditions.
14. Check glass tube fuse in DOP-116,DOM-110 PCB for error, and connection
conditions.
15. Check conductivity through tester. ☞Check the DC 48V between UB 04 and AB 01 on the DOC 120 PCB
16.Verify that AUTO-MAINT S/W in DOC-120 PCB,DOR-13X PCB, INSPECTION S/W is set to "MAINT" position.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 4/32
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
17. Verify that DOC NORMAL - ABNORMAL S/W is set to "NORMAL"(1~2, 4~5). ☞ Set to "NORMAL" when power ON 18. Verify that RUN-STOP S/W is set to NORMAL(RUN). (DOC-120,DOR-13X,INSPECTION S/W)
19. Are there any foreign matters on governor pulley?
20. Are switch lever and catch weight set?
21. Is wiring terminal properly connected?
22. Check grounding conditions. 3) Traction machine Are the connection parts securely tightened and the taping satisfactory? Are the tightened bolts to each part secure? ③ Are the sheave, pulley and rotor of motor free of foreign material and of undesirable contact with other parts? Is the compression level of springs on magnet brake appropriate? Is the stroke in the rated value? Are the oil level proper? Is the ground wire to motor secure? 4) Others Is each door to machine room posted with a sign of "Authorized personnel only" and "DO NOT ON" in MCCB? Is the illumination in machine room appropriate? If light power cannot be supplied from the building, obtain power from TML1-10 and TML1-12 of terminal block on control panel. This time, power is obtainable only within 300W.
MMR Elevator_SI Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 5/32
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
2. Insulation measurement 2.1. Purpose To prevent damage to equipment or electric shock by detecting possibilities of insulation failure and safety hazard resulting from elevator's fault. 1) Electric shock prevention ① Pay full attention to the main inverter (diode, IGBT, condenser, contactor) circuit to which DC 550V with the car stopped or DC 700V with the car running have been charged. Turn OFF the MCCB and let the main circuit discharge at AL electrolytic capacitor
for more than ten minute.
voltage is obtained with a tester.
Make sure that LED1 lights OFF and zero(0)
(LED1 lights OFF if discharged to less than 50V)
2) Protection of PCB from burning Be sure to follow the below before insulation measurement. Caution : Semi-conductive element is also used in high-voltage circuit. Thus, the element can be damaged by direct circuit earth. Be sure to carry out low-pressure Megger test at all terminals of control board before Megger test. Low-voltage Megger: Use low-voltage Megger(Voltage : 15V) or DMM. Carry out Megger test at all connectors and terminals in control panel. High-voltage megger: Use battery-type megger(Rotation type inapplicable). Carry out megger test at terminal blocks and contacts in control panel. 3) Control panel ground wiring CP ground plate EARTH PLATE
TO
E1 ○
B/D lead line ground,Trans ground
E2 ○
EMI Filter. E terminal
E3 ○
Lightning surge absorber.E terminal
E4 ○
Reactor,Motor E terminal
E5 ○
Control trans. E terminal
E6 ○
DPB-100 PCB "VK-06"(extend type)
E7 ○
INV. DOOR(Y4-04) E terminal
DOM 100 PCB "GND"
E8 ○
CAR EARTH "Y1-15"
DOC PCB F.G terminal.
E9 ○
LIMIT S/W CABLE "E"
E10 ○
GOVERNOR EARTH.
E11 ○
ROTORY ENCODER EARTH
E12 ○
SMPS "FG"(BASE model)
GND PLATE G1 G2 G3
G4 G5
G6
G7
DPC PCB "GND"
DOC PCB "GND" DOP- 116 PCB "TML3- 10"
FG
FLAT COPPER WIRE ○ E17
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 6/32
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
② Separate GND plate from control panel and connect it to F.G earth plate with flat copper line and then ground.
2.2 Preparing insulation measurement 1) Car and hoistway Verify that MCCB S/W of building and control panel turn OFF. Set all switches in and on the car to normal position. Be careful that final limit switches and POSI shall not be in the OFF position. Car should not operate the final limit switches. Car should be not closed POSI. Landing doors and car doors should be closed
U
V
W
on all floors. Motor terminal U, V, W common (Refer to Fig.1) Short-circuit terminal block X,Y and Z common with clips (When a reactor applied).
SHORT-CIRCUIT WITH CLIPS (Fig.1) SHORT-CIRCUIT OF MOTOR TERMINAL BOARD
2) Control panel Remove connectors from DOC PCB. Remove connectors from DPC PCB Remove connectors from DPP PCB Remove connectors and terminal from DOP PCB Remove connectors and terminal from DOM PCB Remove connectors from DOR PCB Remove connectors from DPB-100 PCB (BRAKE current applied) When separating GND plate from F.G ground plate, separate the flat
copper which
connects them each other.(Refer to Fig.3) Caution: As DC 550V has been charged on the main circuit condenser for 1 minute after MCCB turn OFF make sure that zero voltage is obtained with a tester.
SHORT-CITCUIT WITH CLIPS
(Fig.3) SHORT-CIRCUIT OF MAIN CIRCUIT DIODE
Turn OFF the "MCCB for "Light" brake in control panel and short-circuit secondary side of MCCB.
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 7/32
2.3 Measuring insulation Table 3) Rated insulation resistance value
Circuit Main circuit Motor circuit
Measuring section
Rated value
Power terminal block (TERM1,MCCB)~ FRAME Motor terminal block (TERM2) Reactor terminal block
~ ~
2nd contact of lightihg MCCB
FRAME FRAME
~
1 ㏁ or more
FRAME
Control circuit 2nd main contact of C1ST contactor ~ FRAME 2nd main contact of C1BR contactor ~ FRAME
0.5 ㏁ or more
2nd main contact of C1VD contactor ~ FRAME Caution : 1st No.5 main contact of C1BR is connected to frame. The 1st main contact of C1ST and C1VD are connected to noise filter where leakage current (max. 40mA) flows 1) Restoring and checking the connectors Connect all connectors in DOC, DPC, DPP,DPB,DOP PCB (Refer to Table4) Check the MIC & Jack connected condition for between IPM, regenerative IGBT and DPP-1XX PCB. Caution : "GU","GV","GW","GP" and "GLX","GX" DPP-1XX PCB
which connects power stack section and
may damage IGBT if jack is disconnected with power ON. Be sure
to check the above conditions before power supply.
Caution with static electricity
Table 4) Main connectors
PCB
Connector
Remarks
DOC-120 PCB
AB, AC, HA, CB, CA, AA, AD,CT,AF
CT,AF:DOC-120
DPC-120,121 PCB
VA, VB, VC, VG,VJ
VJ:DPC-112,120
DPP-111,131
GLX, GXU, GXV, GXW, GU, GV,
PCB
GW, GP, GX
DPB-100 PCB
VJ,VK
DPB-100:extend
DOP-116PCB
PS, UB, SH, XHA, SMPS, TML2(TML3)
TML3:DOP-115
③ Check screws on inverter section (diode module, regenerative IGBT,U.V.W-phase IGBT, chemical condenser) are tighten firmly. As connector connection on input side and output side can be changed each other, check the connected state. Connect all disconnected ground lines to each ground terminal.
MMR Elevator_SI Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 8/32
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Release the clips for short circuit of R,S,T on AC input side and P, N on DC output side. Release the clips for short-circuit U,V and W in motor terminal. Release the clips for short-circuit X, Y and Z in reactor terminal.
3. Checking voltage 3.1. Checking before power supply 1) Checking Items Measure input voltage on the 1st side of MCCB in the building. Changing the control transformer tap, if not match for B/D power supply. Check DPC-120,121 PCB connector. In case of 60~105 m/min, verify that VA(Control power), VB(CT), VC(C1VD_ option), VE(IOIF),VJ(DPB-100,current control) and VG(DPP) connectors are connected. Check DPC PCB Jumper Check the settings on the basis of the below Table. - "J5H"(DPC-111,112),"JP4"(DPC-120) JUMPER JUMPER NO
IPM, IGBT Capacity
MOTOR Capacity
1~2
50A, 75A, 150A
4.5KW~7.5KW. 13KW~15KW
3~4
100A, 200A
9.5KW~11KW. 18KW~22KW
Capacity of motor defined on nameplate ex) In case the motor capacity is13/15KW, setting 15kW. If both jumpers are not inserted, hardware error will occur. - JP1(DPC-120)
JUMPER NO
Function
Remark
MP
NORMAL
-
MC
Only for factory
-
JUMPER NO
Function
Remark
SIGMA
SIGMA model set
SI210 model inclusion
DI1,2
Di1,2 model set
-
- JP3(DPC-120)
Check J1J JUMPER Without jumper : The usual times
(3-4 JUMP PIN inserted when DSP SPEC. WRITE)
Check DPP-1XX PCB connector Check the type of DPP-1XX PCB according to IPM,IGBT capacity as shown in the below Table.
PCB Type
IPM, IGBT Capacity
DPP-131
50,75, 100, 150A (Motor 5.5 ~15kw)
DPP-111
200A (Motor 18~22kw)
MMR Elevator_SI Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD Field Industrial Engineering
DPP-131 is
for IPM driving PCB and
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 9/32
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
DPP-111is for IGBT driving.
Verify that all connector are connected to their proper positions. 2) Checking after power supply Turn ON the building power. Check the input voltage of DOC-120 PCB. Verify that DC is 48V±5% between AB connector No.1 and F.G. (For checking safety circuit-R5SC) Check the voltage output of SMPS on DOC-120 PCB TB1 terminal block. DOC-120 PCB
Measuring Point
Voltage
TB1
5V - GND
DC +5V ± 5%
terminal block
15V - GND
DC +15V ± 5%
Check input voltage of DCL-242 Verify that voltage between CCN1 connector No.4 on DCL PCB and
ground is
DC 24V±5% in operating panel. Verify that voltage between ONC connector No.13 on DCL PCB and ground is DC48V±5% in operating panel. Verify that voltage between CCN1 connector No.3 on DCL PCB and ground is DC 0V 0.1V in operating panel. Check voltage
DOP-116 PCB
XHA MIC 3-4, 5-6, 7-8 : DC 24V±10% Check WDTs of DPC-120,121 PCB Verify that LD2 CPU LED(green) flickers at 0.5 second interval on the power supply. (It flickers at 0.25 seconds when the motor is running) Caution: WDT(watch dog timer) monitors that the speed control CPU calculation correctly. If WDT does not flicker at 0.5 second
performs
interval, or ON only or
OFF only, speed control CPU may failed seriously. Thus, if only one error occurs, thorough inspection is required.
At this time,
check 5V power supply, ROM or ROM socket, and connector connection. Check ALM LED Verify that LD1 ALM LED(Red) lights up after the power supply, and then, OFF in about 2 seconds.(ALM LED is for inverter hardware safety check) a) Detecting over_ current on inverter.(or J5H (=DPC-111,112)JUMPER is not inserted) b) WDT failure on speed control CPU. c) Short-circuit of IGBT U-phase arm and failure of gate Trans power.
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 10/32
d) Short-circuit of IGBT V-phase arm and failure of gate trans power. e) Short-circuit of IGBT W-phase arm and failure of gate trans power. IPM ARM SHORT and GATE SMPS voltage error detection f) Detecting over_voltage on DC link end. g) Failure of regenerative IGBT, gate trans, Gate SMPS power. ALM LED lights up when hardware errors are detected as stated in a) ~ g). - Verify that JP4 jumper is properly inserted.( LED1 turn ON if not inserted) - Verify that WDT LED flickers normally. - In the above c) ~ g), check the connectors of DPP-1XX PCB and verify that Gate SMPS(trans) input is applied by AC 110V±10%.(GTS connector in control panel No.1↔3 : AC110V) - Check IGBT stack for connection conditions(disconnection and loose volt). Check C1VD contactor input(Option) - Verify that C1VD contactor is inputted in about 3 seconds after the power supply. Caution: If DC link voltage does not reach 330V 8 seconds after C1VD input(low- voltage error), turn OFF C1VD contactor and then ON. Then, check the
voltage after 8
seconds. If voltage is still low, turn OFF the contact to generate charging circuit failure error. - In this case, main power circuit connection, GATE SMPS(trans) input or connection, charging circuit OFF, or IGBT, regenerative IGBT ON may fail. Thus, check these conditions.
If start the recharging, LD1 will be light ON.
Caution: It takes about 10 min. for DC link voltage to be completely discharged when power OFF. Thus, never touch DPP-1XX PCB and the stack when LD1 lights up. - When LED does not light up though C1VD contactor is input after the power supply inverter may be short, or regenerative IGBT ON, charging circuit OFF or LED diode may fail. Checking should be carried out after DC link voltage is disconnected. Check DPP-1XX PCB - Checks that charging detecting LED is ON. LD1(red) on PCB lights up if DC link voltage is 50V or more and dims, then, turns OFF if the voltage is less 50V. LD1 lights up again when the DC link - When LED does not light ON even if after the power supply,
begins to be charged. inverter may be short, or
regenerative IGBT ON, charging circuit OFF or LED may fail. Checking shall be carried out after DC link
voltage is disconnected.
Caution: It takes about 10 min. for DC link voltage to be completely charged when power off.
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 11/32
Thus, never touch DPP-1XX PCB and stack area while LD1 lights ON. 3) Checking voltage Check MCCB and PCB voltage on each section as shown in table1 and 2. Table 1) AC voltage input (Trans 2nd side output) MIC/PIN
Voltage FUSE & Capacity
LED
Remark
PS-12,14,16 3Φ 85V
FS1,2/6A
LED1,2
'BRAKE COIL,C1ST,C1BR driving
PS-07,09,11
FS4,5/3A
LED4,5
Relay driving,external input,I/Fsignal,switch input
FS6,7/3A
LED6,7
CAR LON PCB power
3Φ 37V
PS-01,03,05 3Φ 19.2V PS-02,04,06 3Φ 19.2V
FS8,9,10,11/10A LED8,9,10,11 HALL BUTTON power
PS-17,19
AC 110V
FS12/3A
LED12
SMPS input power
PS-17,19
AC 110V
FS12/3A
LED12
INV. FAN driving
PS-18,20
AC 110V
FS13/3A
LED13
GATE SMPS,GATE TRANS input power
PS-21
"E"
PS-13,15
AC 110V
GATE SMPS,GATE TRANS "E" FS14/5A
LED14
Door motor input power(SBD1)
PS-13,15,10 AC 110V
FS14,16/3A,6A
LED14,16
TML2-02,01 AC 220V
FS15/10A
LED15
Checking lighting power supplied(DOP-113PCB)
TML3-02,01 AC 220V
FS15/10A
LED15
Checking lighting power supplied(DOP-116 PCB)
Door motor input power(SAV1,MAV1,DAV1,HAV1)
Table 2) AC/DC voltage output MIC/PIN
Voltage FUSE & Capacity
LED
Remark
UB-03,05
DC 110V FS3:3A(Base model)
LED3
UB-04,01
DC 48V
Relay driving,external input,I/Fsignal,switch input
'BRAKE COIL,C1ST,C1BR driving
UB-07,02
DC 24V
CAR LON PCB power
XHA-04,03
DC 24V
HALL BUTTON power(1~8FL)
XHA-06,05
DC 24V
HALL BUTTON power(9~16FL)
XHA-08,07
DC 24V
HALL BUTTON power(17~24FL)
TML2-06,05
DC 24V
HALL BUTTON power(25~32FL)
SMPS-01,02 AC 110V
SMPS input power
SMPS-03,04 AC 110V
INV. FAN input power
SMPS-05,06 AC 110V
GATE SMPS,GATE TRANS input power
SMPS-7
E
UB-08,09
AC 110V
GATE SMPS,GATE TRANS "E" Door motor input power
TML2-02,03 AC 220V
Checking lighting power supplied(DOP-113PCB)
TML3-02,03 AC 220V
Checking lighting power supplied(DOP-116 PCB)
TML2-10
E
EARTH(DOP-113 PCB)
TML3-10
E
EARTH(DOP-115,116 PCB)
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 12/32
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
4. Non-scaffolding method (MSK operation) 4.1. Preparation for MSK 1) Cable work of machine room and hoistway (Non-scaffolding operation) Caution : Complete governor installation, roping and switch connection. Governor switch should not be in common. Make UL and DL of limit switch common in DOM PCB TML1 terminal block. Make UL switch common with terminal block TML1-07 and TML1-08. Make DL switch common with terminal block TML1-07 and TML1-03. Wire the cable of the lowest final limit switch(LSD). a) Wire the final limit switch cable from the Control panel that M/C room duct piping has been completed, to control panel, and bind it(Refer to Fig.1).
M/C Room
b) Draw the cable for lower final limit switch down to
PIT floor through M/C room duct
piping. c) Bind the cable giving extra in the cord support of car lower section d) Wire and bind the remainder cable up to top of car, and then fix MIC terminal block at
Limit S/W cable
a reachable position. Check connection and insulation. a) Wire the limit switch ground line
Adapter MIC T/B
to control panel and MIC terminal block. b) Insert adapter cable into final limit switch cable MIC in machine room, and insert final limit switch cable, MSB, BZ and ORS
to MIC terminal block in(Refer to Fig.2)
c) Check the connection and insulation into "MSK" CAP in the control panel.
L F m o t t o B
d) If item c) is normal, insert an adapter plug
300mm or more
Governor Rope
e) Turn power ON.
(Fig.1) Wiring diagram for MSK operation
MMR Elevator_SI Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD Field Industrial Engineering
ADAPTER MIC T/B FOR MSK OPERATION
MSK운전용 ADAPTER MIC 단
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 13/32
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
CTRL B/D MIC PANEL "MSK" 21P
"MSK"
FOR LOWER LIMIT SW MIC TO INSERT "9P CAP HOUSING" FOR MSB SW TO INSERT "7P CAP HOUSING" FOR WARNING LAMP/BUZZER OF MSK CAR "13P CAP HOUSING" FOR MIC FOR COLUMN & STOP SW "9P CAP HOUSING" POSITION ASSEMBLED:ASSEMBLE MIC TERMINAL BOARD FOR MSK OPR TO LOWER PART OF UPPER BEAM. INSERT MIC CORESPONDING TO EACH PART NAME.
ADAPTER CABLE
"LSD" "LSD" LOWER FINAL LIMIT SW CABLE "LSD"
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM FOR MSK OPERATION
WIRING MIC REQUIRES CAUTION BECAUSE WARNING FLASHER AND BUZZER ARE POWERED BY AC 220V.
(Fig.2) WIRING DIAGRAM FOR MSK OPERATION
2) Operation under scaffold-free method ① Make sure the car is travelling in the up Direction with MSB's up button pressed and the car is
in the down direction with
MSB's down button pressed. If an error occurs during operations, put MSB E.STOP switch to the ON position. ② Should the car is travelling in opposition Directions of the running commands, check the connection status of the motor and R.E.
Refer to 3)
~
in case of the car in opposite direction. WIRING/CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR MSK OPERATION
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 14/32
Be sure to restore to the original state upon the completion of non-scaffolding work. a) Release UL and DL of limit switch from common state at TML1 terminal block. For UL switch, release terminal block TML1-07 & TML1-08 from common state. For DL switch, release terminal block TML1-07 & TML1-03 from common state. b) Remove MSK connector plug(21P) and connecting plug(9P, 7P) from control panel and connect to the final limit switches in hoistway. 4.2 Operation from machine room 1) Operation by DOR-13X PCB Put AUTO/MAINT of S1 switch on DOR-13X PCB to the MAINT position. DOR-13X PCB has NORMAL/MAINT,UP/DN, DMC, NORMAL/STOP switches. For M/C ROOM operation should be set NORMAL/MAINT S/W to MAINT side, and UP/DN S/W to UP or DN toggle. Low speed operation from machine room should be done with the doors closed (CDS "ON", LDS "ON") If "ACD=04" at column 1 6 of row 1 on ANN, MAINT(low speed) operation is available. ③ Carry out low speed operation from machine room by UP/DN switch on DOR-13X PCB to UP/DN. ④ Verify that operating direction conforms to operation command by moving it about 100mm. ⑤ Should the car is travelling in opposite directions of running commands, check the connection status of the motor and R.E. 2) Connection method when motor rotates reversal Regular and / reverse arrangement(Refer to Fig.3) Regular arrangement: Car is placed on the motor side. Reverse arrangement : Car is arranged on the pulley. REGULAR ARRANGEMENT
REVERSE ARRANGEMENT
PULLEY DRIVING SHEAVE
T/R M/C
Motor PULLEY DRIVING SHEAVE
Motor
(Fig.7) REGULAR/REVERSE ARRANGEMENT
T/R M/C
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 15/32
Connection method a) Interchange U-and W-phase in the event of reverse arrangement or motor is running in opposite direction. b) If rotary encodes are connected reversal, insert DIR 1
jumper on DOC-120 PCB. (Refer to Fig.4) When motor or rotary encoder is connected reversal,
2
3
1
2
3
(Fig.4) JUMPER SETTING
followings will occur. a) Reverse connection of motor: Motor vibrates during operations and stops for emergency after error "41" occurs. b) Reverse connection of R.E: The car travels in opposite directions of the running commands and stop within 5 sec. c) Main encoder signal input direction reverse and motor power (U,V,W) input
phase
sequence error : 1. When press Up button, elevator running down; 2. When press Down button, elevator running up; 3. Whether press Up button or press Down, elevator always running up, low speed and vibrating. Means: Change input direction of main encoder signal and motor power phase seq uence on field, until elevator running normal. Change method: 1. Change SPEC DATA: Address 0124 setting as 00/01 to change main encoder signal input direction. 2. After above setting will happen TCD-60 error, need A52E operation. 3. Amend DIR jumper line on DOC-130 PCB to set RIGHT/LEFT. 4. Method of change Motor power phase sequence: 3 phase all need change Ex) Change U,V,W phase sequence to W,U,V phase sequence. 5. Handle as above on field till direction and speed to normal position. 3) When UP operation DOR-13X PCB(INSPECTION S/W ASY) UP/DN
S/W
AUTO / MAINT S/W to
MAINT
to the "UP" position until destination
ANN shows "U" and the direction of car travelling up at column 16 of row 2. 4) When DOWN operation DOR-13X PCB(INSPECTION S/W ASY) UP/DN
S/W
AUTO / MAINT S/W to
MAINT
to the "DN" position until destination
ANN shows "DOWN" and the direction of car travelling up at column 16 of row 2.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 16/32
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Checking point during commissioning Swiching-on of Main MCCB YES Initial screen on ANN YES SYS1,2 LEDs flicker
NO
-. Check SMPS input/output -. Check DOC-120 PCB
YES CAR communication LON LED OFF or ON
NO
YES
-. Check T-cable for connection -. Check SC jack on DOC-120 PCB -. Check C-LON fuse in control panel
NO
-. Check E.STOP switch(APP/TOCI Box) -. Check E.STOP switch(DOC,DOR PCB) -. EES,GRS,SCS,FLU,FLD
NO
-. Check switch -. Check safety circuit -. Check connections
NO
-. When motor rotates reversely, change the DIR position on DOC-120 PCB.(Refer to Fig.4)
#R5SC RY "ON" YES Give UP or DN call through control panel YES E/L up(down)
5) IN CAR operation (Standard : Non-applied) Switch the operation switch of the on-car connection box to "NORMAL" position. Perform IN CAR low speed operation by using top floor button, bottom floor button or UP/DOWN button of control panel. 6) ON CAR operation ① Switch the operation mode in OPB from "NORMAL" to "MAINT". (OPB IN_CAR applied) Switch the operation switch of on-car connection box to "ON-CAR" operation mode. Check the operation of ON-CAR switch, MSB(switch) and T.O.C.I Box on car. Caution : Switch ON E.STOP switch and verify that the car operates. Get on or off a car after switched ON the E.STOP switch. Upon the completion of low speed operation, verify that the car interferes with entrance and equipment, while running the car down at 1 meter intervals.
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 17/32
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
4.3 Governor test During governor wedge test, if traction machine sheave doesn't idle
for 5 sec. or more,
rotary encoder will fail. After restoration, enter "A43E", "A44E" for all clear error. Governor and safety wedge operation test
1 Switch to on-car operation on the
Tripping test
1 Separate the governor line.
car top 2 Set up the digital tachometer. With the switch in the OFF position 2 check that the car comes to stop (UP and DN)
3 Drop catch weight.
3 Remove split pin from connection part of governor rope and prepare free fall
Drop governor rope without braking
4 and measure the speed at the time Make "SCS" common at TML1 terminal
of switching OFF and weight activating
in front of control panel(02 and 06
4 of TML1) and verify that wedge stops the descending by gripping the rail and sheave idles when E/L runs down
5 Return the catch weight to the original position by running up the car
Restore all conditions to original
5 ones and verify that there is no error by performing UP/DN running.(See table7)
Table 7) Governor tripping speed Speed
Car side
(m/min)
Switch
Weight
30~45
57±2
61±2
6 and return the governor switch
60
75±2
79±2
lever to the original position.
90
113±2
117±2
105
131±2
137±2
Remove the common line from "SCS"
Restore all conditions to original 7 ones and verify that there is no error by performing UP/DN running.
MMR Elevator_SI Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 18/32
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
5. Preparing high-speed commissioning 5.1 Preparation 1) Installing UL and FLU Distance between CAM and switch should be 11±1 mm. When car is ±5 mm of bottom or top floor level, UL shall contact with CAM and not operate.(When running UP and DOWN slow, car stops at 50~70mm) FLU should be in position of 200±10 mm from UL.(Refer to Fig. 1 and Table 1) 2) Check on UL and FLU operation condition Lower the car 2~3 meter above the top floor level in low speed operation. Run the car in the up direction under speed operation. Distance where the car has stopped by the operation of UL should be within 70 mm. Repeat item
.
Run the car in the up direction after making UL common. Distance where the car has stopped by the operation of FLU should be within about 270 mm. Run the car in the UP and DOWN direction after switching OFF UL. (This time, car shall run DOWN but shall not run UP.) Run the car UP and DOWN after turning FLU OFF. (This time, car shall not run both UP and DOWN.) Check error while running the car UP and DOWN after restoring FLU and UL. 3) Check installation and operation status of DL and FLD Repeat above item 2) in the
bottom floor.
(Fig.1) INSTALLING FINAL LIMIT SWITCH
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 19/32
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Table 1) Limit switch installed position Distance
L2
FLU(D)
UL(D)
30
200
50
150
450
45
200
50
150
600
60
200
50
150
1000
90
200
50
150
1400
2000
105
200
50
150
1800
2700
SPEED
L3
L4
L5
L1
FLU ~ UL SD1U(1D) SD2U(2D)
On the basis of bending point side of limit switch CAM when car is on
"0"
level(Landing sill of bottom and top floor). 4) Cleaning Section
Working contents -. Clean control panel, governor, TR M/C, duct and floor.
Machine room -. Assemble control panel, governor,TR M/C sheave and duct cover. -. Latch the machine room door.(By builder) Entrance and -. Clean hall door equipment, landing sill, rail and rail bracket. Hoist way
-. Clean rail (Sand defected rail surface with a file) -. Clean car door equipment on and inside the car.
Car
-. Disassemble the wedge roller and guide shoe in wedge assembly, and remove foreign substances and then assemble them.
PIT
-. Clean pit floor and assemble the oil pan.
5) Compensation chain Bring the car down to the bottom floor and install a compensation chain support to the bottom of the car. Install a compensation chain latch at 400mm above pit floor of the counter weight rail. (Refer to Figure 2) Connect the chain to the support of the car by using 'U" bolt and bring the car up. Be sure that there is sufficient extra chain(300mm) on the car side.
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 20/32
When the car reaches the top floor, hang and bind the remainder compensation chain and
untwist the
bands. Connect the compensation chain to the bottom of counter weight with "U" bolt at 230±20mm above pit
floor and
cut the rest of chain. (Refer to Fig. 2) When compensation chain is connected, assemble double nut and
(Fig.2)Assembling compen. chain
split pin.
Applicable standard for compensation chain(Refer to Table 2)
Table 2) Applicable standard Speed Usage
Legend : Chain
Roppin
(m/min)
30≤ V ≤ 60
2:1
Passenger Hospital
Passengers (Load)
1:1
Rope
None
Stroke (Travel) (m) 20
25
30
40
60 Above 60
P ≤ 15 P ≥ 17
None
Compensation chain
ALL P ≤ 15
V = 90,105
1:1
V = 120,150
ALL
ALL
Compensation chain
V = ≥ 180
ALL
ALL
ROPE
ALL
ALL
ALL
Car, Freight
P ≥ 17
Compensation chain
Note 1) The above standard is applicable to a standard specification. Thus, when car weight increases due to car interior decoration, separately calculate and apply a standard. Note 2) For below cases, compensation chain will not be applicable.
Passengers
Stroke
TYPE
Remark
45,60,90,105
40M or less
TRUNK
Standard SIZE
17
60,90,105
40M or less
Passenger
Spec. size
17
60,90,105
40M or less
TRUNK
Spec. size
11 ~ 15
Speed(m/min)
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 21/32
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
5.2 Car balancing 1) Adjusting guide shoe Run the car down to the bottom floor. Adjust car balance with the gap(30mm) between landing and car sill kept. The gap of wedge body shall be the same on the right and left. Raise and adjust the wedge to return automatically(free fall). Verify that wedge stroke is 84mm and the distance between rail and wedge is 5±0.5mm. Tighten the fastening nut of the tie rod attached to sling until it contacts with the tie rod. Tighten the nut half a turn after it contacts with tie rod guide.(Same in 4 points) How to adjust guide shoe a) Tighten fastening bolt and set the sizes of push nut and ring to 10mm, with guide shoe slightly contacting with 6mm size of "A" section. b) If this 10mm size is not obtained, the car vibrates because the light hold rubber cannot move. (Refer to Fig. 3) c) If 6mm size of "A" section is not obtained, regular push pressure(32Kg) cannot be obtained. If the size is too large, the car may vibrate severely and interfere with hoistway equipment and car equipment. d) If the size is smaller than 6mm in "A" section, pushing pressure becomes too big and starting shock and stopping shock may occur. Adjust the guide shoe and install the oiler.
(Fig.3) Adjusting guide shoe
MMR Elevator_SI Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 22/32
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
2) Adjusting guide roller Tension the rope(same spring size) and run the car down to the bottom floor. No interference will be allowed between clutch cam and landing door.(Close the door) Keep the car loosening all roller set bolts of the guide rollers. (4 points on upper/lower section of car) Loosen bracket and cam for fixing limit switch to avoid interference with the car. Stay the car in no load condition. Verify that car operation is not hindered because fastening nut of tie rod is tightened. Hang the balance weights below the car and adjust balance so that car may be aligned with the rail center line in static condition. Wedge body gap shall be the same in right and left side. Raise the wedge and check that it restores properly. Verify that wedge stroke is 84mm and the clearance between rail and wedge is 5±0.5mm. At this time, the clearance between hall and car sill should be 30mm. Tighten the guide roller spring nut(Left/right No. ) to adjust the spring length to 30mm. Then guide roller contacts the rail. Tighten both spring nuts No.
and
to adjust the spring length to 30mm.(Perform in upper and lower section at a time)
84
(Refer to Fig. 4)
(Fig.4) Adjusting guide roller
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 23/32
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
The guide roller adjusted with spring should be ratable by 20Kg force. Install the limit SW loosened on the normal position. Fasten the nut of the tie rod attached to the sling so as to contact slightly. Tighten the nut half a turn after it contacts the tie rod guide.(Same at 4 points) How to adjust guide roller a) It is desirable to adjust the car balance in the middle of the floors after works for movable cable, compensation rope or chain, wiring, etc. are completed. However, generally, it may be carried out to the bottom floor in consideration of workability. b) Guide roller should be adjusted within 5kg of front and rear force and within 10kg of right and left force(but, 3kg and 6kg for 300m/min or faster). This force should be measured while tensing up/down and right/left of the roller guide body with spring balance hanging. c) Also, loading additional balance weights on to the car obtains more sub weight when balancing. Thus performing car balance with minimum balance weight is essential. d) Bad balanced car could cause vibration or damage of guide roller. Special attention is needed. 5.3 Installing and adjusting position detector(POSI) and position detector bracket 1) Adjusting shield plate distance of POSI ① Position the car to the bottom floor level, install POSI bracket temporarily on the rail, and adjust it up and down vertically on to the basis of the rail.(Refer to Fig. 5) Install levelling device on to the support arm of the door machine base. SHIELD PLATE
POSI. 40mm or more
SHIELD PLATE
14
RED-MARK
18. 5 59
120 250 278
24 50 67
120
16. 5 38 14
(Fig.5) ADJUSTING RANGE OF SHIELD PLATE
Position the temporarily induction plate installed on to the middle of POSI, adjust it to be shielded up to 40mm(red-mark) deep and fix it.
MMR Elevator_SI Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 24/32
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Table 3) Function and usage
No.
Name
Function and usage
② LDU
①
LDC
Floor height measure/door zone sensing./floor count.
① LDC
②
LDU
Slack rope compensation
③
LDD
③ LDD
Connect MIC connector(LD) of POSI to machine room and on car connection box. Turn on door machine DMC and DCO. Caution: If a magnetic material is near, its operational features may be varied. MAGNETIC MATERIAL
SW s ide
70mm
70mm
50mm
MAGNETIC MATERIAL
(Fig. 6) Min. gap between magnetic material and POSI
MAGNETIC MATERIA
MG s ide
MAGNETIC MATERIA
70mm
MAGNETIC MATERIA
MAGNETIC MATERIA
70mm
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 25/32
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
6. POTENTIO METER 6.1 Installation
Car ¹Ù´Ú Floor Ä«
L
Cushion Rubber ¹æÁø°í¹« ½ºÅ©·ç Screw
60mm
BASE
1) Move the base and adjust the distance(L) from car bottom and top of base to be 15mm by screw 2) Spec setting of Potentio meter Applied 1EA : $0018 => “41” ,DFTR : “81”
(Load sensor type + Number of sensor) Potentio meter : 40
DFTR : 80
Applied 2EA : $0018 => “42” ,DFTR : “82” SPEC1 Dip S/W pin No.4 ON position on the DOC-120 PCB. 6.2 Connection table MIC name : POT
MIC name : PTMA
NO Signal Name
NO Signal Name
1 2
P24 REF_VOLT
1 2
REF_VOLT
MIC name : PTM1 NO Signal Name 1 REF_VOLT
3
SIGNAL1
3
SIGNAL1
2
SIGNAL
4 5
GDC REF_VOLT
4 5
GDC
3 4
GDC
6
SIGNAL2
6
7
GDC
8
7 8
DCL240PCB
9
1 2 3
5
POTENTIOMETER ASY (AEG00C629)
10 11
MIC name : PTM2 NO Signal Name
12 13 14
REF_VOLT SIGNAL2
1 2
REF_VOLT SIGNAL
15
GDC
3
GDC
16 17
PTM
4 5
PTM 1 2 3
18 "PTM"CABLE` ASY (AEG00C746)
19 20 21
* In case it supplied 1 sensor, connect the MIC to PTM1
MMR Elevator_SI Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 26/32
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
7. Adjusting in high speed operation 7.1 Operating board ID & CPI check 1) Car operating board ID & CPI check by ANN Enter "A83E" in ANN normal mode. "CAR CHK" which means CAR CHECK is displayed in ANN. DCL-242 PCB operates. Bottom floor car call button lights ON as Tab.1 according to car operating
board ID
set in DCL-242 PCB. Tab.1) Car operating board ID NO
Car OPB
ID(HEX)
Light ON times
1
Front MAIN
1
1 time
2
Front SUB
2
2 times
3
Disabled MAIN
3
3 times
4
Disabled SUB
4
4 times
5
Rear MAIN
5
5 times
6
Rear SUB
6
6 times
CPI of appropriate OPB indicates ID settled. Each lamp(UP,DOWN,FULL,OUT OF SERVICE) of appropriate OPB CPI lights ON in order. Items
~
are repeated in approximately 6 sec. period.
To release CAR CHECK MODE, enter "FFFF" to switch to normal mode. 2) Check point during abnormal operation LED indication confirmation LED-LD1 indicates operation state of DCL-242 PCB, and the spec. is as follows.
NO
State
Condition
1
Light OFF
CPU RUN ,Comm. Error
2
ON in 1 sec. Period
3
ON in 0.3 sec. period CPU RUN OK,Comm. OK
Remark P24V power error, PCB(H/W) defects
CPU RUN OK,Comm. Error Comm. line's bad connection, DIP SW's setting error
DIP switch Setting car operating board ID Operation board ID's value should not exceed from the value set from Tab.1). Especially, car operating board ID of DCL-242 PCB for in-car, on-car running OPR SW input must be set from front of MAIN(01 HEX). When value other than above specified is set, communication of control panel with DOC-120 PCB cannot be established. At this time, CPI is cleared and call is not registered. Setting terminal resistance
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 27/32
Set terminal resistance at the end of communication line(See Fig.3). When terminal resistance is not set in communication end line, DCL-242 PCB installed to operating board back section of the terminal resistance set can not communicate with DOC-120 PCB. This time, CPI is cleared and the call is not registered. 7.2 Hall button & IND check 1) Setting floor ID : using DIP switch (SW1-8P) Structural drawing of DIP switch ON
OFF 1
2
3
4
6
5
7
8
(Fig.1) Structural drawing of DIP switch
Setting DIP switch ON
OFF 1
2
3
4
6
5
7
Floor ID setting segment (Hex)
8
Button type segment
(Fig.2) BIT assigning of DIP switch
Setting the ID is possible, 63 maximum, by using Floor ID setting segment(No.1~6). (OFF condition does not exist.) Button type setting by using button type segment(No.7~8) DIP switch No.
Button type
7
8
OFF
OFF
General button
ON
OFF
DUPLEX 2'ND HALL NET
Setting DIP switch ex.1) When setting the lowest floor hall button ID(ID=01) ON
OFF 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DIP switch operation method - Verify DIP switch state, which is OFF(state when delivery) before operating. - Operate DIP switch in direction of ON.
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 28/32
- For DIP switch setting, set 1 from bottom floor as reference floor and increase by 1 according to increase of each floor(See Tab.2). But, if there is non-stop floor, set ID without consideration of that floor. Tab.2) Example of general type 15 stories(12 above & 3 under the ground) building floor ID B/D floors
SVC floors
Setting DIP SW(HEX)
12
STOP
0D
11
STOP
0C
10
NON STOP
9
STOP
0B
8
STOP
0A
7
STOP
9
6
STOP
8
5
NON STOP
4
STOP
7
3
STOP
6
2
STOP
5
1
STOP
4
B1
STOP
3
B2
STOP
2
B3
STOP
1
Remark
Without button unit
Without button unit
Floor ID setting table using DIP switch(DS1) - Setting general type Floor ID
Ex) 1 : ON
0 : OFF
DIP SW 1
Absolute FL
HEX
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
2
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
3
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
∫ 31
1
1
1
∫ 1
1
0
0
0
∫ 1F
32
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
20
MMR Elevator_SI Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 29/32
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
2) Button connection check Diagram of hall serial communication DOC- 120 PCB SH
Control panel TX1 LED
1
2
3
4
DC24V
SH
XHA(CAP) 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 XHA(PLUG)
Machine room
1
2 3
4
5
6
7
8
9
GND DC24V
HA
TOP FL 1 2
GND
3
DC24V
4
DHG- 161 PCB
5 6
Hoist way HA
TOP FL- 1
IND PCB
1
DCM -1XX 2 GND
3 4
DC24V
HI
5 6
B/ T PCB
TRM R (120 Ohm) HA
Bottom FL 1 2
Diverging box
GND
3
DC24V
4 5
(Fig.3) Hall serial communication diagram
6
Vertical button ASY
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 30/32
3) Hall button & IND PCB check(on the basis of Simplex) Check point before power ON Perform this before inserting hoist way cable plug. - Turn off the control panel power. - Check resistance, disconnection, and jumper in control panel as Tab.3. Tab.3) Check points before power ON NO
Checking contents
Checking point
1
XHA CAP 1 - 2
2
XHA CAP 3 - 4
R = 2± 1Ω (check of pulse trans problem in DOC-120 PCB) R = 1㏀ ± 200Ω(DC24V power short check)
3
DOC PCB SH Jumper
4
DOC PCB SH Jumper
Must be inserted(TRM R connection state check) After SH disconnected, R of both ends of SH must be 120± 10Ω (TRM R check).
After checking above item 4, re-insert SH(JUMPER) in DOC-120 PCB. - Check hoist way cable(communication network) as Tab.4. Tab.4) Checks for hoist way cable(communication network) NO
Checking point
1
XHA PLUG 1 - 2
2
XHA PLUG 3 - 4
Checking contents R = 120± 10Ω (Check of TRM R in diverging box of bottom floor) Must be opened(Check of DC24V power shortly)
- Insert connector of hoist way cable(XHA). - If above items
,
,
are normal, power ON.
Check points after power ON - Checks of control panel side Checking point
NO 1
Checking contents Both of 2 LEDs must be flickered
TX1, IDLE1 LED in DOC-120 PCB
Setting Hall check mode - Switch operation board running switch to independent side. - Set button & IND PCB check mode. - If "A82E" entered with KEY PAD of ANN, the below will be displayed in LCD's row 4.
R4
H
A
L
L
C
H
K
- Move to floor to be check - HALL B/T and IND PCB check at hall side
K
:
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 31/32
- Verify HALL B/T and IND PCB's operating as below flow chart. - Canceling the HALL CHECK mode by "FFFF" key in. R4
H
A
L
L
C
H
K
K
:
F
F
F
F
- Switch operation board running switch to normal side. HALL CHECK MODE? YES
NO
B8 character ON B8 character ON LAMP1 ON B8 character ON LAMP2 ON B8 character ON UP LAMP ON B8 character ON DN LAMP ON B8 character ON UP L/T,CHIME ON B8 character ON DN L/T,CHIME ON B8 character ON ALL B/T LED ON Floor ID DISPLAY(DIPSW1 1~6) High character:F ,Low character:B/T type DISPLAY(DIPSW1 7~8) END
4) Installation step of Hall B/T and IND board ① After disconnecting XHA MIC in controller, change the operation mode to MAINT on the car.
DIP SW(SW1) Floor ID setting on DHG-161 PCB Connection of HA mic jack on DHG-161 Connection of HI1 mic jack for DHG-161 PCB and IND board(DCM-1XX) joint. HI2 mic jack : For DUPLEX Lift No.2 Connection of HU,HD(for B/T interface) on DHG-161 PCB. Connection of HUC,HDC(for Duplex No.2, disabled person B/T applied) on
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 32/32
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
DHG-161 PCB. Connection of HF1(Hall lantern applied) mic jack on DHG-161. (HF2 :For DUPLEX Lift No.2) Connection of HC1(Hall chime applied) mic jack on DHG-161. (HC2 :For DUPLEX Lift No.2) Repeat above
~
against all floors.
When you complete work until
, connect XHA MIC to CP after main power off.
Turn on the main power after XHA MIC connection to CP * Above work procedure is to protect PCB damage that occur sometimes while you work in hoistway for wiring.
Anliso Door Manual
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 1/16
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Index 1. Car door installation manual ................................................................ 2 2. Connection............................................................................................. 4 3. Operation ............................................................................................. 5 4. Other parameter ................................................................................ 10 5. Explain of debugging ........................................................................ 11 6. Trouble shooting ................................................................................ 14 7. Others ................................................................................................ 14
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 2/16
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
1. Car door installation manual
Safety Attention - Before installation and putting equipment to operation, read this safety attention and alarm to avoid harm and damage to person and device. This instructor differentiates safety content in two levels, “Attentive” and “Dangerous”. - Misuse is dangerous, may occur
Attentive
flesh,
moderate
wound
and
economic loss
- Misuse is dangerous, may cause
Dangerous
Grievous Bodily Harm, deformity so much as death and huge economic loss.
1.1 Affirm and Install
Attentive z Do not install damaged and absent-part frequency inverter. z Do not install on the incentive material so as to prevent fire. z Do not grasp the outline border or terminal block, prevent drop and being Wounded. z Make sure to fix the installation, or it may drop down and smash others.
1.2．Lay line
Attentive z Make sure whether the AC main loop gets the same voltage with the Inverter rating voltage. Do not make trial on endure voltage of the inverter. z Do not connect the power supply to the terminal U、V、W.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 3/16
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Dangerous z Affirm whether the input power is OFF before connection. z Only allow to connector input power of AC single-phase 220V, and the Device must be grounded (NEC and other applied standard). z Only special engineer can do this connection job... 1.3．Operate and Circulate
Attentive
z The temperature of heartsick will become very high; so do not touch to Avoid scald. z Do not alter the enactment of inverter freely, this inverter has its own enactment When leaves factory.
Dangerous z The power must be switched on after outer line installed. Let the switch be OFF Before connection. z Do not touch terminal block of inverter even out of use, be careful of get an electric shock.
1.4．Maintenance and Inspect
Dangerous z The inspection should be done 5 min after power cut, or may have the dangerous Of getting electric shock. z Special engineer must do the inspection and maintenance. z Do not touch the terminal block of inverter when power is on, it is very dangerous Because the block has high voltage. Use isolative tool when doing inspection and maintenance, avoid girding metal substance like watch and ring etc.
1.5．Others
Dangerous
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 4/16
z Absolutely forbid the alteration to inverter, prevent casualty and incident.
2. Connection 2.1. Control Connection Pin
P1
P2
Terminal & Mark
Terminal & Mark
Function
4
Door open to position
L
2
PE
GND
5
Common
3
N
Power neuter line
6
Door open to position
1
U
7
Common
2
V
8
Position
3
W
9
Common
4
PE
Power Phase line
GND Open door instruction
Common
3
Door closing instruction
11
P4
Machine Terminal
2
10 P5
Pin
1
1 P3
Function
Outer connection door opening to position
P6
1
A
3
5V
5
B
6
0V
9
PE
GND
Notice：P3: open/close door instruction input，it should be the Input without power. P4: All P4 output is relay contact output. DC：24V，2A；AC： 220V/110V 1A P5: P5 connect with open-door input switch (Double steady magnistor), It should be normally close contact when open/close the door.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
2.2. Door M/C Drawing
3．Operation 3.1. Key instruction and function
Attentive -
All parameter should be input by eligible person, pay (High attention to safety alert)
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 5/16
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
1.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 6/16
OOUT COUT SOUT OIN CIN DSIN
P
Caution: Before adjustment operating manual.
read
the
- Display the operation state, parameter or Key /Display
Function
▲
Raise/increase
▼
Descend/reduce
- May reduce parameter number or value when program.
P
Descend/reduce
OOUT
Indicator lamp
- Use to visit set parameter - Output instruction of door-opening to
COUT
Indicator lamp
SOUT
Indicator lamp
- Output instruction of door position signal
OIN
Indicator lamp
- Input instruction of door-opening
CIN
Indicator lamp
- Output instruction of door-opening
DSIN
Indicator lamp
value (when input key’P’）or fault code - May increase parameter number or value when program.
position - Output instruction of door-closing to position
- Input instruction of out connected door to position
3.2. Basic Operation The set basic operation is as below: only open-door speed within 0.5m/s and 0.7m/s
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 7/16
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
can use this way, others set refer to the function sheet Step/Operation
Key
Show value (Deposited
1、switch on the main power
pulse number)
2、press program key
P
F000
3、Press
△
F009
4、Press P to display current parameter set value
P
F050
5、Press
△
F070
6、Press P to write set value
P
F009
7、Press ▽ to return to F009
▽
F000
8、Press P to exit program
P
until display F009
to set necessary parameter value
(Deposited pulse number)
3.3 System Parameter Alter and set the parameters by film key of front board to adjust acquired characteristic of open/close door, like the switch speed etc. 4 digits LED, and can adjust by graph drawing of former page displayed the selected and set parameter. Notice：Disconnect input signal of open /close door before setting the parameter, or pressing key P doesn't work. If pressing
or
discontinuously, the numerical
value will alter step by step, if pressing the key is done continuously, the value will get a rapid alteration. If something wrong with the value setting, it can be reset to former value by changing F017 to 1 and pressing P. Data
Function
Parameter Range Former setting
F000
Not used
Explain/ Note
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
F001
F002
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
- Acceleration of door closing
- Overall speed of door closing
0005—0024 ［0012］
［0050］
0010—0100
F003
F004
- Door closing to place buffer
0003—0018
F005
- Distance of door closing to place Buffer
0010—0100
F006
- Speed of opening lock
0002—0015
F007
- Distance of opening lock
0020—0050
F008
F009
- Total speed of door opening
F010
- Deceleration when door closing
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 8/16
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
- Adjust the value by comfortable degree based on different door width, the slope increase or decrease in accordance with the value alteration. If the width of door opening is too small, it will influence the overall speed of door closing.
0010—0100
- Deceleration of door closing
- Acceleration of door opening
Rev. No.
［0045］
- Set the highest speed of door closing - Adjust the value by comfortable degree based on different door width, the slope increase or decrease in accordance with the value alteration. If the width of door opening is too small, it will influence the overall speed of door closing. - Excessive large setting may induce impaction when door closing
［0005］
［0050］
［0008］
［0040］ 0005—0024 ［0012］
0010—0100 ［0050］ 0010—0100 ［0045］
- Excessive large setting may induce the time of closing too long - Excessive small setting may induce impaction when door closing - Adjust door opening speed based on different type of lock, excessive small setting may cause door opening long time - Adjust the door opening gap based on different type of lock - Adjust the value by comfortable degree based on different door width, the slope increase or decrease in accordance with the value alteration. If the width of door opening is too small, it will influence the overall speed of door closing. - Adjust the total speed when door opening - Adjust the value by comfortable degree based on different door width, the slope increase or decrease in accordance with the value alteration. If
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
0004—0018 F011
F012
- Amortizing distance when door to position
F013
- Wallop of urgency door opening
［0009］ 0005—0050 ［0005］
0003—0023 ［0005］
- Output position while door opening to position
0000—0125
0000—0125
F015
- Output position while door closing to position
F016
- Door position Output position
F014
F017
- Reset to original setting data while leaving factory
［0005］
［0005］ 0—100 ［50］ 0—1 ［0］ 0030—0080
F019
- Door closing moment adjustment
［0060］
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
- Power of amortizing when door opening
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 9/16
the width of door opening is too small, it will influence the overall speed of door closing. - Excessive large setting may bring clash - Excessive small setting will not make to door to position - Excessive small setting may bring clash - Excessive large setting will slow down the speed of door opening - The wallop will be varied because door opening signal exists while closing the door, Excessive large setting may bring clash, Excessive small setting may make the stopping slowly
- Time of setting signal of output door opening to position - Time of setting signal of output door closing to position -Door position signal setting data displays by per centum - Set’1’and press P，all parameter will be reset to original data -
Adjust
door
closing
excessive small value will influence total speed of door closing
F020
-Extrusion guarding function settled inside
F021
Password
F022
- Select of door vane
0—1 ［0］
- Be no effective if setting 0 - Be effective if setting 1 Input password 55, Enter F022-F032。
0—1
moment,
- 0 : asynchronous door vane - 1 : synchronous door vane
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 10/16
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
［1］
F023
- Select of Retentiveness
F024
Blank
F025
- Low speed moment adjustment
F026
F027
F028
0—1 ［1］
10-20 [15]
- Door opening largest moment adjustment - Frequency of motor under retentiveness of door opening and closing - Moment of retentiveness under retentiveness of door opening and closing - Constant select of opening/closing when arriving to position - Constant opening /closing select for position output
30-80 [60]
- 0 no retentiveness when door closing to position -1have retentiveness when door closing to position - Adjust moment of door in limit speed when opening and closing based on different door weight - Adjust the largest moment during door opening
10-30 [18] 20-50 [30]
0—1 ［0］
- 0 Constant closing output - 1 Constant opening output
0—1 ［1］
- 0 Constant closing output - 1 Constant opening output
F031
- Automatic opening and closing door setting
0—1 ［0］
- 0 Command Opening and closing door - 1 Automatic opening and closing door
F032
- Time setting of automatic opening and closing door
8—30 ［12］
- Adjust timing time of automatic opening and closing door
F029
F030
[Note ]：Parameter F022—F032is set by factory, no need to set on site commonly 4．Other Parameter 4.1. Technical Parameter Level Shockproof
- IP30 - IEC 68-2-6，2mm peak value- peak value（5.16Hz）2g, peak
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Relative humidity Room temperature Refrigeration Style
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Dust Degree
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 11/16
- IEC Standard 664 belongs to degree 2
- 90%，without dew -, -25…+70
Storage
0…+50
Use
- Self Refrigerate
4.2. Electric Parameter Power Voltage Slime Standard electro motion Input Voltage Output Voltage Encoder
- 230V±%15， 50/60Hz±2%
- 2A Max（230V） - 3X220V 0，1……50Hz - Power 5V
Input Signal
- None original signal
Output Signal
- 250V Max，3A Max
Rating Output Power
4A Max
- 0．5 KVA
5．Explain of Debugging 5.1. Explain of Key Words 1) Offline operate state：Release from main controller and landing door, Door machine operate separately. 2) Connect with door opening to position switch from outside：Install. A pair of steady magnistor, contact of switch act close, door machine Control gets the signal of door opening to position and give the information. 5.2. Step of door machine control debugging
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 12/16
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
1）Install door machine according to sequence, rectify the door machine height and position、car door fan、door van, let the door in off-line operation state, ensure the door go to each position without block. 2）Check input power of the door machine control：AC220V±15%；do not electrify if out of AC220V±15%，or it will damage the door machine control. 3) Make sure the input voltage is common; open the power switch of door machine control. At the beginning of electrifying, the door machine controller displays the width pulse number which has been deposited before leaving factory，move to door opening direction by self-study speed， input door opening to position signal to door machine control until the outer-connected door opening to position close. Input door to position signal to door machine control, the door machine is in door opening position if the outer-connected indicating lamp on operation board light in the meantime. The control respond the contract instruction and board operation unless the door machine control receive the opening and closing action signal when outer-connected door open to position；the control does not respond and be in state of low speed without signal, only display current pulse number.
- There will be no door opened to position signal in any of circumstances as follows: * Pin P5 becomes less crowded or something wrong with connect line to magnistor. Stick in Pin or connect correctly. * Alnico does not match the position of magnistor，do not activate the magnistor but adjust the position, let the magnet action close when door opened to position. * N、S pole of alnico reversed，the door opened to position magnistor
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 13/16
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
action disconnect. Install upper and nether cover of alnico. * Contact of magnistor was damaged, replace with another magnistor in same type.
4) In common case，the door machine was debugged before leaving factory, electrify on site, the door machine control can open and close in gear so as the door machine opened to position，jump out P3 contact or
、 on board to do
the door opening and closing operation ， during door closing, the pulse number of door width descends gradually and displays 0000 when door closed; in opening process, displays 0000 and increase by degrees until biggest pulse number appears when door opening to position. It is common if displays 000X after door closing to position（X is within 0-10）
5) Adjust related parameters based on fact until it reaches to an ideal run curve. If there is clash when door closing to position, change F004 parameter to a small value and F005 a litter higher；if door vane can not be opened when door closing to position, adjust related mechanical set (refer to door machine related part) and then make F004 parameter higher and F005 a litter smaller.
6) If move door-opening width limit of door machine when install and adjust on site, it must do self-study in state of offline, and the origination should be out of door closing to position. (Door is not stopped at door closing to position). The operation of self-study is as follows:(It can not do self-study if something wrong with the switch of outer-connected door-opening to position)
Step/Operate 1．Press key of program P 2．Press
until display F018
Key-Press
Display
P
F000 F018
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
3．Press P display current parameter
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 14/16
P
0000
0000 4．Press
0001
set 0001 as the parameter
Self-study finished, display P
5．Press P and start self-study
pulse number of door width and resume to operate state
7) After door machine operate normally, connect door opening and closing control line to Pin P3；Based on require of main control system, the door opened and closed signal which is outputted by door machine control is outputted from terminal Pin P4, connect to the related connection terminal of main control system（Attention： The door opening control signal must be the signal without power，or it will break the door control The output of door opening and closing to position is by relay ， the contact can stand AC220V/ 110V、1A；DC24V、2A）。 8）Connect correctly，enter F029 by F021 password and amend parameter， make output style of door machine control accord with main control system. It is usually set by elevator factory. 9) After all door machine parameters are accord with the requirement of main control， the operation of door opening and closing can be done ， amend related parameter according to system till it reaches an ideal operate state.
6．Trouble Shooting - When the trouble occurs, the control will be cut off and display a trouble code, electrify again and work normally after renovating. Trouble Code E100
Reason Machine UVW connection wrong
Method Power off，connect UVW correctly, electrify again
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 15/16
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Coder damaged Or connection
Connect correctly or change another coder
trouble E001
Over voltage
E002
Over current
E003
Over loading
Check if the voltage is within the rate displays on nameplate Check if trail cord is jumped or wrong grounding, check if machine is blocked up or over loading Check if machine is over loading
Transducer is E005
Over heat
Check if environment temperate is over heat
（inside PTC） 7. Others 7.1 Garbage Disposal - Sellers will reclaim the rejected equipment but do not pay for conveyance. If user disposes by himself, he must obey the related rule of law，if the method of disposal doesn’t according to the compulsive rule, the sellers are derelict of duty, and crust and radiator are made of aluminum. Should obey related regulation when dispose wire way board. 7.2 Consultation Repair - Series No. And Order No. Are need in consultation，and should be repeated in reply. Only can be repaired in a complete set due to technical reason.
Attchment1：Attention in door machine Installation 1) After door machine installed, the high-speed door machine installation bracket made soleplate, hanger upright, center of door machine and car’s in one line. Hand push board should be flexible. 2) Adjust the clearance between door vane center and board center is 150+3mm （landing door is 150mm）. Close the door by hand，open the door vane maximally to f, adjust clearance between lock and hook，（see figure），A is 2mm，B is 0mm. If retentiveness is
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 16/16
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
big excessively, augment clearance of A. A B
8. Adjusting of car door belt 16~20mm
14~18mm
1kgf 0.5kgf
Stone for the direction
Stone for the direction
SAV Door Manual
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 0/36
Date
July.2006
Doc. No.
Index 1. Commissioning of Door M/C (SAV1)...…………………………………………..1 1.1Adjusting interlock and clutch …………………………………………………...1 1.2 Door device control circuit (diagram)...………………………………………...3 1.3 Test driving of door machine ………………..…………………………….….20 1.4 Adjusting PATTERN .…………………………………………………………...21 1.5 LED & ERROR ...........................................................................................24 1.6 Check points during door abnormal operation ……………………………...25 2. HAV Door system and Eletric adjustment.………………………………...…..29 2.1 Motor control characteristics .....……………………………………………..29 2.2 PCB function ....………………………………………………………………...30 2.3 Trial run of door operator ...…………………………………………………....31 2.4 DIP Switch setting for door SPEC ...………………………………...............31 2.5 Function of dip switches ..…………………………………………………….33 2.6 Each SPEC adjustment method .....………………………………………....34 2.7 LED function ...………………………………………………………………....34 2.8 Car door electrical circuit diagram.………………………………………....36
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 1/38
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
1. Commissioning of Door M/C (SAV1) 1.1 Adjusting interlock and clutch ※ Adjusting interlock and clutch should be performed in the condition that hall door device, L-Sill & C-Sill and car door device is identical with the center and the balance is maintained. St roke 4± 0. 5
1) Adjusting interlock ① Verify door is identical with the center of JAMB and L-SILL, and the gap is exact. ② Check the gap if HOOK and CLAW
2± 0. 5
11± 1
gap is 2±0.5mm, and switch stroke 2± 0. 5
is 4±0.5mm or less(See Figure 1). ( 그림1)
2) Adjusting clutch
I nt erl ock & Swi t ch
(Fig.1)
① Distance between landing sill and
8± 1
Fi xed 고정자
clutch must be 8±1mm by moving car
C-Si l l
up and down. And adjust verticality to be 1mm or less front & back, left & right. Standard distance between landing
30
30
Movabl e scal e 가동자
L-Si l l 10± 2
10± 2 72± 1
sill and car sill is 30mm(See Figure 2).
( Fi(g. 2) Cl ut클러치 ch gri p계합 di agram 그림2) 관계
② After adjusting fixed scale clutch is finished, main fastening should be performed, and adjust clutch cam with liner so that opening of movable scale maybe 72±1mm with car door closed completely.
At this time, increasing inserting of liner, dimension of
opening will also increase. 3) Adjusting gate switch cam ① Adjust the distance between Sw i t ch 스위치
cam and switch to be 1±0.5mm or less(See Fig.3). 1± 0. 5mm Cam 캠
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 2/38
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
② Adjust the length of riding cam
Sw 스위치 i t ch
slowly close door, and adjust the dimension of opening in contacting point to be 18±2mm(See Fig.5).
Cam 캠 2± 0. 5mm
( Fi g.(5) Adj ust캠과 i ng cam & sw i t ch 그림5) 스위치 조정
③ Disassemble switch cover,
중심선 Mi ddl e l i ne
slowly close door, and adjust
카도어 Car door
카도어 Car door
the dimension of opening in contacting point to be 18±2mm(See Figure 6).
18± 2mm Fi g. 6) A카도어 dj ust i ng car door ((그림6) 스위치 조정
4) Adjusting safety shoe ① Projection of shoe: single face shoe: 35mm both face shoe: 25mm ② With stopper, verify if stroke is normal during door's complete opening and closing (See Table 1) Tab.1) Operating distance of safety shoe
Segment Bot h f ace
Oper at i ng posi t i on
Di mensi on
Di st ance bet ween door / shoe on f ul l openi ng
13±3mm
When door i s opened at t he hal f poi nt
48±2mm
Di st ance bet ween shoes on door ' s compl et e cl ose
6±1mm
Si ngl e f ace Di st ance bet ween door / shoe on f ul l openi ng When door i s opened at t he hal f poi nt
35±2mm 35±2mm
MMR Elevator_SI Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 3/38
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
③ Connection of safety shoe Safety shoe should be connected with car upper junction box and MIC connector. Safety shoe and close command are connected in serial, so when disconnection of safety shoe, opening is possible, but closing is impossible (See Figure 7). P48( 48V DC) SES Cl oseCLOSE지령 command Door PCB 도어PCB
Control panel
제어반
( Fi g.( 7) 그림7) Connect 세이프트 i on of saf 슈 et 결선 y shoe ※ When disconnection of safety shoe, door opening is possible, but closing not. (This means shoe and CLOSE command input are in serial.) 1.2 Door device control circuit (diagram) 1) Car door system ① Adjusting switches are composed of ones to adjust accelerate/decelerate speed during reverse and adjusting according to specification and the others(SW1~SW5) to adjust speed pattern. ② Volume(VR1) for adjusting position in PCB center is for low voltage level setting, which is factory-operated for delivery(Setting the volume to the middle right turning lowers low voltage level and left turning raises low voltage level). ③ Indication LED is composed of LED(LD2, LD3) to indicate open and close, normal indication LED(LD4) of door(PCB), abnormal indication LED(LD5) of IPM, CPU normal /abnormal indication LED(LD1) of control PCB, and LED(LD7) for DOLS & DLCS indication.
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
1. Outlook PJ1 CONN.
LED
CN1 CONN (ANN)
J6 CONN (SAV1 PHOTO) JN2 CONN.
JN1 CONN
ST CONN (PDA connection, DCD-230 ONLY)
PJ2
< Detail of LED >
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
2) DCD-230 PCB
PJ3 CONN.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 4/38
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 5/38
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
H/B
OLS/
SBD
TRIP
SAV
SAFEOK CLOSE OPEN
2. Connector
Connector comparison
Connector of DCD230 PJ1/PJ3 PJ2 JN1 JN2 PJ6 CN1 ST
Description Power, I/O
DCD-221
DCD-212
Remark
PJ1/PJ3
PJ1/PJ3
No.8,17 is power line in SAV1
PJ2 N/A N/A PJ6 N/A N/A
PJ2 JN1 JN2 N/A N/A N/A
SBD1 SAV1
DOOR MOTOR CLS/OLS SWITCH ROTARY ENCODER PHOTO SENSER SVC TOOL PDA
DCD-230 ONLY
Note: PJ1) When Door Type setting is SBD1 and in case cable is connected to PJ6, then system will work as SAV1 mode. Otherwise if it is not connec ted to PJ6, then Door system will work as SBD1 mode.
LED comparison LED
DCD-221
DCD-212
OPEN
LD2
LD2
CLOSE
LD3
LD3
OLS/CLS
LD7
LD5
SAFE-OK
LD4
LD4
WDT DC-OK OC TRIP SAV SBD H/B
LD1 LD6 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
LD6 LD7 LD1 N/A N/A N/A N/A
DCD-23X ON : OPEN command signal triggered OFF : OPEN command signal unable ON : CLOSE command signal triggered OFF : CLOSE command signal unable ON :OLS / CLS signal is detected OFF :OLS / CLS signal is not detected
ON : Normal working is possible OFF : An ERROR has occurred N/A LED9 ON: DC-LINK power input N/A ON : An ERROR has occurred ON : SAV1 DOOR TYPE ON : SBD1 DOOR TYPE Blinking: CPU work normally
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 6/38
3. Speed pattern Speed pattern according to each fluent data(Close) Close Direction Speed Profile(CL)
Speed(Hz) CL ACC Time
CL DEC Time S- CL4
CL Run Hz
S- Curve
S- CL1 S- CL2
CL End Hz
S- CL3
CL Start Hz CL Creep Hz Time CL ACC Time * (1+S/ 50)
Position Area
Zone Start Zone
Running Zone
OLS
CL Start Pos Start Zone
CL DEC Time * (1+S/ 50)
CL Creep Pos Running Zone
SES Pos CLS Creep Zone
Description & Adjustment 1. Close start zone 2. Running zone start from OLS, by [S02] Close Start frequency, till [S01] Close start zone. 1. Running zone of close acceleration and fixed speed 2. Running zone start from [S01] Close start zone till [S05]Close deceleration(Creep) start position.
SES Zone
Remark [S01] SBD1: Encoder pulse number
SAV1: Detector number
3. When want to increase or decrease Close start speed,
Creep Zone
SES Zone
increase or decrease [S02] Close Start frequency 0.1 unit. 4. When want to decrease Close speed, decrease [S03] Close running frequency 0.1 unit 1. Close deceleration running zone 2. Running zone from [S04]Close deceleration(Creep) start position till [S31]SES position 3. When running time of Close deceleration zone is too long, decrease [S04] Close deceleration (Creep) start position. 4. When Close, Door close with a big noise, increase [04] Close deceleration Creep) start position. 5. When from both sides Shoe Door can not fully Close and start Reopen, increase [S31] SES position. 1. Zone to keep Door Close 2. Running from [S31] SES to CLS and keep CLS status. 3. Frequency to keep [S06]Close must bigger than [F29]Start Hz .(Initial data:0.5Hz)
[S31] SES position: When door Close, the position that prevent door reopen
When frequency to keep [S06]Close lower than [F29]Start Hz, then can not keep Close.
MMR Elevator_SI Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 7/38
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Speed pattern according to each fluent data(Open) Open Direction Speed Profile(OP)
Speed(Hz) OP ACC Time
OP DEC Time S- OP4
OP Run Hz
S- Curve
S- OP1 S- OP2 OP Start Hz
S- OP3
OP Creep Hz OP End Hz Time OP ACC Time * (1+S/ 50)
Position Area
CLS
OP Start Pos Start Zone
OP DEC Time * (1+S/ 50)
OP Creep Pos Running Zone
Zone Start Zone
Description & Adjustment 1. Open start zone 2. Running zone start from CLS, by [S08] Open Start frequency, [S07]Open start zone
Running Zone
1. Running Zone of Close acceleration & fixed speed 2. Running Zone from [S07] Open start zone until [S10]Open deceleration(Creep) start position. 3. When want to increase or decrease Open start speed, then increase or decrease [S08] Open Start frequency. 4. When want to decrease Open speed, then decrease [S09] Open running frequency 0.1 unit. 1. Running zone of Open deceleration 2. Running zone from [S10] Open deceleration(Creep) start position till CLS 3. When running time of Open deceleration zone is too long, then decrease [S10] Open deceleration Creep) start position. 4. When Door Open with a big noise, then increase [S10] Open deceleration(Creep) start position. 1. Zone to keep Door Open 2. Frequency to keep [S12] Open must bigger than [F29]Start Hz .(Initial data:2.0Hz)
Creep Zone
OLS Creep Zone
Remark [S07] SBD1: Encoder pulse number SAV1: Detector number
When frequency to keep [S12] Open lower than [F29] Start Hz then can not keep Open.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 8/38
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
4. Adjustment method
Use method of SVC-TOOL ① Connect SVC-TOOL, affirm elevator kinds and whether have Error on initial menu. ② Affirm variable kinds and then input ‘A22E’ on [S00] Menu. ③ Press ‘0’, ‘8’, ‘BBB’ turn to wanted Address. ④ Affirm present data, while want to change, input ‘AAE’, and then input Data ‘01E’. ⑤ When want to input radix point, input ‘2A5E(2.5)’and ‘A’. ⑥ After changed variables, input ‘FFFF’ return to initial menu. ⑦ Input ‘BBB’, ‘39E’ (S39 MENU) ⑧ Input ‘AAE’, and then input ‘1E’ to save changed data.
< Changeable variables when it is SAV1 Side Open > Door
CMD
Moving
MENU
Description
SAV1 2S
A22E
0 / 8 / BBB
S36 S03 S04 S06 S09 S14 S26 S31
Door Type Close Run Hz Close Creep Pos Close End Hz Open Run Hz Close Dec Time Reopen Dec Time SES POS
Change data 0 11 13 0.5 15 0.8 0.1 14
Default 1 20 14 0.5 20 0.6 0.3 14
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 9/38
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
FAQ 1) Choose DOOR TYPE (SAV1, SBD1) When the data on S[36] system Type Menu is “1”
Connect ‘J6’ SAV1 POSITION LINE: Automatically set as SAV1 DOOR TYPE Not connect ‘J6’ SAV1 POSITION LINE: Automatically set as SBD1 DOOR TYPE As connect PHOTO LINE to ‘J6’, automatically identify. When the data on S[36] system Type Menu is “0” Whether or not connect POSITION LINE to ‘J6’ both identify as SAV1.
2) Differences among PCB DCD-230, DCD-231, DCD-232 DCD-230: DOOR PCB of SAV1,SBD1 have ST PORT (ST PORT: RS-232 PORT to connect PDA) DCD-231: DOOR PCB of SAV1,SBD1 not have ST PORT DCD-232: DOOR PCB of ADS (PROGRAM can not exchange with DCD230,231)
3) When DOOR CLOSE, there is noise. Increase S[04] CLOSE CREEP start position data. After change, input ‘AAE’ Æ1E’ on S[39] and save changed data.
4) When DOOR CLOSE, run too slowly. Increase S[03] CLOSE running frequency start position data. Decrease S[04] CLOSE CREEP start position data. After change, input ‘AAE’Æ 1E’ on S[39] and save changed data.
5) Delete all saved ERROR information Input ‘AAE’Æ 2E’ on S[39] then will delete saved ERROR information.
6) Affirm PROGRAM VERSION Press ‘D’KEY on MAIN menu. ‘POSITION DATA’Æ ‘VERSION’ Æ PROGRAM COMPILE display by date sequence
7) Check-up DOOR position monitor When DOOR is moving, read ‘POS’ DATA on MAIN menu. SAV1: Change from 0(OPENED) to 31(CLOSED). When DATA does not display, we can think round plate or PCB badness. SBD1: 0 (OPENED) ~ 1700(CLOSED: Maybe little different by DOOR SIZE , or by installation jobsite) ENCODER input data divided by 10 is CLOSED data.
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 10/38
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
ANN specification
DCD-230 ANN function KEY input table MAIN MODE
SUB MODE
Division MAIN MODE
Display status
Setting
Detect error
Display inverter running status
KEY input
SUB MODE
KEY input
A23E
Address INC
0
(A21E)
Address DEC
8
Address input
BBB
A22E
Address INC
0
(A31E)
Address DEC
8
Address input
BBB
Disable PROTECTION
AAE
Data input
xxE
Address INC
0
Address DEC
8
Address input
BBB
Door setting group
Group display error status
A41E
KEY input that disable mode FFFF
FFFF
FFFF
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Pr oj ect
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 11/38
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Fuct i on set t i ng mode of DCD- 23X annuci at or When i nst al l at i on or mai nt enance, use annunci at or t o af f i r m DOOR' s r unni ng st at us.
Cont ent
00000 = LCD i ni t i al i zat i on * * Pr epar at i on * * 1. Connect SVC- TOOL t o DCD- 23X( CN1 connect or ) .
Di spl ay i ni t i al menu * * Af f i r m Menu * * 1. Di spl ay DOOR ki nds by PCB wor k " SBD" : Wor k as SBD1 DOOR MODE " SAV" : Wor k as SAV1 DOOR MODE " SAVs" : Wor k as SAV1 Si de Open DOOR MODE 2. " ocnh" : ' O' / ' o' ' C' / ' c' ' N' / ' n' ' H' / ' h' 3. " oce" ' O' / ' ' C' / ' ' E' / '
: o' c' e'
Af f i r m DOOR i nput command( Bi g l et t er : have command) : OPEN : CLOSE : NUDGE : HCL Af f i r m DOOR PCB out put ( Bi g l et t er : out put Act i ve) : OLS : CLS : DOOR ERROR
4. " V: 11V" Out put vol t age f r om i nver t er t o MOTOR( Ex. : 11V) 5. " I : 0. 0A" Out put vol t age f r om i nver t er t o MOTOR( Ex. : 0. 0A) 6. " F: 0. 0Hz" Fr equency of out put vol t age, cur r ent f r om i nver t er t o MOTOR( Ex. : 0. 0Hz)
S V F P
B D o c n h : 1 1 V : 0 . 0 H z O S : 0
o c e [ 0 0 ] I : 0 . 0 A K :
MMR Elevator_SI Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Pr oj ect
Funct i on set t i ng mode of DCD- 230 annunci at or When i nst al l at i on or mai nt enance, use annunci at or af f i r m DOOR' s r unni ng st at us.
Cont ent
A23E = Di spl ay i nver t er r unni ng st at us( Menu D) , A41E = Di spl ay er r or st at us( Menu T) * * Af f i r m Menu * * 1. I nput A23E on i ni t i al menu S V F P
B : : O
D
S
0 :
o 1 .
c 1 0
n V H 0
h
o I
c :
e
[ 0
0 .
0 0
K
:
A
2
3
E
] A
z
2. Di spl ay i nver t er st at us( Menu D[ 01] , whi l e i nput A41E t hen wi l l be menu' T[ 01] ' . ) LCD menu st at us S D D
B [ A
D 0 T
1 A
o ] :
c O
n u
h t
o V
c
K
:
e D I
[ i I
0 s
0 p V 9
]
Di spl ay DATA i s deci mal i zat i on. 3. ADDRESS I NCREMENT I nput an ADDRESS, whi l e want t o READ 4. ADDRESS DECREMENT I nput an ADDRESS, whi l e want t o READ 5. ADDRESS i nput conver si on When READ DATA, want t o READ anot her LCD menu st at us S B D o c n h D [ 0 1 ] O u t D A T A :
DATA on pr evi ous ADDRESS t hen i nput ' 0' . DATA on next ADDRESS t hen i nput ' 8' . ADDRESS t hen i nput ' BBB' . o V
c
K
:
e D I B
[ i I B
0 s
0 p V
]
B
6. Whi l e want t o di sabl e MODE t hen i nput FFFF. 7. A41E ( Di spl ay er r or st at us) MENU oper at i on met hod same as A23E.
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 12/38
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 13/38
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
SPEC LIST (Ver S1.3) Initial data Group
No
Description
minim maximu unit m
SB SAV um D Group display inverter work status (A23E or A21E) D 01 Output voltage 1
-
Remark
V
Display inverter output voltage by 1V unit A Display inverter output current by 0.1A unit Hz Display inverter output frequency by 0.1Hz unit - Software version - Version date 05/09/28 (September 28, 2005) 0 0 0 0 0 0 Close Open Nudge HCL CLS OLS If it is ON will display 1
D
02 Output current
-
-
0.01
-
D
03 Output frequency
-
-
0.1
-
D D
04 S/W Version 05 S/W Version(Date)
-
-
0 -
-
D
06 Input Port status
-
-
-
-
D
07 Output Port status
-
-
-
-
-
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CLS OLS MON SES-CUT DERR1 DERR2 EERR3 If it is ON will display 1
D
08 Door running status
-
-
0
7
-
0:Close, 1:Open acceleration, 2:Open by fixed speed 3:Open deceleration, 4:Open, 5:Close acceleration 6:Close by fixed speed, 7:Close deceleration
D
09 Door position
-
-
0
100%
%
D D D D D
10 11 12 13 14
-
-
0 0 0.1 0.1 0.1
-
sec sec Hz
D D
15 16
-
-
1 -
-
V -
1means 100sec. 1means 100sec. Open time Close time Frequency command before accelerate or decelerate Display voltage of DC Link Encoder pulse input data x 10000
D D
17 18
-
-
0
31
-
Encoder pulse input data 0: OPEN, 31: CLOSE
D
19
0
0
0
10000
-
X10000 times
D D
20 21
0 0
0 0
0 0
9999 10000
-
0~9999 times x10000 times
D D
22 23
0 0
0 0
0 0
9999 2
-
0~9999 times 0: Normal running, 1: OP detecting running 2: Test mode running
D
24 Open Lock detection 0 times
0
0
65535
-
0~65535 times After recognize Open command, during Open Lock of F40 waiting time, and when doesn’t reach OLS, then add 1 unit
Main Loop Time 1msec Loop Time Open Time Close Time Frequency command DC Link voltage Encoder data (ten thousand) Encoder data Photo sensor input data Door running times (Ten thousand) Door running times Door reopen times (Ten thousand) Door reopen times Door running mode
0: Fully Open,
100%: Fully Close
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller Initial data
Group
No
Description
minim maximu unit m
SB SAV um D Group display inverter work status (A23E or A21E)
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 14/38
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Remark
When reach CLS check again D
25 Close Lock detect times
0
0
0
65535
-
D
26 Result of Rom Check 27 Result of Ram Check
0
0
0
1
-
0
0
0
1
-
D
group
No
Initial data
Description
SBD SAV
mini maximu unit mum m
Group display error status (A41E) T 01 Error Info 0
-
-
-
-
-
Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error
-
-
-
-
-
T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Info 1 Info 2 Info 3 Info 4 Info 5 Info 6 Info 7 Info 8 Info 9 Info 10 Info 11 Info 12 Info 13 Info 14 Info 15 Info 16 Info 17 Info 18 Info 19 count
0~65535 times After recognize Close command, during Close Lock of F41 waiting time, and doesn’t reach CLS then add 1 unit When reach OLS check again 0 : Normal 1 : Error (Only represent on ADS) 0 : Normal 1 : Error (Only represent on ADS)
Remark
Current Error: Error occur time/Error Code Bypass Error: Error occur time/Error Code
After initialization error occurred total times (Automatically saved)
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Group
No
Description
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller Initial data
SBD SAV Door setting group (A22E or A31E) S 01 Close start zone
S S S
02 Close start frequency 03 Close running frequency 04 Close Creep start position
mini maximu unit mum m
0
3
0
3000
5.0
5.0
0.0
Max Freq Max Freq 30000
20.0 20.0 0.0 600
14
0
05 Close Creep frequency 06 Keep Close frequency
2.5
2.0
0.0
5.0
0.5
0.0
S
07 Open start zone
100
3
0
3000
S
08 Open start frequency 09 Open running frequency 10 Open Creep start position
5.0
5.0
0.0
Max Freq Max Freq 30000
S S
S S
S S
S S S
27.0 20.0 0.0 50
14
0
11 Open Creep frequency 12 Frequency to keep Open
2.0
2.0
0.0
2.0
2.0
0.0
13 Close acceleration time 14 Close deceleration time 15 Open acceleration time
0.5
0.7
0.6 0.5
Max Freq Max Freq
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 15/38
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Remark
When Close start, initial frequency apply zone Ex.1) SBD 100: Before the number of encoder input pulse reach 100, run by initial frequency Ex.2) SAV 3: Before photo-sensor signal data reach 3 run by initial frequency Hz Output frequency during Close start zone Hz Normal running frequency after Close start zone - During normal Close running, position of start deceleration by Creep speed Ex.)SBD 500: From the position when Maximum of encoder input data is 500, it start decelerate * Max data is detected during the initial door width measurement Hz After Close deceleration, running frequency until CLS position Hz After CLS detection 1.0sec,frequency to keep Close running Ex.) SBD 5.0 : After CLS detection 1.0sec, run by 5.0Hz When Open start, initial frequency apply zone Ex.1) SBD 100: Before the number of encoder input pulse reach 100, run by initial frequency Ex.2) SAV 3: Before photo-sensor signal data reach (31-3), run by initial frequency Hz Output frequency during Open start zone Hz Normal running frequency after Open start zone -
Max Freq Max Freq
Hz
0.1
30.0
sec
0.6
0.1
30.0
sec
0.7
0.1
30.0
sec
Hz
During normal Open running，the position that start deceleration by Creep speed Ex.) SBD 500 : From the position when encoder input data is 500, start decelerate After Open deceleration, running frequency until OSL position After OLS detection 1.0sec, running frequency to keep Open Ex.) SBD 5.0: After OLS detection 1.0sec, run by 5.0Hz When Close running, accelerate time during accelerate zone When Close running, decelerate time during decelerate zone When Open running, accelerate time during accelerate zone
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Group
No
Description
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller Initial data
SBD SAV Door setting group (A22E or A31E) S 16 Open deceleration time S 17 S-CL1
1.0
0.1
30.0
35.0 35.0 0.0
50.0
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 16/38
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Remark
S
18 S-CL2
30.0 35.0 0.0
50.0
S
19 S-CL3
30.0 40.0 0.0
50.0
S
20 S-CL4
50.0 50.0 0.0
50.0
S
21 S-OP1
35.0 35.0 0.0
50.0
S
22 S-OP2
30.0 35.0 0.0
50.0
S
23 S-OP3
30.0 40.0 0.0
50.0
S
24 S-OP4
50.0 50.0 0.0
50.0
S
1.0
1.0
0.1
30.0
0.3
0.3
0.1
30.0
sec When Reopen, deceleration time
S
25 Reopen acceleration time 26 Reopen deceleration time 27 OLS voltage 1
sec When Open running, decelerate time during decelerate zone % Jerk of acceleration in initial zone when Close running acceleration % When Close running acceleration, Jerk at the end of acceleration % Jerk of deceleration in initial zone when Close running deceleration % When Close running deceleration, Jerk at the end of deceleration % Jerk of acceleration in initial zone when Open running acceleration % When Open running acceleration, Jerk at the end of acceleration % Jerk of deceleration in initial zone when Open running deceleration % When Open running deceleration, Jerk at the end of deceleration sec When Reopen, acceleration time
10.0 10.0 0.0
50.0
S
28 OLS voltage 2
15.0 25.0 0.0
50.0
S
29 CLS voltage 1
10.0 10.0 0.0
50.0
S
30 CLS voltage 2
15.0 25.0 0.0
50.0
S
31 SES position
250
14
0
10000
S S
32 Supplemental Menu 33 OP measure mode
0
Use x
0
1
-
S
34 Door running mod e
0
0
0
99
-
S
0.6
mini maximu unit mum m
Rev. No.
% Adjustment data of output voltage under OLS status % Adjustment data of output voltage under OLS status and when encoder input turn to Close side % Adjustment data of output voltage under CLS status % Adjustment data of output voltage under CLS status and when encoder input turn to Open side - Position setting that disable SES Ex.) SBD 200: From CLS position until encoder pulse reach 200, start output SES-Cut command Ex.2) SAV 14: Photo-sensor input from position 14, start output SES-Cut command 0: When Power On, measure OP After OP measurement, automatically set as 1 1: Status that finish OP measurement When Power On, and is not CLS/OLS，begin low speed run When Power On, and is CLS/OLS, begin normal run 0: Normal run 99: Test run mode If recognize Close or Open command then disable test running mode
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Group
No
Description
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller Initial data
SBD SAV Door setting group (A22E or A31E) S 35 Automatically run mode
mini maximu unit mum m
0
0
0
9999
-
-
S
36 System Type
1
0
0
1
S
37
1
1
0
Xx
S S
38 Door width setting frequency 39 Init Mode
6.5 Use 0.0 X 0 0 0
Max Freq 2
S S
40 F Modify 41 SAV side OP
0 0.0
0 1.0
New No
Initial data SBD SAV
Mnini mum
0.0
0.0
group
Description
0 0.0
0 0.0
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 17/38
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Remark
9999: Test running mode If recognize Close or Open command then automatically set as 0 and disable auto running mode 0 : SAV 1 : SBD(When Photo Sensor detect, SAV) 2 : ADS (ADS door set initial data by Type)
Hz Running frequency of detecting SBD door width
Maximu Unit m
0: No change. 1 : Parameter saved 2 : Error initialization 3 : Running times & Lock initialization 99 : Parameter initialization F Menu Access Code input SAV Side Open setting: 1 (It will be informed later)
Remark
Encoder setting group (A32E) F
37
SAV side OP
0.0
1.0
SAV Side Open setting: 1 (It will be informed later.)
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 18/38
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Error catalog Code
Error name Arm Short
When it is detected, then act After Err.Info saved, stop
3 4
OV Trip
After Err.Info saved, stop After Err.Info saved, stop
5
ETH
After Err.Info saved, stop
8 9
MTH Position signal abnormal
After Err.Info saved, stop After Err.Info saved, stop
21 22 23 24
OC U OC V OC W Output Unbalance
Err.Info Err.Info Err.Info Err.Info
save save save save
25 26 27 28
Ia Offset Ib Offset Ic Offset Over Load
Err.Info Err.Info Err.Info Err.Info
save save save save
1
29 Over Speed
Err.Info save
30 Velocity Tracking Error
Err.Info save
31 CDS On Error
Err.Info save
32 CDS Off Error
Err.Info save
33 OLS On Error
Err.Info save
Detect condition Arm Short LVLVLV of IPM Gate power DC Link voltage > 200V Keep DC Link voltage < 90V 500msec 2A, continuous action is possible When 50%(3A), and continuously act 60sec then thermal starter trigger Detect when Motor Thermal is triggered Inverter Run speed feedback = 0 0.7A OC level V phase output current > OC level W phase output current > OC level Inverter Run Output frequency > OPW detect frequency When keep Ia + Ib + Ic > 0.5A over 100msec Offset of la > 10% of rating Offset of lb > 10% of rating Offset of lc > 10% of rating When keep output current > 2A over 5sec Neither OLS nor CLS When keep output frequency > 10Hz feedback speed > 110% of output frequency over 1sec Neither OLS nor CLS When keep output frequency > OPW detect frequency output frequency – feedback speed > 5Hz output current > 0.7A over 1sec After OPW detect is over, and in normal work mode Door position > 95% Close command When motor stop and CDS input is Off. Reset OLS to detect error mode After OPW detect is over, and in normal work mode Door position < 50% Open command and CDS input is On. ; reset CLS to detect error mode After OPW detect is over, and in normal work mode Door position < 5% Open command and motor stop When OLS input is Off. ; reset CLS to detect error mode
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Code
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Error name 34 OLS Off Error
When it is detected, then act Err.Info save
35 OPW CDS Error
Err.Info save
36 OPW OLS Error
Err.Info save
38 Encoder is converse
After Err.Info is saved then stop
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 19/38
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Detect condition After OPW detect is over, and in normal work mode Door position > 50% Close command and not CLS mode When OLS input is on ; reset CLS to detect error mode Close command Output current > 0.7A Output frequency > 1.5Hz When keep motor still over 1sec When keep above condition and encoder no feedback over 1sec then handle encoder err or Open command Output current > 0.7A Output frequency > 1.5Hz When keep motor still over 1sec When keep above condition and encoder no feedback over 1sec then handle encoder error When input over 100 pulses converse with Open, Close command pulse
3) Check points before power ON (DR cable: Refer to System page 9) ① Verify cable to terminal block of PJ1, PJ2 PCB does not interfere with circle plate. ② Verify earth line of door motor is fixed to PCB box cover. ④ While turning door manually before power ON, verify manually open/close door is 10~30Kgf.
force of
MMR Elevator_SI Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 20/38
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
4) Checks for voltage of connector ① Check the voltage of connector with car upper junction box's DMC switch ON. ② With connector plug not inserted to door PCB, if door switch of safety switch of car upper junction box becomes ON, voltage output must be as Tab.5. Tab.5) Pin output voltage when power ON Connector Pin No.
PJ1
Signal
Check point
Volt.
4
DMC
No.4 ~ 14(GND)
DC 48V
6
EARTH
No.6(F.G Earth)~14(GND Earth)
0V
8
SS100V No.8~9. Pin No.8~17
See ♠
9
TS100V No.9~8. Pin No.9~17
See ♠
12
DERR
No.12~14(GND)
0V
13
DOLS
No.13~14(GND)
0V
14
GND
17
0V
RS100V No.17~8. Pin No.17~9
See ♠
♠ : For SAV1 Type, AC 100V. For MAV1, DAV1 Type, AC 110V ※ If difference of pin voltage between No.8↔ 9, 8↔ 17, 9↔ 17 is AC 100V±20V (low voltage) or more, door PCB might not operate properly. So, check the connection between control panel and car upper junction box, and verify if power is supplied to control panel. 1.3 Test driving of door machine 1) Check car door(gate) switch and stopper ① Verify stopper if it has light contacts during opening and closing of door's opening and closing. ② Car door switch should operate with distance shown in Tab.6. Check car door switch operation with tester while slowly closing the door with power OFF.(See Fig.6, Tab.11) Tab.6) Operating position of car door(gate) switch
Segment
Operating position
Gate switch
Within 9mm before closed
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 21/38
③ After DMC switch OFF and connector is inserted, check door driving with DMC switch ON. D. M. C swi t ch ON YES
DOOR cl osed R2LD RY "ON"
NO
-. Check DMC S/ W i n DOC PCB -. Check LDS S/ W -. Check CDS S/ W
④ Door operation according to low speed mode switch operation
a) MAINT(low mode) : door always opens(on-car and in-car are the same). b) In-car: For door driving, close button must be ON. c) On-car: CLOSE button must be ON. 48V DOLS output DOLS출력 0V 48V Gate switch 게이트 output 스위치 출력 0V
Full ( 전개) opened
Full ( 전폐) closed Gate switch 게이트 스 위치 동작 operation
DOLS DOLS동작 movement ( 그림11) 동작과 출력 (Fig.11)스위치 SW OPR & output
2) Check points for door driving ① Check contact resistance of safety shoe switch contact at shoe line end(10Ω or less). ② Check the adjusted state of position detector. ③ Check the operation of door according to on-car operation switch. ※ SAV1: If RESET switch pressed, LD2 flickers for several seconds. MAV1: If RESET switch pressed, LD3 flickers for several seconds. DAV1: If RESET switch pressed, LD2 & LD3 flicker at the same time for several sec. 1.4 Adjusting PATTERN
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 22/38
1) Functions and setting method of DIP SW ① As shown in Fig.13, speed pattern of door is made by adding increments △ P1, △ P2 to initial value P0 of mode 0(or 31 CLOSE starting, mode 0, and OPEN starting, mode 31). Multiplying value restored in ROM on PCB makes these increments by weighted
value given by DIP switch. Weighted value is determined by the state of
DIP switch, which is conversed into Hex in PCB. The more switches (2 of Fig.10) become ON, the more values conversed become large(See Tab.7). So, in order to increase door speed
of block wanted to increase, the number of switches to be ON of
DIP switches must be increased. Setting DIP SW by operation block is as Tab.8,9.
ÁÖÆļö Frequency Áö·É order
2
P4
ON
P4 P3 P3 P2 P2 P1 P1
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
P0
1
0
( 그림12)Setting DI P method 스위치 of설정요령 (Fig.12) DIP SW
1
2
3
4
MODE
( 그림13)Creation 패턴의 생성 (Fig.13) of pattern
Tab.7) Conversed value by DIP SW setting ON Switch
Conversed number
ON Switch
Conversed number
Without
0/0
4
8/8
1
1/1
1,4
9/9
2
2/2
2,4
10/A
1,2
3/3
1,2,4
11/B
3
4/4
3,4
12/C
1,3
5/5
1,3,4
13/D
2,3
6/6
2,3,4
14/E
1,2,3
7/7
1,2,3,4
15/F
Caution: After change of DIP switch, definitely press RESET SW(SW6) for 1 sec or
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 23/38
more.(See outside view of DCD-20X PCB). When adjusting switch door speed changes determined by above conversion table. Thus, the door speed of SW 4 ON is faster than when SW(SPEC.) 1,2,3 is ON. Tab.8) DIP switch that adjusts during open
½ÃÀÛ Start
OP-ACC1(1)
³¡ OP-DEC(3) End
OP-ACC2(2)
Speed OPEN½Ã pattern when o pening ¼ÓµµÆÐÅÏ
DIP switch
Meaning
OP-OLT(4) OPDOLS
Remarks
1-4 OP-ACC1 Adjusting grip speed 2
5-8 OP-ACC2 Adjusting acceleration & maximum speed
As number of convert increase, speed increases.(See note)
1-4 OP-DEC Adjusting deceleration 3
5-8 OP-OLT Adjusting limit point
Door moves more in proportion to conversed number.
(Note) Grip: Operation of car & hall door are connected by clutch.
Tab.9) DIP switch that adjusts during close
CL-FRC(4)
Start
½ÃÀÛ
CL-ACC(1)
CL-DEC(2)
CL-TERM(3) SpeedCLOSE½Ã pattern when¼ÓµµÆÐÅÏ closing DIP switch
Meaning
Remarks
CL-ACC Acceleration & maximum The more conversed number is
³¡ End
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 24/38
Tab.10) DIP SW that adjusts during reverse
Reverse operation command
RST DIP switch RST 1 RAC
RAC
Meaning
Remarks
Adjusting speed on reverse
As number of convert increase,
stop
speed increases.
Adjusting acceleration
(Fast stop and fast acceleration)
after reverse stop
2) Open/Close time(on the basis of factory setting) SAVI
5 4
2S
3 2 Time
1
CO
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 25/38
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
1.5 LED & ERROR ※ This explains LED attached to door PCB and method to treat abnormal operations that can be generated after door installation. ① Meaning of indication and operation state of each LED Explanation of LED attached to door PCB(See Tab.11) With the exception of these, when abnormalities occur, door PCB decides type of abnormality and indicates failure with LED that indicates OPEN command output(LD2) and CLOSE command output(LD3) in normal conditions (See Tab.12). Tab.11) LED operation state indication when abnormal operation occur
LED No.
Meaning
OPR state when failure
LD1
Abnormality of CPU operation of PCB
Flickered on abnormality
LD2
Means OPEN command of door PCB is outputted
OPEN command inputted
by OPEN command(R2OP) of control panel
from control panel when lightening
LD3
Means CLOSE command of door PCB is
CLOSE command inputted
outputted by CLOSE command(R2CL) of control
from control panel when
panel
lightening
LD4
Indicates abnormality of safety of PCB
Light OFF on abnormal
LD5
Indicates whether error occurred in IPM
Light ON on IPM abnormal
LD6
Indicates whether DC voltage is charged
Indicates if power is
or not
supplied to door PCB
LD7
Indicates DOLS and DCLS on circle plate
Tab.12) LED state during failure Ind. type
Failure type
LD2 flic. Command failure(OPEN/CLOSE simultaneous command) LD3 flic. Over speed of door, Position detector disconnected
Remarks
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 26/38
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
1.6 Check points during door abnormal operation 1) When serious noise during door operation ① If serious noise occurs during operation, first check adjusted state of position. detecting plate.(Factory setting. in full close, check position switch hole and
circle
plate hole are coincide) ② Check the operation of DOLS in full opening and the operation of gate switch when full closing. ③ When above item ② is O.K, check 1-phase from 3-phases for lost. ④ Check door input voltage(connector PJ1-8, 9, 17). SAV1: If 108V or less, lost. MAV1: If 118V or less, lost. 2) When IPM error(LD5 lights ON) ① Firstly decide error or no of control power supplied to IPM. As Fig.16, inspect power voltage(See Tab.11, Fig.16). ② If there is no power voltage error, switch ON again and perform open/close operation. If IPM error occurs again, replace PCB. 3) Only OPEN operation or only CLOSE operation is possible ① After inserting connector, verify if OPEN command(PJ1-10) or CLOSE command(PJ1-1) is inputted from CTRL panel. ※ Verify if pin voltage changes from 48V to near to 0V(See Fig.11). If OPEN or CLOSE command is properly inputted from CTRL panel, for opening, LD2 and for closing, LD3 must light ON. ② If there are no change of voltage, line from CTRL panel could have failure. If voltage changes, for opening, LD2 and for closing, LD3 must light ON according to command of CTRL panel. Otherwise, it means input circuit error in PCB.
Replace PCB.
Tab.13) Output voltage of IPM control power
Name of control power
Measuring position of Fig.16
Output voltage
PU+
①
DC 15V
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 27/38
③ Check connection of power section a) Input power check FUSE
R
PJ1-8
S
PJ1-9
T
제어반 panel Control
48V
카위접속상자 Safety switch of 스위치 car안전 upper junction box PJ1-17
PJ1-4
인버터 Inverter door도어 circuit기판 board
b) IPM volt. check 4
PC2
+
PC1
+
-
1
PC3
-
2 +
-
PC5
3 +
-
PJ2
IPM Á¶¸³ as s embling
( 그림16) I PM 의 power 전원 voltage 전압 체크 (Fig.16) Checking of IPM
4) When LD1 does not light ON ① Press SW6. Still does not operate, replace PCB. 5) When door does not close fully and reverses ① Check operation of safety shoe. Verify if safety shoe operates before door close completely. Observe changing position of safety shoe voltage connection inside car upper junction box, while closing(manually press UP/DOWN in ON CAR state of
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 28/38
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
on-car connection box). 6) Loud joint sound during closing or bounce after full open ① First verify DIP switch is fit to exit width(EW). If not fitted, reset it (See Tab.14). ② When correct specification setting, adjust the deceleration of opening/closing. Tab.14) Specification setting of DIP switch(SAV1) DIP switch
EW (unit : mm)
DIP switch setting SPEC
RST
※ This is standard of
RAC
ON
700 ~ 750 1
2
3
4
1
SPEC
2
3
RST
CENTER OPEN, and
4
for SIDE OPEN,
RAC
ON
switch ON switch 4 of
800 ~ 850 1
2
3
4
1
SPEC
2
3
RST
SPEC DIP SW, and
4
RAC
t
ON
SW1
900 ~ 950 1
2
3
4
1
SPEC
2
3
RST
4
RAC
ON
1000 ~ 1050 1
2
3
4
1
SPEC
2
RST
3
4
RAC
ON
1100 1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Tab.15) Specification setting of DIP switch(MAV1, DAV1) DIP switch
EW (unit : mm)
DIP switch setting SPEC
RST
RAC
ON
700 ~ 750 1
2
3
4
SPEC
1
2
RST
3
4
RAC
ON
800 ~ 850 1
2
3
4
SPEC
SW1
1
2
RST
3
4
RAC
ON
900 ~ 950 1
2
3
4
SPEC
1
2
RST
3
4
RAC
ON
1000 ~ 1050 1
2
3
4
SPEC
1
2
RST
3
4
RAC
ON
1100 ~ 1150 1
2 SPEC
3
4
1 RST
2
3 RAC
4
T b 14
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 29/38
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
※ This is standard of CENTER OPEN, and for SIDE OPEN, switch ON switch 4 of SPEC DIP SW, and set as Tab.15. ③ After setting change for DIP switch press reset SW(SW6) hard for 1 sec. or more.
7) Cautions for replacing PCB Even with door power OFF before replacing PCB, there still are remained voltage in chemical condenser of PCB. Be careful of electric shock & damage to PCB (Check LD6 light).
2. HAV Door system and Eletric adjustment 2.1
Motor control characteristics
1) Motor control type : Closed loop control of vector control method with current sensor and rotary encoder which makes possible for rapid response with sensitive and reliable speed control. 2) Door Position Detection : Using rotary encoder, door position is checked per detections, nearing switches are used with higher resistance against dirt and humidity.0.5[mm], and sensitive position control is possible. For absolute CLS/OLS position 3) Door Speed Control : With link mechanism installed within the memory, real time speed control
is possible. Link Mechanism
Door
speed Motor speed command
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 30/38
※ Door drive modes Low Speed : Mode to detect absolute positions at initial power input. After CLS/OLS switches are found once for each, transforms into High Speed Mode. ( After
power failure, same procedures are followed : Speed of approx. 50mm/sec )
High Speed : Door operations at normal speed.
※ Note : For following situations, transform to low speed mode. When there is a large difference between position detected by CLS/OLS switch and position DLD
calculated by R/E. e.g.) When metal is placed at nearing switch during operation.
e.g.) When closing is hindered by force.
Handicapped & Nudging Mode : Closing speed is reduced by half during closingfor Handicapped
Mode and during opening and closing for Nudging Mode.
PCB Network and Connector Description There are 2 PCBs for HAV Doors.
DCD-30M is the main PCB, and DCD-30F contains
EMI filter and motor output filter.
2.2
PCB function DCD-30M PCB JN1
SPEC S/W ( 6 EA)
Power Circuit
LED (4 EA)
JN4
Instrument Box
Processor PJ3 JN2
Heat detection
PJ1 (17P) PJ4 (13P)
SSR
Currnt Sensor
IPM
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Connector JN1 JN2 JN4 PJ1,3 PJ2 PJ4
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 31/38
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Contents Power from Instrument box to DCD-30M (24V, 12V) Connection between Rotary Encoder and DCD-30M PCB Connection between CLS/OLS sensor switch and DCD-30M PCB Connection between DCD-30M PCB and Instrument box(Signal wires to CP) Output from DCD-30F PCB to Motor Connection between DCD-30M PCB and DCD-30F PCB
※ Note : JH1 and JN3 are not used. (Factory reference only)
Procedure for control part installation and test run Turn off DMC CUT switches on Instrument box. Connect and verify JN1,JN2,JN4,PJ2 connectors. ※ Caution : Remove PJ1, PJ3,
in order to cut driving command.
2.3 Trial run of door operator 1) Verify connection (poles) between electro-condensor and TCB. 2) Check OP(Entrance Width) related SPEC on DIP switch. 3) Turn on all DMC CUT switches on Instrument box. 4) Verify LED is normal. (For abnormality,
check 26 page)
5) Manually open doors to check proper mechanism installations.
If required, adjust
CLS/OLS switch positions, and verify operation through LED on DCD-30M PCB. 6) Turn off all DMC CUT switches on Instrument box. 7) Connect and verify PJ1, PJ3 connectors (Drive Commands and various signals) between Instrument box and CDC-30M PCB.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 32/38
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
8) Turn on all DMC CUT switches on Instrument box. 9) If required, adjust speed pattern while examing door operation. ※ Caution : IPM of DCD-30M including lower left part, DCD-30F PCB, Heater and electrocondensor are carrying high voltage. 2.4 DIP Switch setting for door SPEC There are two major DIP switches on PCB for HAV doors. (1 Type), and another
One is for EW assignment
is for speed pattern adjustment (10 Types).
- DIP switch operation procedures - Turn off power switch for door in Instrument box (DMC CUT1, DMC CUT2, DMC CUT3). - Depending on specifications configure DIP switches. - Turn on power switches for door. ※ Note : With power on, DIP switch configuration does not effect SPEC. (Make sure to turn power off and then on) ※ DIP Switch setting method
In case of 2 dip switches(type1) Setting Variables
In
Setting
Variables
0
2
1
3
case of 4 dip switches(type 2) Setting Variables 0
Setting
Variables 1
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
SPEC name
SPEC
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 33/38
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
※ Dip switch setting
Rev. No.
for entrance width (S1 switch pin1~4)
Varibale value
Meaning
0
EW 800 ± 25mm
1
EW 850 ± 25mm
2
EW 900 ± 25mm
3
EW 950 ± 25mm
4
EW 1000 ± 25mm
5
EW 1050 ± 25mm
6
EW 1100 ± 25mm
7
EW 1150 ± 25mm
8
EW 1200 ± 25mm
9
EW 1250 ± 25mm
10
EW 1300 ± 25mm
11
EW 1350 ± 25mm
12
EW 1400 ± 25mm Non Use Non Use Non Use
13 14 15
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI Field Industrial Engineering
Page Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD
0 DL EL) 06-008 34/38
※ Note : Above configurations will be set from the factory, but it must be verified before power is supplied. ※ Caution : With improper setting, door operation speed may become too fast or slow. ※ Dip switch adjustment for speed pattern HAV door uses actual speed and position detected by ROTARY ENCODER to control speed (CLOSED LOOP SPEED CONTROL), and speed pattern is optimally set at the factory. Thus, speed pattern adjustment is almost not required. Only for required cases, speed pattern should be adjusted according to below. Speed Pattern Adjustment DIP Switch Operation
OP-ACC2
OP-DEC
RAC
OP-OLT
OPEN OP-ACC1
CLOSE
CL-TERM RST
CL-ACC CL-DEC CL-SPD
Speed patern and concept. 2.5 Function of dip switches. Dip SW SPEC Contents RST Stop Deceleration (SLIP) S1 RAC REOPEN Acceleration OP-ACC1 Advance Acceleration S2 OP-ACC2 Opening Acceleration OP-DEC Opening Acceleration S3 OP-OLT Opening Deceleration Completion CL-ACC Closing Deceleration S4 CL-DEC Closing Deceleration CL-TERM Closing Deceleration S5 Completion CL-FRC Unused
Type 1 1 2 2 2 2
Pin 5,6 7,8 1~4 5~8 1~4 5~8
As it increases Faster deceleration Faster acceleration Speeds Up Faster acceleration Faster deceleration Closer to opening
2 2 2
1~4 5~8 1~4
Faster acceleration Faster deceleration Closer to closing
5~7
MMR Elevator_SI Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Right Open
Dip SW
S6
SPEC
Side open (Right open type)
Contents UP, Door SPEC, CO/SO
SPEC2 CL-SPD
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 35/38
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
8
Type 2 2
Closing Peak speed
Rev. No.
Pin 1~4 5~8
As it increases Refer to below Speed up
※ SPEC2 detail of S6
Dip Switch
SPEC name
Detail Door M/C base position
S6
SPEC2 Door Spec CO/SO
Variable 0 1 2 3 0 1 0 1
Description Standard
+200mm up +300mm up +400mm up Ordinary door Fire door Center open Side open
♣ Standard : 800mm from bottom of M/C base to top of entrance height.
2.6 Each SPEC adjustment method SPEC Name Adjustment method RST If noise occurs when it stops before reopen, lower the values Reopen RAC Set Maximum if no other problems OP-ACC1 Set Maximum if no other problems. If noise occurs, lower the values. OP-ACC2 Set Maximum if no other problems. OP-DEC Set Maximum if no other problems. OP-OLT Raise the values if speed operates like a 2-speed mode. Lower the values if interference to collide or vibration occurs. CL-ACC Set Maximum if no other problems. CL-DEC Set Maximum if no other problems. CL-TERM Raise the values as long as interference with the landing door to collide like effect is not apparent. CL-SPD Do not change factory setting value (complying with BS Code). Raise value to increase speed when user requests it. 2.7 LED function LED LED Name No. LD1 ALM
LD2 LD3
CL/OL CPU
Meaning Turns on when following door errors occur: IPM Error (Over-current, Over-heated) CLS/OLS Error Motor over-heated Acting CLS, OLS switches if detected by the sensor Flickers during normal processor operation Flickers rapidly when Open/Close command occurs
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
LD4
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
UT
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 36/38
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Turns on due to Low Temp.( below 0 ℃ ) Error
※ Corrective method for LED error 1) When power input, LD1 turned on Turn on and off the power.(Use DMC CUT switch on
the Instrument box)
Check PJ2 connection If problem persists, IPM in PCB may be in fault 2) LD1 turns on during low speed operation Verify wiring and operation of CLS/OLS
switch.
3) If LD3 does not flicker rapidly with Open/Close command. Check PJ1 connection. 4) LD4 turned on. If actual surrounding temperature is low(below 0℃ ), close control panel cover,and check heater operation with power on. (By touching control box exterior.) After 10 ~ 20 minutes, returns to normal operation as interior temperature increases. If actual surrounding temperature is not low and LD4 remains on, temperature sensor in PCB is in fault.
★ Note1 : After installation with low machine room temperature, door error
may occur at
initial power input, but, after 10-20 minutes, error will be cleaned. ★ Note2: If door speed is not normal even though dip-switch adjustment, Check the CLS and OLS signal or in cage of rear door, replace the rotary encoder phase. ★ Note3 : If photo sensor does not work, check that the used contact is normally close or open. Most of case, photosensor contact is normal close from factory. So it needs to modify its contact to normal open in jobsite. ★ Note4 : Jumper the safety shoe(Left,Right) with P48V in DCD-30M. And connect the safety shoe signal line to communication board on car top. And it needs to set I/O for this signal. If there line was not jumpered, car door will not close.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
2.8 Car door electrical circuit diagram
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 37/38
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Test & Commissioning for SI210 Controller
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 38/38
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Trouble Shooting
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Trouble Shooting
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 0/103
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Index 1. TCD management of Si210 Control Panel………………...………..…………...1 TCD (Trouble Code) Design standards ………………………..……………...1 Word definition…………………………………………………….……………...1 Classification of TCD Number...…………………………………..…………….1 Bit definition of Error Operation Flag…………………………………………...2 Trouble-shooting according to the grade ……………………….…………….2 2. TCD Table for Si210 Control Panel ………….……………………….…........3 3. Detail description of TCD (Trouble Code) ...……………………...................8
MMR Elevator_SI FOD
Trouble Shooting
Field Industrial Engineering
Rev. No.
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 1/103
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
1. TCD Management of SI210 Control Panel 1.1.
TCD (Trouble Code) Design standards
1) TCD (Trouble Code), which are mentioned on this document, have been made for SI210 control panel. 2) The number of TCD is 1~239 and they are classified by function.
1.2.
Word definition
1) Operation CPU: It designates Main CPU (i186/i960) 2) Speed CPU: It designates INV DSP CPU 3) Error Operation Flag: It decides a elevator operation condition according to this number that is Control Flag.
1.3.
Classification of TCD Number
Number Classification 1 ~ 15 16 ~ 29 30 ~ 69 70 ~ 149 150 ~ 199 200 ~ 239
Functional Classification System Error Inverter Interface Error Inverter / Converter Error Device Error Control Error Network Error
Operation condition in case of Trouble
It is defined by Error Operation Flag of each TCD
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD
1.4. 8
7
July. 2006
Bit definition of Error Operation Flag 6
5
4
3
2
1
● ● ● ● ● ● ●
1.5.
Date
Doc. No.
Trouble Shooting
Field Industrial Engineering
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 2/103
0
Flag definition
Description
●
R5SC Cut
Operation unable
Qualified R5SC Cut
Inspection operation unable or operation unable in case Car stops within door zone.
C1ST Cut
Starting unable
Qualified C1ST Cut
Inspection operation unable or operation unable in case Car stops within door zone.
FAST Run Cut
High speed operation unable
REST Mode
Operation unable in case of emergency return switch off Returning escape floor and operation unable in case of emergency return switch on
Hall Call Cut
Hall call service unable
Hold Type
Holding trouble condition
Trouble-shooting according to the grade
Grade R1 R2 R3
Operation flag 91 94 90
R4
82
R5
88
R6 R7
C0 80
Description R5SC Off right after trouble C1ST Off right after trouble Slow speed able. Call service unable. immediate stop in case of the trouble during high-speed operation Stop at the nearest floor in case of the trouble during high-speed operation. R5SC off at the door zone Stop at the nearest floor in case of the trouble during high-speed operation. C1ST off at the door zone Call service unable Hall call service unable
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 3/103
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Trouble Shooting
2. TCD Table for Si210 Control Panel
TCD
Definition
Detection OPER. SPD.
Description
Hold
Grade
1 2 3 4 5
ERR_SW_WDT
Operation occurred
6
ERR_MEM_ALLOC
7
CPU
S/W
WDT
trouble
●
R1
Memory allocation failed
●
R1
ERR_TASK_CREATE
Task making failed
●
R1
8
ERR_SEM_CREATE
Semaphore making failed
●
R1
9
ERR_WDT_CREATE
Operation CPU WDT Timer making failed
●
R1
10
ERR_INT
Non definitional vector Interrupt occurred
●
XX
16
ERR_INV
Speed CPU H/W WDT trouble occurred
●
R1
17
ERR_INV_RETRY
Speed CPU Retry failure
●
●
R1
ERR_INV_DPRAM
Speed CPU DPRAM WRITE trouble
●
●
R1
30
ERR_INV_OC
INV over current (H/W detection)
●
●
R1
31
ERR_DC_OV
DC Link over voltage
●
●
R1
32
ERR_INV_U_SHORT
INV phase U IGBT trouble
●
●
R1
33
ERR_INV_V_SHORT
INV phase V IGBT trouble
●
●
R1
34
ERR_INV_W_SHORT
INV phase W IGBT trouble
●
●
R1
11 12 13 14 15
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26~ 29
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
TCD
Description
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Trouble Shooting
Definition
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 4/103
Detection OPER. SPD.
Hold
Grade
35
ERR_INV_TR
Regenerative IGBT trouble
●
●
R1
36
ERR_INV_H_CT
INV Hall CT trouble
●
●
R1
37
ERR_INV_U_STACK_TH ERMAL
INV over heat
●
R4
ERR_INV_C_CNTL
INV current control trouble
●
R1
ERR_INV_DC_LINK_UV
DC link under voltage
●
R2
52
ERR_INV_REVERSE_RU N
INV reverse rotation detection
●
R1
53
ERR_INV_CHARGE
INV charging trouble
●
54
ERR_INV_OVER_LOAD
INV over load detection
●
R1
55
ERR_INV_LOW_SPEED
INV under speed detection
●
R2
56
ERR_INV_HIGH_SPEED
INV over speed detection
●
R3
57
ERR_INV_BRAKE_OC
BRAKE over current trouble
●
58
ER_INV_BRAKE_CNTL
BRAKE control trouble
●
R2
59
ERR_INV_ANTISTALL
INV. No operable for 24 sec.
●
R2
60
ERR_INV_SPEC
INV Spec Data trouble
●
61
ERR_INV_SPEC_COM
INV Spec write trouble
●
R1
62
ERR_INV_V48
INV momentary power failure detection
●
R1
69
ERR_V100
Missed phase detection (100V)
●
R3
70
ERR_POWER
48V power trouble (missing phase)
●
R1
71
ERR_V48
Voltage drop detection (85% below)
●
R4
38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51
C
●
●
R1
R2
R1
63 64 65 66 67 68
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
TCD
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Trouble Shooting
Definition
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 5/103
Detection OPER. SPD.
Description
Hold
Grade
73 74
ERR_SPEC_OVER
Operation SPEC DATA trouble
●
RO
ERR_EEPROM_WRITE
EEPROM Write trouble
●
R3
75 76 77
ERR_EEPROM_READ
EEPROM Read trouble
78
ERR_EEPROM_FHT_SU M
79
ERR_NVRAM_FHT_SUM
EEPROM floor height measuring Sum trouble NVRAM floor height measuring Sum trouble
●
●
R1
Table
●
R3
Table
●
R3
80 81 82 83 84
ERR_R5SC_ON
R5SC RELAY ON trouble
●
●
85
ERR_R5SC_OFF
R5SC RELAY OFF trouble
●
86
ERR_C1BR_ON
C1BR CTT. ON error
●
●
R1
87
ERR_C1BR_OFF
C1BR CTT. OFF trouble
●
●
R1
88
ERR_C1ST_ON
C1ST CTT. ON trouble
●
●
R1
89
ERR_C1ST_OFF
C1ST CTT. OFF trouble
●
●
R1
90
ERR_SUPPRESS_ON
SUPPRESS ON trouble
●
●
R1
91
ERR_SUPPRESS_OFF
SUPPRESS OFF trouble
●
●
R1
92
ERR_ENCO
R.E disconnected
●
●
R1
93
ERR_ENCO_READ
R.E pulse counter read trouble
●
●
R1
94
ERR_ENCO_COUNTER
R.E pulse counter trouble
●
●
R1
95
ERR_MECHANICAL_ SAFETY
R5SX OFF trouble (Safety line)
●
R1
96
ERR_ABNORMAL_MODE Operation mode input trouble
●
R4
97
ERR_CDS,
CDS trouble
●
R2
98
ERR_LDS
LDS trouble
●
R2
99
ERR_DUP_IN
Dual input signal trouble
●
100
ERR_SDS1D_ON
SD1D ON trouble
●
R3
101
ERR_SDS2D_ON
SD2D ON trouble
●
R3
ERR_SDS1U_ON
SD1U ON trouble
●
R3
R1 R1
●
R1
102 103 104 105 106 107
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Trouble Shooting Description
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 6/103
Detection OPER. SPD.
TCD
Definition
Hold
Grade
108
ERR_SDS2U_ON
SD2U ON trouble
●
ERR_POSI
POSI ON trouble (LDC)
●
116
ERR_LDU
POSI ON trouble (LDU)
●
XX
117
ERR_LDD
POSI ON trouble (LDD)
●
XX
ERR_SDS
SLOW DOWN S/W trouble
●
R6
125
ERR_BRAKE_OFF
BRAKE open trouble
●
●
R3
126
ERR_MAIN_INV_SPEED
Speed different between operation / speed
●
●
R3
ERR_WEIGHT_SENSOR
Load detector input trouble
●
R3
132
ERR_OPEN_LOCK
Door Open Lock detection
●
XX
133
ERR_OPEN_LOCK_3
OPEN_LOCK repeated trouble
●
R2
134
ERR_CLOSE_LOCK
Door Close Lock detection
●
XX
135
ERR_CLOSE_LOCK_ REPEAT
Door Close Lock repeated trouble
●
R3
136
ERR_ALP
ALP trouble
●
139
ERR_NUDGING
Nudging trouble
●
R7
140
ERR_NVRAM_BATTERY
Discharging voltage of Backup Battery under reference
●
XX
141
ERR_RTC
Clock Chip trouble
●
XX
145
ERR_INV_DM
INV. Door CPU WDT trouble
●
R6
146
ERR_COOLER_FLAOT_S Air-conditioner Float S/W trouble
●
XX
R3
109 110 111 112 113 114
●
R2
115
118 119 120 121 122 123 124
127 128 129 130 131
●
R1
137 138
142 143 144
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
TCD
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Trouble Shooting
Definition
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 7/103
Detection OPER. SPD.
Description
Hold
Grade
●
R1
W ERR_OBS
OBS detection
●
150
ERR_SDS1D_OS
SD1D Over Speed detection
●
R3
151
ERR_SDS2D_OS
SD2D Over Speed detection
●
R3
157
ERR_SDS1U_OS
SD1U Over Speed detection
●
R3
158
ERR_SDS2U_OS
SD2U Over Speed detection
●
R3
ERR_E_STOP
Emergency stop detection
●
R3
ERR_SPEED_DEVIATIO N
Speed difference (real speed detection)
●
●
R3
170
ERR_DIRECTION
Operation direction trouble
●
●
R1
171
ERR_DIGI_FLOOR
Synchronous position trouble
●
177
ERR_REPEAT
Emergency stop occurred frequently
●
●
R4
178
ERR_S_DRIVE_REPEAT
Safety drive occurred frequently
●
●
R5
ERR_OVER_DUTY
Operation duty trouble
●
ERR_SDS_FORCE_DEC
SDS forced frequently
147 148 149
152 153 154 155 156
159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 R3
172 173 174 175 176
179 180 181 182
XX
183 184 185 186
deceleration
occurred
●
●
R3
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
TCD
Description
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Trouble Shooting
Definition
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 8/103
Detection OPER. SPD.
Hold
Grade
187 ERR_OLS
OLS trouble
●
R3
190
ERR_DECEL_ZONE
POSI trouble for 2 deceleration
●
XX
191
ERR_DOOR_COMMAND
Open/Close simultaneous command
●
XX
192
ERR_DOOR_POSI
Door position trouble
●
R6
193
ERR_DOOR_VOLTAGE
Door voltage trouble
●
R6
194
ERR_DOOR_MOTOR_TH Door motor over heat ERMAL
●
R6
195
ERR_DOOR_OC
Door current trouble
●
R6
196
ERR_PHOTO_SHOE
Photo-Shoe input error
●
XX
188 189
197 198 199
ERR_PCB_PROTECTION PCB protection failed _FAIL
●
XX
200
ERR_CNET_SYNC
CNET LON communication trouble
●
R4
202
ERR_CNET_COM
Car communication trouble
●
R4
203
ERR_CNET_COM
Car communication trouble
●
R4
ERR_OTHER_MAIN_1
Other elevator trouble
●
XX
ERR_HALL_BT_JAM
Hall button jam detection
●
XX
223
ERR_1_HALL
Hall nod trouble ( More than 1)
●
XX
224
ERR_ALL_HALL
Hall nod trouble (All)
●
XX
201
204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222
225
Rev. No.
MMR Elevator_SI FOD Field Industrial Engineering
TCD
Definition
Date
July. 2006
Doc. No.
Trouble Shooting Description
Page
0 DL EL) 06-008 9/103
Detection OPER. SPD.
Hold
Grade
226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233
ER_ESMI
ESMI communication trouble
●
XX
ERR_CRT
CRT communication trouble
●
XX
ERR_RUSSIA_OPZX
Landing Door Open (Russia only)
●
~ 236 237 238 239
3. Detail description of TCD(Trouble Code) - See next pages
●
R1
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 5
Operation CPU S/W WDT trouble occurred
[Meaning]
Checks errors.
Detection
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Revision: 0 Page: 9/103 Application
Si210
[Condition]
[Explanation] Tasks are monitored within the software(S/W) regularly. If a task has errors three successive times, S/W Watchdog error occurs. DI-1 elevator operation control program is composed of 12 tasks. These tasks are inspected for their any possible errors as shown below.(Initial Error_Counter value is set to 0(Zero)).
Yes No
Error_Counter == 3
Yes
Software watchdog error 발생 generated
[Countermeasures] - This error has no relation to the outside connection. - Check the voltage(5V) on output of SMPS, If no, replace SMPS. - If the same error continues to happen, replace DOC-1XX.
Task에 error in 발생 ? Error occurs task
Increase 1 Error_Counter를 Error_Counter 1 증가시킨다.
1. SYS1 LED(green) on DOC-1XX lights up or off (Normal if it flickers) 2. When a Watchdog error occurs - it is transferred to 74HC4538 chip and recognized by speed control section - running control program registers a S/W watchdog error in the table and reset running control program automatically.
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 6 [Meaning]
[Explanation]
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Memory allocation failed
Detection
An error occurs while assigning system memory.
[Countermeasures]
An error occurs while assigning the memory which will be used in creating of each task within S/W and registering of interrupt or queue.
시스템에서 사용할 Create memory pool 메모리 for 풀(pool) system 생성
Memory pool생성 메모리 풀(pool) 실패 ? creating failed ? No Yes
Memory assigning타스크(Task)나 for task & 메모리 풀(pool)에서 interrupt handler &handler), 인터럽트 핸들러(Interrupt in사용할 pool. 메모리 할당 큐(Queue)queue 등에서
No
프로그램 Perform다음 Next단계 stage수행 of P/G
Memory assigning 메모리 할당 실패 ? failed ? Yes
Memory assigning error generated?
메모리 할당 Error 발생
(Note) P/G: Program
Revision: 0 Page: 10/103 Application
Si210
- This error has no relation to the outside connection. - Check the voltage(5V) on output of SMPS, If no, replace SMPS. - If the same error continues to happen, replace DOC-1XX.
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting ○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
TCD 7
Task creation failed
Detection
[Meaning]
An error occurs while creating each task.
[Countermeasures]
[Explanation] An error occurs while creating each task in S/W
시스템에서 사용할 Create memory pool 메모리 for 풀(pool) system 생성
메모리 풀(pool)에서 타스크(Task)나 Assign memory for task &handler)에서 interrupt 인터럽트 핸들러(Interrupt handler in pool 사용할 메모리 할당
No
프로그램 Perform다음 next단계 stage수행 of P/G
Task creating or 타스크 생성 혹은 interrupt 인터럽트registering 등록 실패 ? failed? Yes
Task creating error generated
타스크 생성 Error 발생
(Note) P/G: Program
Revision: 0 Page: 11/103 Application
Si210
- This error has no relation to the outside connection. - Check the voltage(5V) on output of SMPS, If no, replace SMPS. - If the same error continues to happen, replace DOC-1XX.
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 8 [Meaning]
[Explanation]
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Semaphore creation failed
Detection
An error occurs when each semaphore is created.
[Countermeasures]
An error occurs while creating a semaphore that synchronizes the tasks in S/W. As several tasks are carried out concurrently, sometimes the same tasks or processes are need to access. At this tine, use a semaphore in order not to access the same data at a time.
엘리베이터 운전 제어 프로그램 Initialize elevator operation 시스템 control P/G초기화 system
Semaphore 생성 Create semaphore
No
Perform next stage of 프로그램 다음 단계 수행 P/G
Semaphore creating failed?
Semaphore 생성 실패 ?
Yes
Semaphore생성 creating Semaphore Error error
(Note) P/G: Program
Revision: 0 Page: 12/103 Application
Si210
- This error has no relation to the outside connection. - Check the voltage(5V) on output of SMPS, If no, replace SMPS. - If the same error continues to happen, replace DOC-1XX.
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 9 [Meaning]
[Explanation]
Operation CPU WDT Timer creation failed An error occurs while creating S/W Watchdog Timer.
An error occurs when a Watchdog which supervises errors of each task in S/W fails to be created. Watchdog Timer not only carries out tasks periodically just as several other tasks do, but also supervises all other tasks. So its period is the shortest(30m sec) and it has top priority. 시스템에서 사용할 Create memory pool 메모리 풀(pool) 생성 for system
Create watchdog Watchdog Timer 생성 timer
Yes
Watchdog timer Watchdog Timer 생성 creatingError error발생 generated
Watchdog timer Watchdog Timer 생성 실패 ? creating failed? No
Assign memory 타스크(Task)나 for task & 메모리 풀(pool)에서 인터럽트 핸들러(Interrupt interrupt handlerhandler)에서 in 사용할 메모리 할당 memory pool
No
Task creating or 타스크 생성 혹은 interrupt 인터럽트 등록 실패 ? registering
Perform다음 next 프로그램 단계 수행 stage of P/G
Yes
Task creating error generated
타스크 생성 Error 발생
(Note) P/G: Program
Detection
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Revision: 0 Page: 13/103 Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] - This error has no relation to the outside connection. - Check the voltage(5V) on output of SMPS, If no, replace SMPS. - If the same error continues to happen, replace DOC-1XX.
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 10 [Meaning]
[Explanation]
[Reference]
Non definitional vector interrupt occurred An error occurs while creating interrupt.
Record vector value about the interrupt that is created in creating non definitional vector interrupt. This error has no effect on the operation of elevator.
The number of interrupt vector can be checked by ‘A42E’. (Trace information)
Detection
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Revision: 0 Page: 14/103 Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] - This error has no relation to the outside connection. - Check the voltage(5V) on output of SMPS, If no, replace SMPS. - Check if ground condition is correct.
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 16 [Meaning]
Speed CPU H/W WDT trouble occurred DSP H/W Watchdog detection
[Explanation] If DSP(INV CPU) H/W Watchdog is occurred, operation CPU resets DSP automatically.
[Detection]
In case that H/W Watchdog error of DSP maintain over 3 cycle of detection(Min. 60~ Max. 90ms), detect the trouble and output the signal of DSP reset. This trouble can not be detective in case of over 48 volts. (Voltage drop/ failure)
Detection
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Revision: 0 Page: 15/103 Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] - Check if the communication connector(64P) between DOC-1XX and DPC-11X is connected well, If connector is abnormal, replace. - Check the voltage(5V) on output of SMPS, If no, replace SMPS. - Twist the cables of the communication connector(64P) - Check if ground condition is correct. - Replace DPC-11X.
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 17 [Meaning]
Speed CPU Retry failure DSP H/W Watchdog has been detective and DSP can not be operable even if operation CPU perform retry of DSP more than 4 times.
[Explanation] If retry signal of operation CPU keeps up more than 4 times, the error is detected and make the elevator being inoperable.
[Reference]
Required retry time for 4 times: 8.6 seconds
Detection
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Revision: 0 Page: 16/103 Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] - Check if the communication connector(64P) between DOC-1XX and DPC-11X is connected well, If connector is abnormal, replace. - Check the voltage(5V) on output of SMPS, If no, replace SMPS. - Twist the cables of the communication connector(64P) - Check if ground condition is correct. - Replace DPC-11X.
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 21 [Meaning]
Speed CPU DPRAM WRITE trouble When communicating DPRAM between operation side & speed side, a error detected if transmitted data is different with feed back data for 4 cycles(120ms) in series.
[Explanation] 1. When transmitting data by DPRAM, feed back data Transmitted data
Feed back data
Coil[RS_SUPPRESS_ON]: 0x91C3
Coil[SV_INV_SUPPRESS_FB]: 0x9208
SWD_O[VO_C1ST]: 0x8081
Coil[SV_INV_C1ST_FB]: 0x920A
SWD_O[VO_C1BR]: 0x8080
Coil[SV_INV_C1BR_FB]: 0x9209
SWD_O[VO_R5SC]: 0x8082
Coil[SV_INV_R5SC_FB]: 0x920B
2. If above data is different for 4 cycles(120ms) in series a error detected.
Detection
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Revision: 0 Page: 17/103 Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] - Check if the communication connector(64P) between DOC-1XX and DPC-11X is connected well, If connector is abnormal, replace. - Check the voltage(5V) on output of SMPS, If no, replace SMPS. - Twist the cables of the communication connector(64P) - Check if ground condition is correct. - Replace DOC-1XX - Replace DPC-11X.
Revision: 0 Page: 18/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting Detection
Inverter Over current
TCD 30 [Meaning]
When current in the electric motor exceeds limit value(If over current occurs,stop switching in order to prevent damages on motor and inverter devices).
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. Check VB connector on DPC-1XX PCB. 2. Verify that HCT cable is properly connected to U and V of HCT. 3. Check a proper connection HCT direction (Normal if HCT ‘arrow’
[Explanation]
points downwards). INV U-V-W stack
4. Verify that voltage of HCT connectors are +15V and -15V. 5. Check J5H jumper on DPC-1XX and number of HCT turns, on the basis of the below table.
HCT U V W
+15V R10
R9
R11
R12 1 3
2 4
R78
+5V R18 10
11 +
VB - 03 VB - 07
OCT
13
HCT HCT turns TURN¼ö
75A
2
1-2
4.5kW ~ 7.5kW
100A
2
3-4
9.5kW ~ 11kW
150A
1
1-2
13kW ~ 15kW
200A
1
3-4
18.5kW ~ 22kW
U4GA
U6HD C88
R44
J5H pin Motor max. Capa. J5Hjumper SHORT MOTORÃÖ´ë¿ë·® position the nameplate) PIN »ðÀÔÀ§Ä¡ (check(¸íÆÇÈ®ÀÎ)
IGBT, IPM IGBT ¿ë·®
J5H
DPC-1XX
6. Check if ground conditions of building & control panel are good. 7. Check followings: - Resistance R9, 10, 11, 12 and 78 (marked on the left diagram) are properly
To DPC-1XX VB connector HCT HCT 커넥터 connector
fitted.(R9: 10K, R10: 1.5K, R11: 5K, R12: 12K, R78: 1M) 1
2
3
4
5
6
+15V -15V IAS GND IBS GND 1
6
U-phase U상
is 6.26 ±0.31V - When a short pin is inserted into 3-4 on J5H, the potential of pin 10 on U6H
HCT A
- When a short pin is inserted into 1-2 on J5H, the potential of pin 10 on U6H
B
V상 V-phase
is 8.89 ±0.44V. HCT ‘arrow’ should HCT의 방향이 아래로 정상임 point 향해야 downwards
8. Replace HCT. 9. Replace DPC-1XX PCB.
Revision: 0 Page: 19/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 31
Detection
DC Link Over voltage
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Application
[Meaning]
[Countermeasures]
When DC link voltage is 770V or more is detected (Stop switching to prevent condenser, IPM and IGBT from damages).
1. Turn the power OFF and examine the followings:
Si210
- VG connector on DPC-1XX PCB - GA connector on DPP-1XX PCB
[Diagram]
- GW, GP and GX connectors on DPP-1XX PCB
Over voltage detection circuit 과전압 검출회로
2. Check if the voltage of DC link is 770V±60V. 3. Check if reference voltage is within 7.9 ±0.5V.
GW - 03
VDC(+)
DPP-1XX (GDC)
15V
GP - 09
VDC(-)
D23 R101
Check point (DPC-111: R31, DPC-131: TE40, TE100) 정상시 LOW(0V) Normal if Low(0V) 이상시 HIGH(15V) Abnormal if High(15V)
4. If item 2, 3 are OK, check the connection between INV STACK
OV
& DPP-1XX, replace DPP-1XX.
R36 R31 15V
R102
R37
R103
R38
R104
R39
LED1
R98
C10D29
PC7 D30 VG - 13
-9V 4 5
R47 R30
-
2
C5
R21
+ IC1
C4
DPC-1XX (INV)
VG - 14
5. Check if regenerative IGBT operates normally. (Refer to TCD35: In case of regenerative IGBT trouble, this error may be occurred. 6. Check if input power of control panel is correct. 7. If TCD 31 is detected while the car is not running, check followings: - VG connector on DPC-1XX.
-9V
- VA, GA connector on DPP-1XX. (Check if #13,14 pin of VA, GA is connected - short check is normal) 8. After power off, check regenerative resistors is OK. Motor
PCB
VDC(+) connector
VDC(-) connector
11kW below
DPP-13X
GP-01
GP-02
13~15kW
DPP-12X
GP-01
GP-03
18~22kW
DPP-101
GW-03
GP-09
(Before this job, the voltage of DC link is 0V)
*Caution : To prevent the hazard of electric shock on DC link end, even though the power is OFF, make sure that LED1(CHG) on DPP-10X PCB lights OFF.
Revision: 0 Page: 20/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting Detection
Inverter phase U IGBT trouble
TCD 32 [Meaning]
Motor capacity 11kW below : In case that one of upper IGBT & one of lower IGBT in IPM are switching on together or regenerative IGBT in IPM is short failure, the trouble occurs. Motor capacity 13kW~15kW: In case that one of upper IGBT & one of lower IGBT in IPM are switching on together, the trouble occurs. Motor capacity 18kW~22kW: In case that +IGBT & -IGBT of U phase are switching on together, the trouble occurs. And incase that the connection of INV STACK is incorrect or drive power of IGBT is incorrect or inverter output(U,V,W) are shortened together.
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. Turn the power off and check if the condition of VG connector of DPC1XX PCB and GA & VA connector of DPP-1XX PCB are OK. 2. In case of DPP-111, check if the condition of GXU, GXL, GU connector and GW-03 pin are OK, and the connection between GU, GW & IGBT on INV. Stack. 3. In case of DPP-131, check if the condition of GU, GV, GW & GX pin connector are OK, and the connection between IPM and INV. Stack. 4. After removing cables from DPP-1XX and IPM, check output of gate SMPS (GU-01,02: 15V, GV-01,02: 15V, GW-01,02: 15V, GX-01,02: 15V,
[Explanation] Motor 11kW below: R.IGBT inside IPM
Motor 13kW~15kW: R.IGBT outside IPM
GX-03,02: -9V)
Motor 18kW~22kW: IGBT
5. Check if the condition of HCT cable and HCT is OK. 6. Check the direction of HCT
CONVERTER DIODE
Reactor is applied in case of 13kW and above
IPM
- Normal if HCT ‘arrow’ points to the bottom of CP - Check wiring directions and refer to INV. over current. 7. Check for proper connections of the followings:
3Φ 380V HCT
U
- VB connector to DPC-100 PCB
V
IM
W
- U-phase HCT signal wire to VB-03 - V-phase HCT signal wire to VB-07. 8. Turn the power ON and check the followings: - Power supply to TP3 and TP6 on DPP-1XX PCB - Voltage of GATE terminal
GV - 01 GV - 02 GW - 01 GW - 02 GX - 01 GX - 02 GX - 03
DPP-1XX (GDC)
VA
VG
VB - 07
GATE SMPS
- VG connector on DPC-1XX. VB - 03
GU - 01 GU - 02
1Φ 110V
GP - 01
GP - 03
9. If TDC 32 is detected while the car is not running, check followings:
DPC-1XX (INV)
- VA connector on DPP-1XX. 10. If the voltage of pin 6 of RA1(coordinates: 81) on DPC-1XX is +15V, examine the connection between pin 21 on DPC-1XX VG connector, and pin 21 on DPP-1XX VA connector. It is normal if they are connected.
In case of IGBT, Use GATE TRANS
11. Examine and replace IGBT, IPM. 12. Replace DPP-1XX PCB. 13. Replace DPC-1XX PCB.
Revision: 0 Page: 21/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting
[Meaning]
Detection
Inverter phase V IGBT trouble
TCD 33
Motor capacity 13kW~15kW: In case that one of upper IGBT & one of lower IGBT in IPM are switching on together, the trouble occurs. Motor capacity 18kW~22kW: In case that +IGBT & -IGBT of V phase are switching on together, the trouble occurs. And incase that the connection of INV STACK is incorrect or drive power of IGBT is incorrect or inverter output(U,V,W) are shortened together.
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. Turn the power off and check if the condition of VG connector of DPC1XX PCB and GA & VA connector of DPP-1XX PCB are OK. 2. In case of DPP-111, check if the condition of GXV, GXL, GV connector and GW-03 pin are OK, and the connection between GV, GW & IGBT on INV. Stack. 3. In case of DPP-131, check if the condition of GU, GV, GW & GX pin connector are OK, and the connection between IPM and INV. Stack. 4. After removing cables from DPP-1XX and IPM, check output of gate
[Explanation]
SMPS (GU-01,02: 15V, GV-01,02: 15V, GW-01,02: 15V, GX-01,02: 15V, GX-03,02: -9V)
DIODE CONVERTER
Reactor applied for 리액터는 모터용량 Reactormotor appliedcapa. for15kW motor cap. 채용 15kW or이상에만 more 13KW or only more only
V-phase IGBT V상 IGBT
3-phase 380V 3상 380V
5. Check if the condition of HCT cable and HCT is OK. 6. Check the direction of HCT - Normal if HCT ‘arrow’ points to the bottom of CP
HCT U V
IM
W
- Check wiring directions and refer to INV. over current. 7. Check for proper connections of the followings: - VB connector to DPC-1XX PCB. - U-phase HCT signal wire to VB-03. - V-phase HCT signal wire to VB-07. 8. Turn the power ON and check the followings:
GATE TRANS
VB - 03
VB - 07
GXV - 02 GXV - 05 GXL - 04 GXL - 13
GW - 03
단상110V 110V AC
GV - 04 GV - 01 GV - 05 GV - 07
- Power supply to TP2 and TP5 on DPP-1XX PCB. - Voltage of GATE terminal (-8V±1V in stop) 9. If TDC 33 is detected while the car is not running, check followings: DPP-1XX (GDC)
VA
VG
DPC-1XX (INV)
- VG connector on DPC-1XX. - VA connector on DPP-1XX. 10. If the voltage of D21 (coordinate 4E) is 0 and the voltage of pin 2 of RA1(Coordinates 81) on DPC-1XX is +15V, then, examine the connection between pin 23, on DPC-1XX VG connector, and pin 23 on DPP-1XX B/D VA connector. It is normal if they are connected. 11. Examine and replace IGBT, IPM. 12. Replace DPP-1XX PCB. 13. Replace DPC-1XX PCB.
Revision: 0 Page: 22/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting
[Meaning]
Detection
Inverter phase W IGBT trouble
TCD 34
Motor capacity 13kW~15kW: In case that one of upper IGBT & one of lower IGBT in IPM are switching on together, the trouble occurs. Motor capacity 18kW~22kW: In case that +IGBT & -IGBT of W phase are switching on together, the trouble occurs. And incase that the connection of INV STACK is incorrect or drive power of IGBT is incorrect or inverter output(U,V,W) are shortened together.
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. Turn the power off and check if the condition of VG connector of DPC1XX PCB and GA & VA connector of DPP-1XX PCB are OK. 2. In case of DPP-111, check if condition of GXW, GXL, GW connector and GW-03 pin are OK, and the connection between GW & IGBT on INV. Stack. 3. In case of DPP-131, check if the condition of GU, GV, GW & GX pin connector are OK, and the connection between IPM and INV. Stack. 4. After removing cables from DPP-1XX and IPM, check output of gate
[Explanation]
SMPS.
DIODE CONVERTER
W-phase IGBT W상 IGBT
3상 AC 380V 380V
(GU-01,02: 15V, GV-01,02: 15V, GW-01,02: 15V, GX-01,02: 15V, Reactor *리액터는applied on motors 13KW and 모터용량 15kW Reactor applied for motor cap. 15kW or more only 이상에만 채용 above
GX-03,02: -9V) 5. Check if the condition of HCT cable and HCT is OK. 6. Check the direction of HCT
HCT U V
IM
W
- Normal if HCT ‘arrow’ points to the bottom of CP - Check wiring directions and refer to INV. over current. 7. Check for proper connections of the followings: - VB connector to DPC-1XX PCB - U-phase HCT signal wire to VB-03
GATE TRANS
DPP-1XX (GDC)
VA
VB - 03
GXW - 02 GXW - 05 GXL - 06 GXL - 07
VG
VB - 07
단상110V 110V AC
GW - 05 GW - 01 GW - 06 GW - 09 GW - 03
- V-phase HCT signal wire to VB-07.
DPC-1XX (INV)
8. Turn the power ON and check the followings: - Power supply to TP1 and TP4 on DPP-1XX PCB - Voltage of GATE terminal (-8V±1V in stop) 9. If TDC 34 is detected while the car is not running, check followings: - VG connector on DPC-1XX. - VA connector on DPP-1XX. 10. If the voltage of D20 (coordinates 5C) is 0 and the voltage of pin 8 of RA1(Coordinates 81) on DPC-1XX is +15V, then, examine the connection between pin 25, on DPC-1XX VG connector, and pin 25 on DPP-1XX VA connector. It is normal if they are connected. 11. Examine and replace IGBT, IPM. 12. Replace DPP-1XX PCB. 13. Replace DPC-1XX PCB.
Revision: 0 Page: 23/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting
[Meaning]
Detection
Regenerative IGBT trouble
TCD 35
DPP-111: In case that On failure of regenerative IGBT occurs or driving power of regeneration is failure or the connection of INV STACK is bad, the trouble occurs.
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. Turn the power OFF and examine the followings: - VG connector on DPC-1XX
[Diagram]
- VA connector on DPP-111 - GP and GXL connectors on DPP-1XX - Connection between GP on DPP-111 and IGBT on INV STACK Regenerative 회생resistor 저항 DIODE CONVERTER
- Check that variable resistor(BR) on DPP-111 PCB is set to a black mark. 리액터는 Reactor applied for 모터용량 15kW motors capa. 13KW 이상에만 or more 채용 only
Regenerative IGBT 회생 IGBT
AC 380V 380V 3상
2. If TCD 35 is detected while the car is not running, check followings: - VG connector on DPC-1XX - VA connector on DPP-111
HCT
If the voltage of pin 5 of RA1(Coordinate 81) on DPC-1XX is +15V,
U V
IM
W
then, examine the connection between pin 19 on DPC-1XX VG connector and pin 19 on DPP-111 VA connector. It is normal if they are connected. 3. Examine IGBT. 4. Replace DPP-111 PCB.
GATE TRANS
DPP-111 (GDC) GXL - 09 GXL - 17
VA
VG
VB - 07
AC 110V 110V 단상
VB - 03
GP - 03 GP - 05 GP - 09
5. Replace DPC-1XX PCB.
DPC-1XX (INV)
Revision: 0 Page: 24/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting ○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
TCD 36
Inverter Hall CT trouble
Detection
[Meaning]
When current controlling HCT and VB connector on DPC-1XX PCB are not connected.
[Countermeasures]
Application
Si210
1. Examine VB connector and cable on DPC-1XX PCB (Connector checking jumper should be connected as in the left diagram)
[Diagram]
2. Examine connector and cable of HCT. 2. If TCD 36 is detected, while the connector is tightly inserted, replace VB connector cable.
DPC-1XX
VB
To HCT로 HCT
Jumper for 용 커넥터 CHECK connector check JUMPER
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10
15V R107
CTCHK C79
3. Replace DPC-1XX PCB.
Revision: 0 Page: 25/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 37 [Meaning]
Detection
Inverter Over heat When the thermal switch on radiating plate activates in order to prevent IGBT from being damaged by overheating. ( 85 ℃ or more, b contact)
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. Examine the followings: - GP and GXL connectors on DPP-1XX
[Diagram]
- VA, GA connector on DPP-1XX and VG connector on DPC-1XX - Check for a proper connection between GP Pin 6, Pin 7 and terminal
INV. STACK THERMAL GUARD
DIODE CONV.
Detect circuit for Overheating
Normal LOW(0V) Abnormal HIGH(15V)
THERMAL1
15V
PC VG - 17
DPC-1XX (INV) VG - 18
R. IGBT
U
IGBT
V
IGBT
W
IGBT
2. Check the fan on the stack - Running status of the fan
THERMAL2
IPM
ends of thermal guard.
- Power supply to the fan - Status of relay. 3. If the ambient temperature in the machine room is over 40°C, check
-9V
the air-conditioning runs. DPP-1XX ( GDC)
4. Turn the power ON and check the stack overheats after sufficiently cooling down the radiating plate and properly connecting GP connector
FAN
to DPP-1XX. PCB
THERMAL1
THERMAL2
DPP-121
GB-04
GB-05
DPP-131
TH-01
TH-02
DPP-111
GP-06
GP-07
5. If TCD 37 is detected, check the followings: - VG connector on DPC-1XX - VA connector on DPP-111, GA connector on DPP-131 6. If the voltage of pin 4 of RA1(Coordinate 81) is +15V Then, examine the connection between pin 17, on DPC-1XX VG connector, and pin 17, on DPP-1XX VA connector. It is normal if they are connected. 7. Replace DPP-1XX PCB. 8. Replace thermal guard. 9. Clean dust on Stack and radiating plate.
10. Replace Stack Fan.
Revision: 0 Page: 26/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 41 [Meaning]
Detection
Inverter current control trouble When a current command, which is over 150% of the rated motor current, is detected due to failure in the motor, unstable input power supply & drop of voltage.
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. Examine the number of turns of HCT (Refer to the INV over current table).
[Diagram]
2. Check that the spec(motor and CP capacity, etc) (Annunciator and carry out “DSP spec write(A52E)”) 3. Check the followings: - Proper connection of VB connector to DPC-1XX PCB and HCT cable - Voltage of power supply to CP is normal
DPC-1XX
- Gears of traction machine
(INV) Speed 속도지령 command Actual 실제속도 speed
속도 Speed 제어기 controller
Current 토크분 command for 전류지령 torque
- Function of brake ( Curr. com’d for tor.
)2
+ ( Curr. co. for excit. ) 2
연산
기동후 Detects in a predetermined 소정시간이후 time부터 after 검출 starting
+
Current CTRL Detects current 전류제어 err. detectedfailure controlling 이상 검출
-
- Connection of Rotary Encoder 4. Check a jam on the car and CWT rails. 5. Replace E2PROM on DPC-1XX PCB.
Current 여자분 command 전류지령 for excitation
150% rated 전동기of정격전류 motor 의 current 150%
This is detected when the current command value is over 150% of the rated motor current, while the motor are running at the rated speed, going through starting and acceleration zone.
6. Replace DPC-1XX PCB. 7. Replace HCT.
Revision: 0 Page: 27/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting
[Meaning]
Detection
DC Link Under Voltage
TCD 48
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Application
Si210
[Countermeasures]
When the voltage of DC link is 330V or less.
1. Turn the power OFF and examine the followings: - VG connector on DPC-1XX, VA & GA connector on DPP-1XX
[Diagram]
- GW, GP and GXL connectors on DPP-1XX - Connection between GW, GP on DPP-1XX and STACK. 2. On detecting TCD 48, check the followings: - Voltage of DC Link terminal is below 330V - If the voltage is not obtained, it is unstable the connection between
Voltage drop detecting circuit 저전압 검출회로 GW - 03
VDC(+)
DPP-1XX (GDC)
15V
GP - 09
VDC(-)
D23
INV STACK and DPP-1XX, STACK ON failure or DPP-1XX PCB failure 3. Turn the power ON and check the followings: Normal if Low (0V) 정상시 LOW(0V) Abnormal High (15V) 이상시if HIGH(15V)
R62
R101
R63 15V R37
C13 D36
then, examine the connection between pin 15 on DPC-1XX VG
PC9 D37 VG - 15
R103
-9V
R38
R104
R39
LED1
R98
R49 R35
9 8 C4
+
(1: +15V, 2: -9, 4: GND) 4. If the voltage of pin 3 of RA1(Coordinates 81) on DPC-1XX is +15V,
R36
R102
- Voltage of TP7 (Coordinates 9N on DPP-1XX) is normal
C9
14 R23
DPC-1XX (INV)
VG - 16
-
connector and pin 15 or DPP-1XX VA connector. (Normal if they are connected) 5. This indicates that the voltage has not charged.
IC1
Check regenerative IGBT ON failure and MAIN IGBT ON failure. 6. Check the condenser and replace it, if necessary.
-9V
7. Replace DPP-1XX PCB and DPC-1XX PCB. 8. Check RCR resistor and wiring. 9. Check input power. PCB
VDC(+) Connector
VDC(-) Connector
DPP-12X
GP-01
GP-03
DPP-13X
GP-01
GP-02
DPP-111
GW-03
GP-09
10. In case that the trouble occurs in the beginning of acceleration, check if the door switches is off.
Revision: 0 Page: 28/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting Inverter Reverse Rotation Detection
TCD 52 [Meaning]
When the actual direction of the motor is opposite to the command.
Detection
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Application
Si210
[Countermeasures]
1. Check the connection between the encoder fitted to the motor shaft
[Explanation] This TCD is to be detected when the actual running direction of the motor is opposite to the command at a speed of 16 m/min. or more after starting. The detection is carried out at the interval of 10m SEC only on the running of the motor.
and the control panel. 2. Examine that U and V-phase on the STACK pass through those of the HCT in order. 3. Check the number of turns of HCT(Refer to the INV over current table). 4. Check for proper connections of the followings: - U, V and W-phase INV STACK wires to motor terminals in order - VG connector on DPC-1XX and VA, GA connector on DPP-1XX - GU, GV, GW & GX connectors on DPP-131 PCB and IPM - GXU, GXV & GXW connectors on DPP-111 PCB and IGBT 5. Check the following - IGBT and IPM on INV STACK turns ON/OFF normally (U-phase+, U-phase-, V-phase+, V-phase-, W-phase+ and W-phase-) and U, V and W-phase currents are sine waves with 120 degree phase difference. (When measuring check pin 3, 4 and 5 with a oscilloscope, examine that U, V and W-phase currents are sine waves without any distortion) If abnormal, STACK needs replacing. 6. Replace DPC-1XX PCB 7. Replace DPP-1XX PCB 8. Check if the positioning of traction machine is reverse or normal 9. Check if the cable of Rotary Encoder is disconnected 10. Check the condition of Rotary Encoder wiring 11. Replace HCT.
Revision: 0 Page: 29/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting
[Meaning]
Detection
Inverter Charging Trouble
TCD 53
When a failure occurs in the charging circuit which protects the condensers and power devices by damping surge current on a initial charging of DC link end.
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. Refer to DC LINK under voltage trouble. 2. Check for the connection status of the followings:
[Diagram]
- VC connector on DPC-1XX and GW and GP connector on DPP-1XX C1VD Option RCRR
- Wiring of VC connector on DPC-1XX PCB (C1VD)
DIODE CONVERTER
- Wiring of RCRR, RCRS and RCRT resistor
MCCB
3Φ380V
3. Turn the power OFF and check short-circuited DC-link ends.
RCRS
NOISE FILTER
(The examination should be carried out after the voltage at DC link has RCRT
been completely discharged and LED1 on DPP-1XX PCB extinguishes.) If DC link end is short-circuited, it is a trouble on STACK.
C1ST
VC - 02
DPC-1XX (INV)
DPP-1XX VG
VA
GP - 09
VC - 01
GW - 03
(Inspect power devices) C1VD COIL
(GDC)
In case C1VD is applied: DC link voltage is charged through charging resistor RCRR, RCRS and RCRT when C1VD is picked up in 3 seconds after the power turns on. If DC link voltage is inspected to be low(below 330V) in 8 seconds after the C1VD contactor is picked up, drop out C1VD contactor and then pick it up again. If DC link voltage is not charged in 8 seconds, it will be dropped out and be in unable condition. This time, refer to DC link low voltage failure. In case C1VD is not applied: DC link voltage will be charged through RCRR, RCRS within 3 seconds after power on, and 8 seconds later, DC link voltage will be inspected whether the voltage is under 330V or not. And TCD53 will be appeared even if the voltage is still under 330V after inspecting DC link voltage 8 seconds later.
4. Replace DPP-1XX PCB 5. Replace DPC-1XX PCB
Revision: 0 Page: 30/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting
[Meaning]
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Detection
Inverter Overload Detection
TCD 54
When the current detected on motor exceeds general motor capacity continuously.
Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. Check the No. of HCT TURN (Refer to INV over current table) 2. Verify that SPEC such as motor capacity, control panel capacity, etc..
[Diagram]
are correct. 3. Check VB connector on DPC-1XX PCB and HCT connection 4. Check the condition of traction M/C gear and brake. 5. Verify that there’s no jam in car and CWT rail 2
DPC-1XX (INV)
7. Replace DPC-1XX 8. Replace HCT
U - Phase Currency U상전류 V - Phase Currency V상전류
6. Replace E PROM in DPC-1XX
A/D A/D변환 CONVERSION
LOW PASS FILTER
+
Overload Detected 과부하 검출
-
W - Phase Currency W상전류
9. Check if the positioning of traction machine is reverse or normal 10. Check if the cable of Rotary Encoder is disconnected (Refer to TCD 92)
150% of Rated 전동기 정격전류 Motor Current 의 150%
This error is detected when the motor’s U, V, and W-phase values that have been radiorectified, converted into A/D values, and then gone through LOW PASS FILTER exceed 150% of rated motor current. Error is detected when the rated value is exceeded for over 1 second.
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting Inverter Under Speed Detection
TCD 55 [Meaning]
When actual motor speed does not reach the value commanded.
[Explanation]
Detection starts 100msec after motor start-up. An error is detected when motor speed is detected to be below 4m/min for 100 m/sec while speed command value is 6 m/min or more.
Detection
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Revision: 0 Page: 31/103 Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. Check the connection between control panel and the Rotary Encoder fitted to motor shaft. 2. Verify that U and V-phase on inverter stack side are passing through U and V-phase of HALL-CT respectively. 3. Check the No. of HALL-CT turn (Refer to INV over current table) 4. Check the connection sequence of U, V, and W-phase from inverter stack to motor terminal. 5. Check the connection between VG connector in DPC-1XX PCB and VA & GA connector of DPP-1XX. 6. Check the connection between IGBT and GU, GV, and GW connector in DPP-111. 7. Verify that inverter stack IGBT(U-phase+, U-phase-, V-phase+, Vphase-, W-phase+, W-phase-) turn ON and OFF normally and U, V, and W-phase currents are sine waves with 120 phase difference. (Verify that U, V, and W-phase currency are sine waves without deformation by measuring check pin(CHK) 3, 4, and 5 on DPC-1XX with scope) If any error is found, replace the stack. 8. Replace DOC-1XX PCB. 9. Replace DPC-1XX PCB. 10. Replace DPP-1XX PCB. 11. Replace HCT 12. Check if the positioning of traction machine is reverse or normal. 13. Check if the cable of Rotary Encoder is disconnected. (Refer to TCD 92) 14. Check if the electric power goes to motor terminal.
Revision: 0 Page: 32/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting Inverter Over speed Detection
TCD 56 [Meaning]
When the actual number of rotations of motor is higher than the normal abnormally.
Detection
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. Check the connection between the encoder fitted to the motor shaft and the control panel.
[Explanation]
2. Examine that U and V-phase on the STACK pass through those of the HCT in order.
This error is detected when the motor’s turn number detected exceeds 16 m/min and, in case of high speed operation, is over 110% of the rated speed. In case of slow speed, the error is detected when the number is over 120% of the commanded value for speed.
3. Check the number of turns of HCT(Refer to the INV over current table). 4. Check for proper connections of the followings: - U, V and W-phase INV STACK wires to motor terminals in order - VG connector on DPC-1XX and VA, GA connector on DPP-1XX - GU, GV, GW & GX connectors on DPP-131 PCB and IPM - GXU, GXV & GXW connectors on DPP-111 PCB and IGBT 5. Check the following - IGBT on INV STACK turns ON/OFF normally. (U-phase+, U-phase-, V-phase+, V-phase-, W-phase+ and W-phase-) and U, V and Wphase currents are sine waves with 120 degree phase difference. (When measuring check pin 3, 4 and 5 with a oscilloscope, examine that U, V and W-phase currents are sine waves without any distortion) If abnormal, STACK needs replacing. 6. Replace DOC-1XX PCB. 7. Replace DPC-1XX PCB. 8. Replace DPP-1XX PCB. 9. Replace Rotary Encoder and check the line. 10. Replace Hall CT.
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 57
Brake Over Current Trouble
[Meaning] When the current of Brake coil exceeds the normal, the trouble occurs
Detection
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Revision: 0 Page: 33/103 Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. Check the connection of VJ connector between DPC-1XX & DPB-1XX. 2. Check the red LED. If it is off, check the power supply line(DC 110V).
[Explanation]
In case that the current exceeds the reference of Brake Control PCB, the trouble occurs.
3. Check if #4, 6 pin of the connector on DPB-1XX is DC 100V. 4. Check if #3, 5 pin of the connector UB on DOP-1XX is DC 100V. 5. Check if the line of Brake is shortage fault between each other. 6. Replace DPB-1XX PCB. 7. Replace DPC-1XX PCB.
Revision: 0 Page: 34/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 58 [Meaning]
Brake Current Trouble When the input power of Brake coil is unstable or low, and the power is cut at Fuse or somewhere, the trouble occurs.
Detection
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. Check the connection of VJ connector between DPC-1XX & DPB-1XX. 2. Check the red LED. If it is off, check the power supply line(DC 110V).
[Explanation]
In case that the current is broken or applied abnormally, the trouble occurs.
3. Check if #4, 6 pin of the connector on DPB-1XX is DC 100V. 4. Check if #3, 5 pin of the connector UB on DOP-1XX is DC 100V. 5. Check the condition of Fuse FS1, FS2. 6. Check if C1ST, C1BR operate well. 7. When C1BR, C1ST are activated, check if #2, 6 of VK connector on DPB-1XX have DC110V. 5. Check if the line of Brake is broken. 6. Replace DPB-1XX PCB. 7. Replace DPC-1XX PCB.
Revision: 0 Page: 35/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting ○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
TCD 59
Inverter Inoperable for 24 seconds
Detection
[Meaning]
When the motor does not rotate normally.
[Countermeasures]
Application
Si210
1. Check that the PI gain value of DPC-1XX is set to a lower value. 2. Check that the number of turns of HCT is appropriate.
[Explanation]
This TCD is detected when the motor rotates at a speed of 16 m/min for 24 seconds after the motor starts in normal operation.
3. Examine that the capacity of the motor is appropriate for that of the elevator. 4. Check for IGBT failure on STACK. 5. Check a jam on the car and CWT rails. 6. Check Encoder wiring and Encoder itself.
Revision: 0 Page: 36/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 60
Inverter Spec Data trouble
[Meaning]
Detection
Motor(Kw) 5.5 7.5 9.5, 11 13, 15 18, 22
[Explanation]
[Symptom] • Unable to start • Alarm LED on DOC-1XX lights ON. • R5SC relay or contactor OFF
Speed (m/min) 45
60
[Countermeasures]
position the NORMAL/STOP switch in DOR-131 on STOP, locate JP2 jumper to WE in DPC-12X, and input A52E in DOA-100. When the SUCCESS is displayed following WAIT message after a while, return JP2 jumper in DPC-12X to NC, position the NORMAL/STOP switch in DOR-131 on NORMAL, and reset by pressing the RESET button in DOC-1XX.
If TCD 60 appears still after the actions taken at step 1, verify that IGBT(or IPM), motor, speed and TR M/C are fit to the applicable map in the right. If any errors are found, input a correct data in the corresponding SPEC address. If SPEC is not corrected, start again after verifying that SW2 in DOC-120 is positioned on WE.
Application
Si210
< INV SPEC. APPLICATION MAP >
There is a trouble of Inverter SPEC DATA
1. INV SPEC data was not written on the side of speed. 2. SPEC on the side of Operation and that on the side of Speed are different. 3. Settings of IGBT, motor, speed and TR M/C are not fit to applicable map.
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
90
105
IPM, IGBT(A) 50 75 100 150 200
CT-Turns 2 2 2 1 1
Worm Type TKXS TKM TKL TKXS TKM TKL TKXL WMC WLC TKXS TKM TKL TKXL WMC WLC TKXS TKM TKL TKXL WMC WLC
Helical RGR 38 1/2 38 1/2 47 38 1/2 38 1/2 47 47 38.1/2 32 2/3 22 2/3 22 2/3 26 2/3 26 2/3 25 2/3 28 22 2/3 22 2/3 26 2/3 26 2/3 22 24
Type
RGR
H438B
38.35
H422B H317
21.92 17.371
H422B H317
21.92 17.371
* RGR : Reduction gear ratio * The capacity of motor should be set to its max. Example) 13/15 -> Set to 15 15/18 -> Set to 18
Revision: 0 Page: 37/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 61 [Meaning]
Inverter Spec Write trouble When inverter SPEC write is unable, the trouble occurs.
[Explanation] In case that SPEC data can not be written on DSP even performing SEC write mode(A52E), the trouble occurs.
Detection
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Application
[Countermeasures]
1. Check if JP2 jumper in DPC-12X is at WE. 2. Check if the contact of short pin is broken. 3. Replace inverter ROM. 4. Replace DPC-1XX
Si210
Revision: 0 Page: 38/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 62 [Meaning]
Inverter Momentary Power Failure Detection When a momentary power failure is detected in DSP on DPC-1XX PCB.
Detection
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. Check that the connection of VE connector between DPC-1XX and DOC-1XX.
[Explanation]
DSP on DPC-1XX PCB reads a signal of inverter momentary power failure via VE connector. TCD 62 occurs if a value (signal) is abnormal.
2. Refer to countermeasures of TCD70. 3. Replace DOC-1XX. 4. Replace DPC-1XX.
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 69 [Meaning]
Detection
Missed Phase Detection (100V) When the failure of DC110V or the under voltage of Brake PCB is detected.
[Explanation] When the breaking or the under voltage of DC 110V, which is for contactor and Brake, continues 180 msec, the trouble may occurs. Coil[SW_SS_ 100V_DOWN] 0x923C
Coil[SW_SS_48V_ DOWN_HOLD]
v100_err_count >=1
TCD 69
0x9240
+1 ERD_Inv_Brake_UV
v100_err_cout
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Revision: 0 Page: 39/103 Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. Check if LED1, 2 on DOP-1XX are turned on. 2. If LED1,2 are turned off, check the condition of FS1, FS2 fuse. If one of them is cut, replace the fuse(250V/6A). 3. Check if LED3 on DOP-1XX are turned on. 4. If red LED(LD1) on DPB-1XX is turned on. 5. If LED3 are turned off, check the condition of FS3 fuse. If it is cut, replace the fuse(250V/6A). 6. If above items are OK, the voltage of PS connector 12-16, 14-16 on DOP-1XX is within AC85V±10%. If no, replace transformer. 7. Check if the voltage between AC-07 on DOC-1XX and ground is within DC110V±10%. 8. Check if the voltage between UB-03 and UB-05 on DOP-1XX is within DC110V±10%. 9. Check the cables (VJ & VK) between DPB-100 and DPC-1XX. 10. If countermeasure 9 is OK, replace DPB-100.
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 70 [Meaning]
Detection
48V Power Trouble This is the method that detects any possible lost phase of E/L three-phase input power. The decision is carried out by checking the DC rectifying voltage(DC 48V) in the controlling power three-phase AC37V.
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Revision: 0 Page: 40/103 Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1) Verify that D48 FUSE LED(LED3.LED4) in DOP-100 PCB lights on.
[Explanation]
If IALM(red) LED and P.F(red) LED flashes within DOC-1XX, operation will be unable.
2) Check the fuse(FS3, FS4) when the above LED lights off. If it is disconnected, replace it with a rated fuse(250V/3A).
V48_Down_10sec_Count >= 0x0A
TCD 70
0x48106
3) If any error are not found at the above items, verify that the voltage AC 37V± 10% among pin 1, 9 and 12 of PB connector in
Left picture below show DC 48V at a normal power and the right picture shows wave form when a phase was lost. Lost phase detecting circuit in DOC-1XX lights ARM LED when it detects a wave form which falls down 35V or less. If it detects such wave for 300msec, it makes Error 70.
Voltage : DC48V±10% [ Wave form & voltage on normal ]
Voltage : DC32V±10% [ Wave form & voltage on abnormal ]
Note) The above voltage is DC value measured by digital volt. meter.
DOP-100P PCB BOARD. 4) Verify that the voltage between AB-10 pin in DOC-100 PCB and F.G is DC48V± 10% .
Revision: 0 Page: 41/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 71 [Meaning]
[Explanation]
Detection
Voltage Drop Detection
1. There is a special countermeasure. Check the power source from the building. 2. Refer to countermeasures of TCD70.
In case 85% of voltage drop continues for 90 msec, the trouble is detected. It is detected by the voltage(DC48V) rectified from AC37V that is 3 phases power for control.
under_85p_count > 2
TCD 71
0x923F
+1
Application
[Countermeasures]
When input power(3 phases) drops to its 85% or below, the trouble occurs.
Coil[SW_SS_48V_UNDER_85P]
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
under_85p_count
Si210
Revision: 0 Page: 42/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting Detection
TCD 74
Operation SPEC DATA Trouble
[Meaning]
SPEC DATA trouble is detected in Operation CPU, when EEPROM SPEC DATA is not within controllable range.
[Explanation]
[Reference]
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] Inspect and correct the data of SPEC ROM(EEPROM- 28C64).
This trouble occurs when the value of SPEC DATA in EEPROM violates the setting.
Search corresponding address from the SPEC list, and then enter the address by pressing “A31E” on the Annunciator(ANN). Correct the data value of corresponding address of EEPROM and reset.
1. When the data is not warm gear type and helical gear type but designated data. 2. Concerning gear type, the data of TR M/C is out of range. 3. When the value of encoder is not 72, 512, 1024. 4. When the data of the speed is out of range. 5. When the data of IGBT capacity is out of range. 6. When the data of H.CT TURN is out of range. 7. When the data of motor capacity is out of range. 8. When the number of service floor is different with SPEC. 9. When the number of shelter plate is different with SPEC.
1. Gear type (Address: 0106 H) 2. TR M/C Type (Address: 0108H) 3. Rotary Encoder pulse (Address: 010EH) 4. Speed (Address: 0104H) 5. IGBT capacity (Address: 010AH) 6. H.CT TURN (Address: 010CH) 7. Motor capacity (Address: 0102H) 8. Service floor (Address: 038CH~04CAH) 9. Number of shelter plate (Address: 0300H)
The data troubled can be checked by A42E(trace data).
If data of each BIT is 1, the SPEC DATA of set BIT is the reason of the trouble.
15
14
13
12
11
10
-
-
-
-
-
-
7 H.CT TURN
6
5
3
2
-
Speed
IGBT
4 Rotary Motor Encoder
9 8 Service Shelter floor plate 1 0 TM
Gear
Revision: 0 Page: 43/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 76 [Meaning]
EEPROM Write Trouble When different values are found over 100 times while writing data on EEPROM and reading data from the same address.
Detection
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. Verify if SW2 switch in DOC-1XX is switched to “WE” side. 2. Verify if EEPROM is properly inserted into DOC-1XX.
[Explanation]
This error means that the SPEC DATA is not written properly when letting SPEC DATA written in EEPROM.
3. Check EEPROM. ( 28C64-xxPC: xx should be below 15 ) 4. Replace SPEC ROM.
Revision: 0 Page: 44/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 77 [Meaning]
EEPROM Read Trouble Different data are found over 4 consecutive times while reading data from the same address on EEPROM.
Detection
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. Check EEPROM. ( 28C64-xxPC: xx should be below 15)
[Explanation]
While reading the SPEC DATA of EEPROM, when different data is found over 4 times consecutively though reading SPEC DATA on the same address.
2. Verify that EEPROM is properly inserted into DOC-1XX BOARD. 3. Replace SPEC ROM.
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 78
Floor Height measuring Table SUM trouble
[Meaning]
EEPROM floor height measurement table error
[Explanation] Addresses starting from 1A00H of EEPROM, floor height value of each floor is saved after measuring the floor height. In 1B10H of EEPROM, the sum of floor height of each floor is saved. If even one of three cases below occurs, this error will occur.
1. When the sum obtained by adding each floor height table value saved in EEPROM(1A00H) and the floor height sum data saved in EEPROM does not match. 2. When the floor height sum data in EEPROM is 0(Zero). 3. When the floor height of the lowest floor of floor height table in EEPROM is not the lowest floor height(150000).
[Symptom]
1. Low speed return operation to the lowest level with buzzer ringing and display ACD = 09. 2. In case there is no Non-Stop floor, operate the nearest floor. 3. Stop and standby with ACD = 09.
Detection
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Revision: 0 Page: 45/103 Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. EEPROM Address (After pressing ANN ‘A31E’) Address of where floor height starts: 1A00H Floor height table sum : Check the value of 1B10H. 2. Re-measure the floor height 3. After measuring the floor height verify if the floor indicating value of LCE are conforming to spec. If the values are contrary, adjust the plate and check the installation. 4. Consecutive failure of floor height measurement, press ‘A31E’ on ANN, enter the address below and confirm the value. Address ; -Total number of floors : 0300H (Elevator1) 0302H (Elevator2) -Top floor : 041CH -Bottom floor : 0420H -Service floor : 038CH ~ 038CH(Elevator 1) 03CEH ~ 040CH(Elevator 2) 5. Replace * How to measure floor height 1) Press ‘A12E’ on ANN, and press 3. 2) If the floor height is measured successfully, press ‘FFFF’. 3) If the measuring fails, measure the floor height again. 4) If the measuring fails repeatedly, verify if the total floor number and the highest floor in EEPROM(28C64) are identical with those in the field.
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 79
NVRAM Floor Height measuring Table SUM trouble
[Meaning]
NVRAM floor height table error
[Explanation] After measuring of floor height, the floor height value of each floor and the sum of them are designed to be saved in EEPROM and NVRAM(Backup Ram). In addresses starting from 0022H of NVRAM; floor height value of each floor is saved, and in 1B10H of EEPROM, the sum of floor height of each floor is saved. If even one of three cases below occurs, this error will occur. 1. When the sum obtained by adding each floor height table value saved in NVRAM(Backup RAM) and the floor height sum data saved in RAM(Backup RAM) does not match. 2. When the floor height sum data in NVRAM is 0(Zero). 3. When the floor height of the lowest floor of floor height table in NVRAM is not the lowest floor height(150000).
[Symptom] 1. Low speed return operation to the lowest level with buzzer ringing and display ACD = 0B. 2. When DL turns on, alerts by with ACD = 27.
Detection
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Revision: 0 Page: 46/103 Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. In case only TCD 79 is displayed, the system returns automatically to normal operation condition. 2. In case TCD 79 occurs with TCD 78, perform the countermeasures of TCD 78.
Revision: 0 Page: 47/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 84
Detection
R5SC Relay on trouble
[Meaning] R5SC ON condition lasts for over 500ms after R5SC OFF was commanded.
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. Verify if the voltage of AB-01 is 48V . 2. Verify if the voltage of AA-01 is 48V when NORMAL/STOP switch is positioned to NORMAL.
[Explanation]
3. Verify if R5SC relay is properly inserted. SWD_I[VI_R5SC]
4. The LED(red) of R5SC relay will light on while driving. SWD_O[VO_R5SC]
0x8001
SWD_I[VI_R5SC]
check_out
0x8082
SWD_O[VO_R5SC]
Verify if contacts are connected during LED lights on and disconnected during LED lights off. 5. Check contacts when relay turns on.
Coil[SV_INV_SW_FAIL] 0x923D
6. Replace R5SC relay(contactor type). 0x8001
0x8082
0x9210
Coil[SW_SS_DSP_WD]
check_out TMC_Start(R5SC_ ERROR_DETECT_T) TMC_Check(R5SC_ERROR_ DETECT_T, FINISH_STATE)
SWD_I[VI_R5SC]
0x8001
TCD 84
Revision: 0 Page: 48/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 85
Detection
R5SC Relay off trouble
[Meaning] R5SC OFF condition lasts for over 500ms after R5SC ON was commanded
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. Verify if the voltage of AB-01 is 48V . 2. Verify if the voltage of AA-01 is 48V when NORMAL/STOP switch is positioned to NORMAL.
[Explanation]
3. Verify if R5SC relay is properly inserted.
SWD_I[VI_R5SC]
0x8001
SWD_O[VO_R5SC] 0x8082
check_out
0x8082
0x8001
SWD_I[VI_R5SC]
4. The LED(red) of R5SC relay will light on while driving.
SWD_O[VO_R5SC]
disconnected during LED lights off.
Coil[SV_INV_SW_FAIL] 0x923D 0x9210
5. Replace R5SC relay(contactor type).
Coil[SW_SS_DSP_WD]
check_out TMC_Start(R5SC_ ERROR_DETECT_T) TMC_Check(R5SC_ERROR_ DETECT_T, FINISH_STATE)
SWD_I[VI_R5SC]
0x8001
Verify if contacts are connected during LED lights on and
TCD 85
Revision: 0 Page: 49/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 86
Detection
C1BR CTT. on trouble
[Meaning] Even after 500ms away from C1BR off command, C1BR on is maintained.
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] P48 C1BR
MC1ST-01
MC1BR-04
AA-08
AA-08
[Explanation] 13 SWD_I[VI_R5SC]
SWD_O[VO_R5SC]
0x8001
SWD_O[VO_R5SC] 0x8082
3
4
DOC-1XX
0x8082
0x8001
SWD_I[VI_R5SC]
check_out
14
Coil[SV_INV_SW_FAIL] 0x923D 0x9210
1. Check voltage of AA-08 of DOC-1XX from above circuit.
Coil[SW_SS_DSP_WD]
• When C1BR driving section is ON : DC 48 V check_out TMC_Start(R5SC_ ERROR_DETECT_T) TMC_Check(R5SC_ERROR_ DETECT_T, FINISH_STATE)
SWD_I[VI_R5SC]
• When C1BR driving section is OFF : 0 V 2. Check the state of input state indicating row(row 3) column 10 on LCD of DOA-100.
TCD 85
0x8001
• When C1BR driving section is ON :
• When C1BR driving section is OFF : 0 3. Check C1BR contact point of contactor.
• Even after 500ms away from OFF command of C1BR output, C1BR contact does not turns OFF, and C1BR contact point input is ON is detected(driving section ON failure). • Even with C1BR contact off, C1BR contact point input on is detected, because of contact point not being off(contact point melted and adhered).
1
Revision: 0 Page: 50/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting Detection
TCD 87
C1BR CTT. off trouble
[Meaning]
Even after 500ms away from C1BR on command, C1BR off is maintained.
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] P48 C1BR
MC1ST-01
MC1BR-04
AA-08
AA-08
[Explanation] 13 SWD_I[VI_C1BR]
SWD_O[VO_C1BR]
0x8029
SWD_O[VO_C1BR] 0x8080
3
4
DOC-1XX
0x8080
0x8029
SWD_I[VI_C1BR]
check_out
14
Coil[SV_INV_SW_FAIL] 0x923D 0x9210
1. Check voltage of AA-08 of DOC-1XX from above circuit. Coil[SW_SS_DSP_WD]
• When C1BR driving section is ON : DC 48 V check_out
• When C1BR driving section is OFF : 0 V TMC_Start(C1BR_ ERROR_DETECT_T)
TMC_Check(C1BR_ERROR_ DETECT_T, FINISH_STATE)
2. Check the state of input state indicating row(row 3) column 10 on LCD of DOA-100.
SWD_I[VI_C1BR]
TCD 87
0x8029
• When C1BR driving section is ON :
• When C1BR driving section is OFF : 0 3. Check C1BR contact point of contactor.
• Even after 500ms away from ON command of C1BR output, C1BR contact does not become ON, and C1BR contact point input is OFF is detected(driving section OFF failure). • Even with C1BR contact on, C1BR contact point input off is detected, because of contact point not being on(failure of contact point off).
1
Revision: 0 Page: 51/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 88 [Meaning]
Detection
C1ST CTT. on trouble Even after 500ms away from C1ST off command, C1ST on is maintained.
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] P48 MC1ST-01
C1ST
MC1ST-02
AA-07
AA-07
[Explanation] SWD_I[VI_C1ST]
0x8081
0x802A
SWD_I[VI_C1ST]
0x802A
SWD_O[VO_C1ST]
SWD_O[VO_C1ST] 0x8081
Coil[SW_SS_48V_ DOWN_HOLD]
check_out
21
22
31
32
DOC-1XX
0x923C
Coil[SV_INV_SW_FAIL] 0x923D 0x9210
1. Check voltage of AA-07 of DOC-1XX from above circuit. Coil[SW_SS_DSP_WD]
• When C1ST driving section is ON : 0 V check_out
• When C1ST driving section is OFF : DC 48 V TMC_Start(C1ST_ ERROR_DETECT_T)
TMC_Check(C1ST_ERROR_ DETECT_T, FINISH_STATE)
2. Check the state of input state indicating row (row 3) column 9 on LCD of DOA-100.
SWD_I[VI_C1ST]
TCD 88
0x802A
• When C1ST driving section is ON :
• When C1ST driving section is OFF : 0 3. Check C1ST contact point of contactor.
• Even after 540ms away from OFF command of C1ST output, C1ST contact does not become OFF, and C1ST contact point input is ON is detected. • Even with C1ST contact off, C1ST contact point input on is detected, because of contact point not being off.
1
Revision: 0 Page: 52/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 89
Detection
C1ST CTT. off trouble
[Meaning] Even after 500ms away from C1ST on command, C1ST off is maintained.
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] P48 MC1ST-01
C1ST
MC1ST-02
AA-07
AA-07
[Explanation] SWD_I[VI_C1ST] 0x802A
SWD_I[VI_C1ST]
0x802A
SWD_O[VO_C1ST] 0x8081
SWD_O[VO_C1ST] 0x8081
Coil[SW_SS_48V_ DOWN_HOLD]
check_out
22
31
32
DOC-1XX
0x923C
Coil[SV_INV_SW_FAIL] 0x923D 0x9210
1. Check voltage of AA-07 of DOC-1XX from above circuit. Coil[SW_SS_DSP_WD]
• When C1ST driving section is ON : 0 V • When C1ST driving section is OFF : DC 48 V
check_out TMC_Start(C1ST_ ERROR_DETECT_T) TMC_Check(C1ST_ERROR_ DETECT_T, FINISH_STATE)
21
2. Check the state of input state indicating row(row 3) column 9 on LCD of DOA-100.
SWD_I[VI_C1ST]
TCD 89
0x802A
• When C1ST driving section is ON :
1
• When C1ST driving section is OFF : 0 3. Check C1ST contact point of contactor. 4. Check if rope compensation function is applied.
• Even after 500ms away from ON command of C1ST output, C1ST contact does not become ON, and C1ST contact point input is OFF is detected. • Even with C1ST contact on, C1st contact point input off is detected, because of contact point not being on.
- Data in address 0016 is ‘01’ or ‘FF’, even If the function is not applied. Change the data to ‘00’. 5. If rope compensation function is applied, check R1ML Relay.
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 90
Detection
SUPRESS ON trouble
[Meaning] Even after 360ms away from driving OFF command from operation side to speed side,ON feedback is maintained.
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Revision: 0 Page: 53/103 Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] •1. Check flickering condition of WDT LED(green) of DPC-1XX. •2. Check connection condition of communication cable(64P) between operation and speed.
[Explanation] Coil[SV_INV_ RUN_STOP_FB]
Coil[RS_SUPPRESS_ON] 0x91C3
0x9207
Coil[RS_SUPPRESS_ON]
• Check flickering condition of SYS2 LED(green) of DOC-1XX.
SWD_I[VI_C1ST] 0x802A
Coil[SV_INV_ RUN_STOP_FB] 0x9207
0x91C3
SWD_O[VO_C1ST]
SWD_I[VI_R5SC] 0x8001
0x8081
Coil[SV_INV_SW_FAIL] 0x9210
check_out
TMC_Check(SUPRS_ON_OFF_ DETECT_T, FINISH_STATE)
check_out
TMC_Start(SUPRS_ ON_OFF_DETECT_T)
Coil[RS_SUPPRESS_ON]
TCD 90
0x91C3
Even suppress OFF command of operation control side is maintained for 360ms, the suppress command which is a feedback from speed control side does not become OFF, and maintain continuously ON. [Symptom] Sudden stop during running.
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 91
Detection
SUPRESS OFF trouble
[Meaning] Even after 360ms away from driving ON command from operation side to speed side,OFF feedback is maintained.
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Revision: 0 Page: 54/103 Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] •1. Check flickering condition of WDT LED(green) of DPC-1XX. •2. Check connection condition of communication cable(64P) between operation and speed.
[Explanation] Coil[RS_SUPPRESS_ON]
Coil[SV_INV_ RUN_STOP_FB] 0x9207
0x91C3
Coil[RS_SUPPRESS_ON]
• Check flickering condition of SYS2 LED(green) of DOC-1XX.
SWD_I[VI_C1ST] 0x48082
Coil[SV_INV_ RUN_STOP_FB] 0x9207
0x91C3
SWD_O[VO_C1ST]
SWD_I[VI_R5SC] 0x8001
0x8081
Coil[SV_INV_SW_FAIL] 0x9210
check_out
TMC_Check(SUPRS_ON_OFF_ DETECT_T, FINISH_STATE)
check_out
TMC_Start(SUPRS_ ON_OFF_DETECT_T)
Coil[RS_SUPPRESS_ON]
TCD 91
0x91C3
Even suppress ON command of run control side is maintained for 300ms, the suppress command which is a feedback from speed control side does not become ON, and maintain continuously OFF. [Symptom] Sudden stop during running.
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 92
Detection
R.E disconnected
[Meaning] Disconnection of Rotary Encoder both phases (A, B) is detected
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Revision: 0 Page: 55/103 Application
Si210
[Symptom] Sudden stop during running.
[Explanation] ALM LED (Red color) on DOC-1XX is turned on: Operation unable condition With speed command is more than 1m/min and C1ST & C1BR is on 1. In rope compensation operation, if the pulse of R/E doesn’t change for 4.86 seconds, the trouble occurs. 2. In other operation (not rope compensation), if the pulse of R/E doesn’t change for 1.62 seconds, the trouble occurs. Coil[RS_RUNNING]
SWD_O[VO_C1BR]
0x91C3
SWD_I[VI_C1BR]
0x9207
SWD_O[VO_C1ST]
SWD_I[VI_C1ST]
0x9207
0x48082
Coil[IS_CMD_V_1] check_out 0x91C3
0x91C3
check_out
enco_diff == 0 TMC_Start(ENCODER_ DISCON_DETECT_T
TMC_Check(ENCODER_DISCON_ Coil[RS_ROPE_ DETECT_T,FINISH_STATE) COMPEN_REQUEST]
enco_input_er_cnt++
0x8081
enco_input_er_cnt > 2
TCD 92
TCD 92
[Countermeasures] 1. Voltage check of AD connector in DOC-1XX in stop. • PIN 1 : 15 V ± 5% (power supply of R/E) • PIN 2 : 0 V ± 0.5 V (GND) • PIN 3 : 0 V ± 0.5 V or 15 V ± 5% • PIN 4 : 0 V ± 0.5 V or 15 V ± 5% 2. Check voltage of AD connector in DOC-1XX during running. • PIN 1 : • PIN 2 : • PIN 3 : • PIN 4 :
15 V ± 5% 0 V ± 0.5 V 7.5 V ± 5% (measuring DC by DMM) 7.5 V ± 5% (measuring DC by DMM)
Revision: 0 Page: 56/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 93
R.E pulse counter read trouble
[Meaning] The difference is more than 1mm in reading the value of R.E twice.
Detection
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Application
[Symptom] Sudden stop during running.
[Explanation] In case the difference that is more than 1mm in reading the value of R.E twice, occurs more than 10 times, TCD 92 is detected. [Countermeasures] See the countermeasures of TCD 92.
Si210
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 94 [Meaning]
R.E pulse counter trouble In case that the case of changed value between R.E counter value read in current cycle and in the previous cycle exceeds 3 times, and this exceeded value is continued for 150ms, the trouble is detected.
[Explanation] • This can be generated when SPEC input is abnormal. • This will be detected, if specs, such as T/M, gear, and speed does not match.
Detection
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Revision: 0 Page: 57/103 Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. Check SPEC data from address 0100H ~ 0112H of control SPEC. (Refer to map of TCD 60) 2. Check if R.E is out of function. (Refer to TCD 92)
Revision: 0 Page: 58/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting Detection
TCD 95
R5SX OFF trouble (Safety line)
[Meaning]
Off detected from hoist way and safety circuit.
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. Enter A21E in KEYPAD of DOA-100, to check address 8011 and verify the data if it is x01. 2. Check voltage of each connector.
[Explanation]
• CA-15(DC 48V) SWD_I[VI_V48]
SWD_O[VO_ ROPE_GRIPPER]
SWD_I[VI_R5SX]
• GRS-01~02(GRS) , GRS-04~05(GSS) , GRS-07,08(OBS) check_out
• LSU-01~02(FLU) , LSD-01~02(FLD) 0x8010
TMC_Check(POWER_ READY_T, FINISH_STATE) check_out
0x8094
Coil[SW_SS_48V_ DOWN_HOLD]
0x8011
• Check voltage in sequence of Y1-02 ~ Y1-01 (SCS) AB-16, to verify if voltage is DC 48V ± 5%, and if there are no voltage detected, check the state of each switch.
r5sx_err_count > 3
TCD 95
3. In step 2, if 48V is detected in AB-16, but the data of address 8011 is x00, input circuit is abnormal. +1
r5sx_err_count
Revision: 0 Page: 59/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 96 [Meaning]
Detection
Operation mode input trouble In case of high speed signal and ON_CAR signal having input concurrent time, or no signal of operation being inputted at the same time.
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] DCL-241
P48V
CIN-02
NORMAL
RHIGH
[Explanation]
$82AD
TMC_Check(POWER_ READY_T,FINISH_STATE)
MAINT(INSPECTION)
TCD 200
TCD 202
ONC-02
RONCAR
check_out
$82AF CIN-03
check_out
CND_F_Op[CN_HIGH]
CND_F_Op[CN_IN_CAR]
$82AE input_err
T.O.C.I BOX
0x82AE
0x82AD
P48V [ In case of applying IN CAR Switch ]
CND_F_Op[CN_ON_CAR]
2
0x82AF
CND_F_Op[CN_IN_CAR]
RINCAR
1 OFF
2
3 NORMAL
DCL-241
CIN-02
CND_F_Op[CN_ON_CAR]
0x82AE
RHIGH $82AD
3
0x82AF
1
MAINT
CIN-03
RINCAR $82AE
CND_F_Op[CN_HIGH] 0x82AD
0x82AE
CND_F_Op[CN_ON_CAR]
CND_F_Op[CN_IN_CAR]
input_err
empty_err
990 msec
3060 msec
TMC_Check(OP_MODE_ERROR_ DETECT_T, FINISH_STATE) TMC_Check(MODE_INPUT_ERROR_ DETECT_T, FINISH_STATE)
empty_err
5
6 ON
5
4 MAINT
ONC-02
RONCAR $82AF
0x82AF
4 TMC_Start(OP_MODE_ ERROR_DETECT_T)
ON CAR SW
6 IN CAR MAINT SW
1. Enter A21E in DOA-100 KEYPAD, and check data of address 82AD,82AE and 82AF for each electric diagram. TMC_Start(MODE_INPUT_ ERROR_DETECT_T) TCD 96
2. Only one from above 3 input ports should be recognized as “H”. 3. 3. If there is no “H”, verify if ON CAR switch is positioned on ONCAR position and INCAR MAINT switch is not positioned on MAINT. 4. If there are two or more “H”, check the connection and voltage of each phase.
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 97
Detection
CDS trouble
[Meaning]
When CDS is inputted after DOLS operation, the trouble is detected.
[Explanation] Coil[SW_ GS_IS_STOP]
Coil[SW_FS_ MAINT]
CND_F_Op[CN_ IN_CAR]
CND_F_Op[CN_ ON_CAR]
0x82AE
0x82AF
0x929A
0x925D
Coil[SW_SV_ 1ST_FIRE]
Coil[SW_GS_ DOOR_ZONE]
Coil[DC_ CLOSE_CMD]
SWD_O [VO_R2OP]
0x8060
TCD 171
0x908E
0x9250
0x9274
TCD 188
SWD_I[VI_RDMC]
SWD_I[VI_LDS]
0x8083
check_out
0x802C
SWD_I[VI_DOLS] 0x802D
TMC_Check(R2CD_R2LD_ ERROR_DETECT_T,RUN_STATE)
check_out
SWD_I[VI_CDS]
0x802B
990 msec
TMC_Start(R2CD_R2LD_ ERROR_DETECT_T)
TMC_Check(R2CD_R2LD_ ERROR_DETECT_T, FINISH_STATE)
Coil[DC_DOLS] 0x90A6
SWD_I[VI_CDS] 0x802B
TCD 97
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Revision: 0 Page: 60/103 Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. If 0V±0.5V is detected when measuring voltage of Y2-03, CA-07 with DOLS, external condition is normal. 2. In case of 1, if LCD row 3 column 15 of DOA-100 is displayed 1, input section of DOC-1XX is normal. 3. After checking of 2, if LCD row 3 column 13 of DOA-100 is displayed 0, it is normal. If row 3 column 13 is 1, check voltage of CA-08(CDS). After DOLS, CDS switch is opened, so 0V must be displayed to be normal. 4. Check CDS switch of car if voltage of CA-08 level is 48V.
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 98
Detection
LDS trouble
[Meaning]
When LDS is inputted after DOLS operation, the trouble is detected.
[Explanation] Coil[SW_ GS_IS_STOP]
Coil[SW_FS_ MAINT]
CND_F_Op[CN_ IN_CAR]
CND_F_Op[CN_ ON_CAR]
0x82AE
0x82AF
0x929A
0x925D
Coil[SW_SV_ 1ST_FIRE]
Coil[SW_GS_ DOOR_ZONE]
Coil[DC_ CLOSE_CMD]
0x8060
TCD 171
0x908E
0x9250
0x9274
TCD 188
SWD_I[VI_RDMC]
SWD_O [VO_R2OP]
SWD_I[VI_LDS]
0x8083
0x802C
SWD_I[VI_DOLS] 0x802D
TMC_Check(R2CD_R2LD_ ERROR_DETECT_T,RUN_STATE)
check_out
SWD_I[VI_CDS]
0x802B
check_out
990 msec
TMC_Start(R2CD_R2LD_ ERROR_DETECT_T)
TMC_Check(R2CD_R2LD_ ERROR_DETECT_T, FINISH_STATE)
Coil[DC_DOLS] 0x90A6
SWD_I[VI_LDS] 0x802C
TCD 98
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Revision: 0 Page: 61/103 Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. If 0V±0.5V is detected when measuring voltage of Y2-03, CA-07 with DOLS, external condition is normal. 2. In case of 1, if LCD row 3 column 15 of DOA-100 is displayed 1, input section of DOC-1XX is normal. 3. After checking of 2, if LCD row 3 column 5 of DOA-100 is displayed into 0, it is normal. If row 3 column 5 is 1, check voltage of AB-15(LDS). After DOLS, LDS switch is opened, so 0V must be displayed to be normal. 4. Check LDS switch of hall if voltage of AB-15 level is 48V.
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 99 [Meaning]
Detection
Dual input signal trouble Different contact states of the same inputs between operation CPU and speed CPU exceeds for 300ms.
[Explanation] Bit of operation CPU input
main_in
Bit of speed CPU input
main_in
inv_in
inv_in
ICD_Dual_Input_Error 0x8106
ICD_Dual_Input_Error
err_count >= 7
TCD 99
0x8106 err_count ++
Trace Data Format b15
b14
b13
b12
b11
b10
b9
b8
HIGH
M/R
Maint b7 SD1D
b6
b5
b4
SD1U
LDC
DOLS
b3 R2LD
b2
b1
C1BR
C1ST
b0 R5SC
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Revision: 0 Page: 62/103 Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. Check trace data of TCD 99 by means of ‘A42E’ trace mode. 2. The meaning of each bit is as left table, in case that ‘1’ is set at one of bit, meaning of the bit is the reason of trouble.
Revision: 0 Page: 63/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 100 [Meaning]
Detection
SD1D ON trouble
[Explanation] It is detected when SD1D input does not enter when car is in bottom floor. TCD 78
Coil[SV_ FORCE_DECEL] 0x921D
Coil[SW_GS_ OPEN_ZONE] 0x9256
Coil[SW_SS_48V_ DOWN_HOLD]
TCD 114
ERD_Digi_Fl_Err
Coil[AC_OP_ FHM_MODE]
Coil[AC_OP_FHM_ START_MODE]
0x923C
0x9031
Coil[AC_OP_MAINT_MODE]
SWD_I[VI_LDC]
0x9030
0x9032
check_out
0x8025
Coil[IS_ZERO_V] 0x91F2
check_out
FTD_Current_Fl == SPD_Floor_Spec.Bottom
SWD_I[VI_SD1D] 0x8023
Application
Si210
[Countermeasures]
SD1D does not operate from bottom floor.
TCD 77
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
TCD 100
1. Check the value of address 8023 from MEMORY READ MODE, when car is not in bottom floor. If it is x00, it is normal. If it is x01, check voltage of LSD-05, LSD-06 and HA-02. They must have DC 48V. DC48V is normal, if not, check wiring and connection. 2. Check the value of address 8023 from MEMORY READ MODE when car is in bottom floor. If it is x01, it is normal. If it is x01, check voltage of LSD-06 and HA-02, and They must have DC 0V. 3. Check if SD switches works normally. 4. Check assembly condition of SD
Revision: 0 Page: 64/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 101
Detection
SD2D ON trouble
[Meaning]
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Application
[Countermeasures]
SD2D does not operate from bottom floor.
1. Check the value of address 8024 from MEMORY READ MODE, when car is not in bottom floor. If it is x00, it is normal. If it is x01, check voltage of LSD-07, LSD-08 and HA-03. They must have DC 48V. DC48V is normal, if not, check wiring and connection.
[Explanation] Detected only when the rated speed is 90m/min or more. Detected when SD2D input does not enter when car is on the bottom floor.
TCD 77
TCD 78
ERD_Digi_Fl_Err
TCD 114
2. Check the value of address 8024 from MEMORY READ MODE when car is in bottom floor. If it is x01, it is normal. If it is x01, check voltage of LSD-08 and HA-03, and They must have DC 0V. 3. Check if SD switches works normally.
Coil[SV_ FORCE_DECEL]
Coil[SW_SS_48V_ DOWN_HOLD]
0x921D
Coil[SW_GS_ OPEN_ZONE]
Coil[AC_OP_ FHM_MODE]
0x923C
Coil[AC_OP_MAINT_MODE] 0x9030
0x9256
Coil[AC_OP_FHM_ START_MODE]
0x9031
SWD_I[VI_LDC]
0x9032
check_out
0x8025
Coil[IS_ZERO_V] 0x91F2
check_out
Si210
FTD_Current_Fl == SPD_Floor_Spec.Bottom SWD_I[VI_SD2D] SPD_Control_Spec. Contract_Velocity >= 90
0x8024
TCD 101
4. Check assembly condition of SD
Revision: 0 Page: 65/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 107 [Meaning]
Detection
SD1U ON trouble
[Explanation] It is detected when SD1U input does not enter when car is in top floor.
TCD 78
Coil[SV_ FORCE_DECEL]
Coil[SW_SS_48V_ DOWN_HOLD]
Application
TCD 114
ERD_Digi_Fl_Err
Coil[AC_OP_ FHM_MODE]
Coil[AC_OP_FHM_ START_MODE]
1. Check the value of address 8021 from MEMORY READ MODE, when car is not in top floor. If it is x00, it is normal. If it is x01, check voltage of LSU-05, LSU-06 and HA-06. They must have DC 48V. DC48V is normal, if not, check wiring and connection. 2. Check the value of address 8023 from MEMORY READ MODE when car is in top floor. If it is x01, it is normal. If it is x01, check voltage of LSU-06 and HA-06, and They must have DC 0V. 3. Check if SD switch works normally. 4. Check assembly condition of SD.
0x921D
Coil[SW_GS_ OPEN_ZONE]
0x923C
0x9031
Coil[AC_OP_MAINT_MODE]
SWD_I[VI_LDC]
0x9030
0x9256
0x9032
check_out
0x8025
Coil[IS_ZERO_V] 0x91F2
check_out
FTD_Current_Fl == SPD_Floor_Spec.Top
SWD_I[VI_SD1U] 0x8021
Si210
[Countermeasures]
SD1U does not operate from bottom floor.
TCD 77
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
TCD 107
Revision: 0 Page: 66/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 108
Detection
SD2U ON trouble
[Meaning]
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Application
[Countermeasures]
SD2U does not operate from bottom floor.
1. Check the value of address 8022 from MEMORY READ MODE, when car is not in bottom floor. If it is x00, it is normal. If it is x01, check voltage of LSU-07, LSU-08 and HA-07. They must have DC 48V. DC48V is normal, if not, check wiring and connection.
[Explanation] Detected only when the rated speed is 90m/min or more. Detected when SD2U input does not enter when car is on the top floor.
TCD 77
TCD 114
ERD_Digi_Fl_Err
Coil[AC_OP_ FHM_MODE]
Coil[AC_OP_FHM_ START_MODE]
TCD 78
2. Check the value of address 8022 from MEMORY READ MODE when car is in bottom floor. If it is x01, it is normal. If it is x01, check voltage of LSU-08 and HA-07, and They must have DC 0V. 3. Check if SD switch works normally.
Coil[SV_ FORCE_DECEL]
Coil[SW_SS_48V_ DOWN_HOLD]
0x921D
Coil[SW_GS_ OPEN_ZONE]
0x923C
Coil[AC_OP_MAINT_MODE] 0x9030
0x9256
0x9031
SWD_I[VI_LDC]
0x9032
check_out
0x8025
Coil[IS_ZERO_V] 0x91F2
check_out
Si210
FTD_Current_Fl == SPD_Floor_Spec.Top SPD_Control_Spec. Contract_Velocity >= 90
SWD_I[VI_SD2U] 0x8022
TCD 108
4. Check assembly condition of SD.
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 114
Detection
POSI ON trouble (LDC)
[Meaning]
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Revision: 0 Page: 67/103 Application
Si210
[Countermeasures]
Detected POSI(LDC) ON/OFF trouble.
1. Inspect if NORMAL/ABNORMAL jumper is in correct position. In case of normal, #1-2, #4-5 pin to be connected. [Explanation] Coil[RS_RUNNING]
Coil[SW_FS_MAINT]
0x8025
0x929A
0x91B0
2. Check at door zone, if the value of 3rd row and 5th column of DOA-100 is ‘1’.
SWD_I[VI_LDC]
3. Check at no door zone, if the value of 3rd row and 5th column of DOA-100 is ‘0’.
Coil[SW_GS_LDC] 0x9251
Coil[SW_GS_OPEN_ZONE]
Coil[IS_CUR_V_10]
check_out
0x91EB
0x9256
check_out
2070 msec
TMC_Start(POSI_ OFF_ERR_T)
TMC_Check(POSI_OFF_ ERR_T,FINISH_STATE) TCD 114 POSI off error Coil[RS_RUNNING]
TCD 78
SWD_I[VI_C1ST]
SWD_I[VI_C1BR]
0x802A
0x8029
0x91B0
Coil[SV_FAST_MODE] Coil[IS_CUR_V_10]
Coil[AC_OP_ALP_MODE] check_out
0x9202
check_out
0x91EB
0x9041
SWD_I[VI_LDC] == old_LDC_state 0x8025
TMC_Reset(POSI_ON_ OFF_DETECT_T) TMC_Start(POSI_ON_ OFF_DETECT_T)
TMC_Check(POSI_ON_OFF_ DETECT_T,FINISH_STATE)
TCD 114 POSI on error
SWD_I[VI_LDC] 0x8025
old_LDC_state
4. Check the voltage between Y1-05 of DOM-100 and CA-10 of DOC-1XX. (with door zone, 0V is normal and without door zone, 48V is normal) 5. Check if POSI is defective.
Revision: 0 Page: 68/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 116
Detection
POSI ON trouble (LDU)
[Meaning]
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Application
Si210
[Symptom]
Detected POSI(LDU) ON/OFF trouble.
No problem for operation, but rope compensation function is unable. [Explanation] [Countermeasures] When LDU trouble is detected, rope compensation function would be cut. SPD_Function. Rope_Compen
TMC_Check(POWER_ READY_T,FINISH_STATE)
1. The trouble will be detected, when SPEC data in address 0016 is set, even if rope compensation is not applied.
SPD_I[SP_ FAC_INSPECT]
Coil{AC_OP_ MAINT_MODE]
2. Check if the input signal of LDU is activated normally. (Check by Memory Read Mode A21E, Address: 8027)
0x9030 TCD 78
tmp
TCD 79
Coil[IS_ZERO_V]
TCD 114
Coil[IS_ZONE_250]
SWD_I[VI_LDC]
0x9191
0x8025
0x91F2 SWD_I[VI_LDU]
check_out
SWD_I[VI_LDD]
0x8027 tmp
0x9191 SWD_I[VI_LDU]
tmp
Coil[IS_ ZONE_250]
0x9191
TCD 116
SWD_I[VI_LDC]
check_out
0x8025 SWD_I[VI_LDD]
0x8027
TCD 116 0x8028
SWD_I[VI_LDC]
SWD_I[VI_LDU] ^ old_ldc
Coil[IS_ CUR_V_30] 0x91EE
ldc_on_event
check_out
0x8028
Coil[IS_ZONE_250]
check_out
tmp
ldc_on_event
Coil[RS_ UP_RUN] SWD_I[VI_LDU] 0x91AE
TCD 116
0x8027
ldc_off_event Coil[RS_UP_RUN] SWD_I[VI_LDU]
TCD 116
0x8027 SWD_I[VI_LDC] 0x8025
old_ldc
3. Check the voltage between Y3-14 of DOM-100 and CB-03 of DOC-1XX. (B contact) 48V: LDU off, 0V: LDU on. 4. Replace LDU, if LDU POSI is defective.
Revision: 0 Page: 69/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 117
Detection
POSI ON trouble (LDD)
[Meaning]
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Application
Si210
[Symptom]
Detected POSI(LDD) ON/OFF trouble.
No problem for operation, but rope compensation function is unable. [Explanation] [Countermeasures] When LDD trouble is detected, rope compensation function would be cut. SPD_Function. Rope_Compen
TMC_Check(POWER_ READY_T,FINISH_STATE)
1. The trouble will be detected, when SPEC data in address 0016 is set, even if rope compensation is not applied.
SPD_I[SP_ FAC_INSPECT]
Coil{AC_OP_ MAINT_MODE]
2. Check if the input signal of LDD is activated normally. (Check by Memory Read Mode A21E, Address: 8028)
0x9030 TCD 78
tmp
TCD 79
Coil[IS_ZERO_V]
SWD_I[VI_LDC]
0x9191
0x8025
0x91F2
check_out
SWD_I[VI_LDU]
TCD 117
0x8028 SWD_I[VI_LDC]
Coil[IS_ZONE_250] 0x9191
check_out
0x8025 SWD_I[VI_LDD]
0x8027
TCD 117 0x8028
SWD_I[VI_LDC]
SWD_I[VI_LDU] ^ old_ldc
check_out
SWD_I[VI_LDD]
0x8027 tmp
tmp
Coil[IS_ZONE_250]
SWD_I[VI_LDU]
check_out
TCD 114
ldc_on_event
ldc_off_event tmp
Coil[IS_ ZONE_250]
0x9191
Coil[IS_ CUR_V_30]
Coil[RS_ ldc_on_event DOWN_RUN]
SWD_I[VI_LDD]
TCD 117
0x8028
0x91EE
ldc_off_event Coil[RS_DOWN_RUN] SWD_I[VI_LDD]
TCD 117
0x91AF SWD_I[VI_LDC] 0x8025
old_ldc
3. Check the voltage between Y3-15 of DOM-100 and CB-04 of DOC-1XX. (B contact) 48V: LDD off, 0V: LDD on. 4. Replace LDD, if LDD POSI is defective.
Revision: 0 Page: 70/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 119
Detection
SLOW DOWN S/W trouble
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Application
[Meaning] Detect Slow Down Switch OFF trouble
[Countermeasures]
[Explanation]
1. Check the connection of SDS. If normal (SDS closed), check below. LSD-06 (SD1D) is to be 48V LSD-08 (SD2D) is to be 48V LSU-06 (SD1U) is to be 48V LSU-08 (SD2U) is to be 48V
ERD_SDS_Off_Error
Coil[SW_GS_IS_STOP] TCD 119
2. Check if SDS switch works normally. 3. Check assembly condition of SDS. TCD 119 will occur when car is in stop. Condition of detecting ERD_SDS_Off_Error 1. In case forced slow down occurs 2. Excluding top and bottom floor, SD1U, SD2U are activated during operation for 540msec and more. 3. Excluding top and bottom floor, SD1D, SD2D are activated during operation for 540msec and more. 4. Excluding top floor, SD1U is activated at door zone for 540msec and more. 5. Excluding bottom floor, SD1D is activated at door zone for 540msec and more.
Si210
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 125
Detection
Brake open trouble
[Meaning]
When speed command is more than 10m/min but real speed is 8m/min or less, and this continues more than 3 sec. The trouble will be detected.
[Explanation] SWD_I[VI_C1BR]
Coil[IS_CMD_V_10]
0x8029
Coil[IS_CUR_V_8]
0x91E3
Coil[AC_OP_ALP_MODE] 0x9041
0x91EA
Coil[RS_DECELERATION] 0x91BE
Coil[RS_ROPE_ COMPEN_REQUEST]
0x91A8
Coil[RS_ROPE_COMPEN_RUN] 0x92A8
0x91B5
Coil[IS_CMD_V_8]
Coil[IS_CUR_V_1]
0x91E2
0x91E9
Coil[A_ALP_RUN_PERMIT]
Coil[AC_OP_ALP_MODE]
0x9041
Coil[SW_ALP_DIR_DECISION] check_out
0x9062
check_out
TMC_Check(BREAK_OFF_ DETECT_T,FINISH_STATE)
0x92BC
3060 msec
TMC_Start(BREAK_ OFF_DETECT_T)
TCD125
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Revision: 0 Page: 71/103 Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. Refer to TCD 86. 2. Check assembly condition of Brake if it works normally. 3. Check the disconnection of Rotary Encoder. See TCD 92.
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 130 [Meaning]
Load detector input trouble It will be detected in Input trouble of Load detector Potential meter (PTM)
Detection
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Revision: 0 Page: 72/103 Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. Perform ‘No Load Point Setting’ (A61E) and ‘Full Load Point Setting’ (A62E). - ‘No Load Point Setting’ is priority.
[Explanation] Detected load by load detector exceeds 135% or is under -25%, and either condition continues for 2 sec. and more.
[Condition] Make high speed operation unable with door opening.
2. Check if channel value of each PTM shows on 3rd row normally. - Car load mode (A86E)
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 132 [Meaning]
Detection
Door open lock detection
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Revision: 0 Page: 73/103 Application
Si210
DOLS signal does not go in within 10 sec. after open command and if this condition repeats 3 times, the trouble will be detected.
Door open lock detected
[Countermeasures] [Explanation] Coil[RS_ RUNNING]
Coil[DC_DOLS]
0x91B0
ERD_Door_Err
0x9050
0x923C
0x9082
0x90A6
Coil[A_AUTO_ DOOR_CLOSE]
Coil[SW_SS_48V_ DOWN_HOLD]
Coil[DC_DCO]
Coil[SW_GS_ OPEN_ZONE]
SWD_O[VO_R2OP]
check_out
0x8083
0x9256
TMC_Check(OPEN_LOCK_DETECT_T,FINISH_STATE) check_out (OPEN_LOCK_DETECT _T).Spec = 4000 0x8083
(OPEN_LOCK_DETECT _T).Spec = 10000
TMC_Check(OPEN_LOCK_ DETECT_T,FINISH_STATE)
TMC_Start(OPEN_ LOCK_DETECT_T) Open_Trouble_Count < 3 TMC_Start(OPEN_ LOCK_DETECT_T) Open_Trouble_Count++ TMC_Reset(OPEN_ LOCK_DETECT_T)
Open_Trouble_Count >= 3
TCD 132
1. Check door operating. In case that door can’t operate due to a foreign substance on sill, remove it. 2. Check if DMC CUT of DOR-131 & apparatus box is placed on NORMAL. 3. Check open command signal. If data of 2nd row & 13th column of annunciator is ‘1’, open command is energizing. Check if the volt of CA-01 is 0.7V±0.1V. Check the connection & wiring, if the data is ‘0’ and the volt of CA-07 is 0V±0.1V. 4. If LED of R2LD relay isn’t off. Check the volt of AB-15 (LDS) & CA-08 (CDS). When door is opened, the volt of AB-15 & CA-08 should be 0V level. 5. When door is opened completely, check if data of 3rd row & 15th column of annunciator is ‘1’. ‘1’ is normal. 6. If the volt of CA-07 is 48V±10%, check the condition of DOLS contactor. When door is opened, check LD5 (OLS/CLS) of DCD PCB is turned on. (LED is on in normal) 7. Check if RDZ relay operates normally. LED of the relay should be turned on with door zone and off without door zone.
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 133 [Meaning]
Open_Lock repeated trouble TCD132 occurs 3 times in series
Detection
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
[Countermeasures] Refer to TCD132.
[Explanation] If TCD132 occurs, it tries to open door of another floor after moving to another floor. But if TCD132 occurs 3 times in series, ‘Open Lock repeated trouble’ will occurs. The elevator keeps hall/car call unable and stops operation.
Revision: 0 Page: 74/103 Application
Si210
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 134 [Meaning]
Detection
Door close lock detection
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Revision: 0 Page: 75/103 Application
Si210
Door does not close within 10 sec. after close command, the trouble will be detected.
Door close lock detected
[Countermeasures] [Explanation] Coil[A_AUTO_ DOOR_CLOSE]
Coil[SW_GS_ DOOR_ZONE]
Coil[IS_ZERO_V]
0x9250
0x91F2
0x9050
Coil[DC_DCO]
ERD_Door_Err
0x9082
SWD_I[VI_CDS]
SWD_O[VO_R2CL]
check_out
0x8684
0x802B
Coil[DC_F_CLS]
Coil[SW_SV_2ND_FIRE]
0x90B5
0x9275
SWD_I[VI_LDS] 0x802C
TMC_Check(CLOSE_LOCK_ DETECT_T,FINISH_STATE)
TCD 135
Coil[DC_DOLS] TMC_Check(FORCE_ OPEN_T,FINISH_STATE)
0x90A6
Coil[SW_GS_ OPEN_ZONE] 0x9256
With NUGING : 20 sec Without NUGING : 10 sec
check_out
TMC_Check(CLOSE_LOCK_ DETECT_T,FINISH_STATE)
close_lock_count >= 2
TMC_Start (CLOSE_ LOCK_DETECT_T) close_lock_count ++
TCD 134
1. Check door operating. In case that door can’t operate due to a foreign substance on sill, remove it. 2. Check if DMC CUT switch of DOR-131 & apparatus box is placed on NORMAL. 3. Check close command signal. If data of 2nd row & 14th column of annunciator is ‘1’, close command is energizing. Check if the volt of CA-02 is 0.7V±0.1V. 4. If LED of R2LD relay isn’t off. Check the volt of AB-15 (LDS) & CA-08 (CDS). When door is closed, the volt of AB-15 & CA-08 should be 48V level. 5. When door is closed, check if data of 3rd row & 12th (LDS) & 13th (CDS) column of annunciator is ‘1’. ‘1’ is normal. 6. If 12th (LDS) is ‘0’, check the volt of AB-15 and condition of landing door. If 13th (CDS) is ‘0’, check the volt of CA-08 and condition of car door. 7. Check if data of 3rd row & 14th column of annunciator is ‘1’. ‘1’ is normal. 8. Check the condition of DCLS contactor. When door is closed, check LD5 (OLS/CLS) of DCD PCB is turned on. (LED is on in normal) 9. Check if RDZ relay operates normally. LED of the relay should be turned on with door zone and off without door zone.
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 135 [Meaning]
Close_Lock repeated trouble TCD134 occurs 12 times (can be changed by SPEC) in series
Detection
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
[Countermeasures] Refer to TCD134.
[Explanation] 1. TCD134 occurs 12 times in series. 2. Detecting number can be changed by SPEC DATA. Address 0x0714 is for detecting number. (If the value is 12 or less, minimum 12 will be considered for the detecting number) 3. Detecting number of TCD134 is 2.
Revision: 0 Page: 76/103 Application
Si210
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 136 [Meaning]
ALP trouble When ALP control panel is out of order.
Detection
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Revision: 0 Page: 77/103 Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. Check if the condition of ALP is normal by annunciator of ALP. 2. Refer to ALP manual.
[Explanation] In case of power failure, elevator must go to door zone by the power of ALP, but elevator isn’t operable due to abnormal condition. Abnormal condition 1. Operation unable due to R5SC off. 2. Operation unable due to floor error. 3. Operation unable due to abnormal signal from DSP. 4. In case that the speed exceeds designated speed.
Revision: 0 Page: 78/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 140 [Meaning]
Discharging voltage of Backup Battery under reference NVRAM is abnormal
Detection
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Application
[Countermeasures] 1. Check if Backup Battery is normal.
[Explanation] This trouble is caused by abnormal & disconnection of Backup Battery. This trouble doesn’t hinder elevator operating. It will be returned to normal after rescue operation to bottom floor.
2. Check the voltage of the battery. If it is under 3.0V, replace the battery.
Si210
Revision: 0 Page: 79/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 141 [Meaning]
Clock chip trouble When RTC chip doesn’t operate well, the trouble occurs.
Detection
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Application
[Countermeasures] 1. Perform ‘RTC set’ by ‘A69E’.
[Explanation] In case that RTC chip is abnormal, the trouble occurs. This trouble doesn’t hinder elevator operating.
2. Check the voltage of the battery. If it is under 3.0V, replace the battery. 3. Replace DOC-1XX.
Si210
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 145
INV. Door CPU WDT trouble
[Meaning]
In case that the connection between apparatus box & DCL-24X is abnormal.
[Explanation] The connection between TERM-01 and DRIN-01 is disconnected.
Detection
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Revision: 0 Page: 80/103 Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. Check if the connection between TERM-01 and DRIN-01 is disconnected.
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 146 [Meaning]
Air-conditioner Float S/W trouble Float switch is still activated even after drain operation for 1 min.
Detection
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
[Countermeasures] 1. Check the float switch.
[Explanation] 1. This trouble doesn’t hinder elevator operating even if the trouble occurs. 2. Air-conditioner will not operate by this trouble.
Revision: 0 Page: 81/103 Application
Si210
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 147 [Meaning]
Detection
OBS detection The signal of LDC keep off for 20~45 sec. at on position during high speed operation. (Detecting time is depend on floor height)
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Revision: 0 Page: 82/103 Application
Si210
[Condition] This is hold type, so cut safety line and keep elevator inoperable.
[Explanation] SPD_Function .OBS_Operation
Coil[RS_ RUNNING]
SWD_I[VI_C1ST]
0x91B0
SWD_I[VI_C1BR]
Coil[SW_ALP_ DIR_DECISION]
Coil[SW_FS_HIGH]
0x9032
0x92BC
0x9296
Coil[AC_OP_ FHM_MODE]
0x9E8
check_out
Coil[AC_OP_ ALP_MODE]
0x9031
0x9033
0x8029
0x802A
Coil[AC_OP_FHM_ START_MODE]
Coil[IS_ CUR_V_0]
Coil[AC_OP_ SAFETY_DRIVE_MODE]
Coil[SW_FS_ HIGH_DETECT] 0x9297
Coil[AC_OP_LOWEST_ FLOOR_SLOW]
0x9041
check_out
0x9040
TMC_Resett(OBS_ LDC_ON_DETECT_T)
TMC_Start(OBS_ LDC_ON_DETECT_T) TMC_Check(OBS_LDC_ON_ DETECT_T,FINISH_STATE)
SWD_I[VI_LDC]
1. Reset the system by means of reset button on DOC-1XX, and move the elevator by slow speed. 2. Check the condition of RDZ relay of DOC-1XX. - If elevator is with door zone, LED of relay is to be off. - If elevator is without door zone, LED of relay is to be on. 3. Check if RDZ relay is mounted on the socket correctly.
SWD_I[VI_LDC] == old_LDC_state 0x8025
[Countermeasures]
TCD147
old_LDC_state
4. Check if POSi is correct. If it is incorrect, replace it.
Revision: 0 Page: 83/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 150
Detection
SD1D Over Speed detection
[Meaning] Over speed is detected at SD1D zone and emergency stop.
[Explanation] 1. In case that the condition of forced deceleration is detected. (Coil[SV_FORCE_DECEL] = ON) >> The speed is 15m/min higher than the command at where SD1D is activated. And if this condition keeps for 150 msec. and more, the trouble is detected. But, if the speed is less than 30 m/min, No trouble is detected. 2. In case that the condition of forced deceleration is not detected. ( Coil[SV_FORCE_DECEL] = OFF ) 1) 60m/min >> If the speed is higher than limit speed below according to regular speed at where SD1D is activated, the trouble will be detected. 2) 90m/min and higher >> If the speed is higher than limit speed below according to regular speed at where SD1D is activated and this condition keeps for 150 msec. and more, the trouble will be detected. Regular speed Limit speed
60 m/min
90 m/min
105 m/min
57.6 m/min
87.0 m/min
102.0 m/min
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. When SD1D is activated, check the volt of HA-02. Normal: 48V → 0V. 2. When SD1D is activated, check address 0x8023 by MEMORY READ MODE (A21E) Normal: ‘00’ → ‘01’. 3. Check the assembly condition of SD1D. If necessary, adjust it.
Speed
60 m/min
90 m/min
Distance
1000 mm
1400 mm
105 m/min 1800 mm
* Above distance is from ‘0’ level of bottom floor to the center of switch roller.
Revision: 0 Page: 84/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 151
Detection
SD2D Over Speed detection
[Meaning] Over speed is detected at SD2D zone and emergency stop.
[Explanation] 1. In case that the condition of forced deceleration is detected. (Coil[SV_FORCE_DECEL] = ON) >> The speed is 15m/min higher than the command at where SD2D is activated. And if this condition keeps for 150 msec. and more, the trouble is detected. But, if the speed is less than 30 m/min, No trouble is detected. 2. In case that the condition of forced deceleration is not detected. ( Coil[SV_FORCE_DECEL] = OFF ) >> If the speed is higher than limit speed below according to regular speed at where SD2D is activated and this condition keeps for 150 msec. and more, the trouble will be detected.
Regular speed
90 m/min
105 m/min
Limit speed
87.6 m/min
102.6 m/min
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. When SD2D is activated, check the volt of HA-03. Normal: 48V → 0V. 2. When SD2D is activated, check address 0x8024 by MEMORY READ MODE (A21E) Normal: ‘00’ → ‘01’. 3. Check the assembly condition of SD2D. If necessary, adjust it.
Speed
90 m/min
105 m/min
Distance
2000 mm
2700 mm
* Above distance is from ‘0’ level of bottom floor to the center of switch roller.
Revision: 0 Page: 85/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 157
Detection
SD1U Over Speed detection
[Meaning] Over speed is detected at SD1D zone and emergency stop.
[Explanation] 1. In case that the condition of forced deceleration is detected. (Coil[SV_FORCE_DECEL] = ON) >> The speed is 15m/min higher than the command at where SD1U is activated. And if this condition keeps for 150 msec. and more, the trouble is detected. But, if the speed is less than 30 m/min, No trouble is detected. 2. In case that the condition of forced deceleration is not detected. ( Coil[SV_FORCE_DECEL] = OFF ) 1) 60m/min >> If the speed is higher than limit speed below according to regular speed at where SD1U is activated, the trouble will be detected. 2) 90m/min and higher >> If the speed is higher than limit speed below according to regular speed at where SD1U is activated and this condition keeps for 150 msec. and more, the trouble will be detected. Regular speed Limit speed
60 m/min
90 m/min
105 m/min
57.6 m/min
87.0 m/min
102.0 m/min
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. When SD1U is activated, check the volt of HA-06. Normal: 48V → 0V. 2. When SD1U is activated, check address 0x8021 by MEMORY READ MODE (A21E) Normal: ‘00’ → ‘01’. 3. Check the assembly condition of SD1U. If necessary, adjust it.
Speed
60 m/min
90 m/min
Distance
1000 mm
1400 mm
105 m/min 1800 mm
* Above distance is from ‘0’ level of top floor to the center of switch roller.
Revision: 0 Page: 86/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 158
Detection
SD2U Over Speed detection
[Meaning] Over speed is detected at SD2U zone and emergency stop.
[Explanation] 1. In case that the condition of forced deceleration is detected. (Coil[SV_FORCE_DECEL] = ON) >> The speed is 15m/min higher than the command at where SD2U is activated. And if this condition keeps for 150 msec. and more, the trouble is detected. But, if the speed is less than 30 m/min, No trouble is detected. 2. In case that the condition of forced deceleration is not detected. ( Coil[SV_FORCE_DECEL] = OFF ) >> If the speed is higher than limit speed below according to regular speed at where SD2U is activated and this condition keeps for 150 msec. and more, the trouble will be detected.
Regular speed
90 m/min
105 m/min
Limit speed
87.6 m/min
102.6 m/min
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. When SD2U is activated, check the volt of HA-07. Normal: 48V → 0V. 2. When SD2U is activated, check address 0x8022 by MEMORY READ MODE (A21E) Normal: ‘00’ → ‘01’. 3. Check the assembly condition of SD2U. If necessary, adjust it.
Speed
90 m/min
105 m/min
Distance
2000 mm
2700 mm
* Above distance is from ‘0’ level of top floor to the center of switch roller.
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 164 [Meaning]
Detection
Emergency stop detection Emergency stop detected, elevator is suddenly stopped during run with more than 10m/min speed by the trouble in relation to R/E.
[Explanation]
run_stop
Coil[RS_RUNNING] 0x91B0
Coil[IS_CUR_V_10]
TCD 164
0x91EE
TCD 92
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Revision: 0 Page: 87/103 Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. Check whether MAINT(Inspection) switch has been operated during driving. 2. Verify whether switch and connectors in PCB have had bad contacts. 3. Check if R/E is disconnected. 4. Check if LDS &CDS operate normally. 5. Check the state of R5SC relay. 6. Check the state of ALARM LED. 7. Check the flickering state of SYS1 LED inside DOC-1XX. 8. Check the flickering state of SYS2 LED inside DOC-1XX. 9. Check if safety switches are activated. (Man-hole, pit, SCS)
TCD 93
* In case of emergency stop with 10m/min speed and more The reason can be analyzed by ERROR LOG Table (A42E) - Trace monitor
TCD 94
Coil[RS_RUNNING] 0x91B0
run_stop
* In case of emergency stop with 5m/min ~ 10m/min speed The reason can be analyzed by A28E.
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 168 [Meaning]
Detection
Speed difference (real speed detection) When the speed difference between command & real is more than 30m/min, the trouble is detected.
[Explanation] Coil[IS_CUR_V_15]
Coil[IS_CMD_V_15]
0x91EC
0x91E4
SWD_I[VI_C1ST] 0x802A
check_out
0x9206
0x8080
SWD_I[VI_R5SC]
TCD 164
Coil[SV_INV_SW_FAIL]
0x8001
0x9210
SWD_I[VI_C1BR] SWD_I[VI_LDS] SWD_I[VI_CDS] 0x8029
Coil[SV_DDLP_CMD]
SWD_O[VO_C1BR]
0x802C
0x802B
abs(SVD_Cmd_V - SVD_Cur_V) >= 30
SVD_Cmd_V < SVD_Cur_V
Coil[RS_FAST_ RUN_COMMAND]
check_out
0x91B1
speed_err_count ++
speed_err_count > 3
speed_err_count
TCD 168
speed_err_count > 12 TCD 168
check_out
=0
speed_err_count
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Revision: 0 Page: 88/103 Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. Refer to TCD 60 and check if SPEC is correct in accordance with the field. 2. Check if brake open & close as its function. 3. Check disconnection of Rotary Encoder (AD Connect). Refer to TCD 92. 4. Check balancing rate between car & C.WT. (It must be within 0.45 ~ 0.55)
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 170 [Meaning]
Detection
Operation direction trouble
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Revision: 0 Page: 89/103 Application
Si210
[Condition]
When abnormal operating direction is detected.
DIR LED(Red) would be lighting.
[Explanation]
[Countermeasures]
Coil[IS_CUR_V_8]
Coil[RS_RUNNING]
check_out
0x91B0
0x91EA
540 msec check_out
Coil[RS_UP_RUN]
enco_diff < 0 TMC_Start(DIR_ ERROR_DETECT_T)
0x91AE
Coil[RS_DOWN_RUN]
enco_diff > 0
0x91AF
TMC_Reset(DIR_ ERROR_DETECT_T)
SWD_Emergency_Call
TMC_Check((DIR_ERROR_ DETECT_T, FINISH_STATE)
TCD170
ICC_Set_Sys_Output_Port (RE_DIR_ERROR, ON)
1. Check if DIR LED is on. 2. If DIR LED is on, change the position of DIR jumper in DOC-1XX. 3. Switch to MAINT(Inspection) operation, and perform UP/DOWN operation for a little while, to check right/reverse matter in operating direction. In reverse, change DIR jumper in DOC-1XX. 4. When rerunning, make sure to reset. 5. Verify if BIT 8 of SPEC1 is OFF. 6. Still no effect, change 2-phases of MOTOR output line.
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 171 [Meaning]
Detection
Synchronous position trouble
[Countermeasures] *Trouble shooting procedure Use ERROR LOG TABLE(A42E) on annuciator. Check information of TCD171 on Trace Data display Change 4 Byte to Bit (3rd row, 13th~16th column) to check. Each Bit shows the reason of the trouble(7~0 Bit is available)
-
7
6
5
4
Backup SDS Direction Speed error in error in RAM Over power power error Speed failure
failure
Si210
1. If CP is normal and elevator stops due to power failure, the elevator goes down to bottom floor with ACD=0B and then transfer to ACD=27. 2. If TCD171 occurs after power off/on and 7, 5, 4 Bit is set 1) Check backup battery on DOC-1XX is normal. 2) If the volt of backup battery is less than 3.0V, replace it. 4. In case that 6 Bit is set, Check the trouble concerning SDS Refer to TCD150, 151, 157, 158. 5. In case that 0 Bit is set, 1) Refer to POSI OFF(TCD 114). 2) Check if elevator is moved by brake opening in power off.
When floor information is lost, the trouble is detected.
..
Application
[Countermeasures]
Synchronous position trouble detected
[Explanation]
15
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Revision: 0 Page: 90/103
3
2
1
0
-
-
-
Level 500mm
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 177 [Meaning]
Detection
Emergency stop occurred frequently It is detected that the failures of high speed running prohibited have occurred 12 times within 10 min
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Revision: 0 Page: 91/103 Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. Check Error Log Table by A42E, find out the trouble occurred frequently and perform trouble shooting.
[Explanation] It is hold type, prohibit operation by R5SCafter opening door at door zone
old_fast_run_cut
Coil[EM_EO_ FAST_RUN_CUT] 0x90F4
Coil[AC_OP_ MAINT_MODE]
+1
0x9030
+1
E_Stop_10M_Count >= 12
Coil[EM_EO_FAST_RUN_CUT] 0x90F4
E_Stop_Count[9]
E_Stop_10M_Count
TCD 177
old_fast_run_cut
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 178 [Meaning]
Detection
Safety drive occurred frequently Detected that rescue running have occurred more than 6 times within 10 min.
[Explanation] It is hold type, prohibit operation by R5SCafter opening door at door zone Coil[SW_FS_SAFETY_DRIVE_DETECT]
tmp
0x92A8
old_safety_drive
tmp
Coil[AC_OP_MAINT_MODE]
+1
S_Drv_Count[9]
+1
S_Drv_10M_Count
0x9030
tmp
old_safety_drive
Coil[SW_GS_IS_STOP]
S_Drv_10M_Count >= 6
0x925D
SWD_I[VI_LDC] 0x8025
TCD 178
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Revision: 0 Page: 92/103 Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. Door Zone 외에 정지하는 원인을 찾는다. 2. 주행 중에 비상 정지하는 경우는 Error Log Table 참조한다. 3. 착상 시 Door Zone에 못 미치거나 지나쳐서 정지하는 경우는 SPEC의 착상 제어용 파라메터 설정이 바르게 되어 있는지 확인 한다. ( Pgc_Gain → ADDR:0x0212 ) 1. Search the reason for stopping out of door zone. 2. If stopping during running, refer to the error log table, 3. When below-stopping or over-stopping during leveling occurs verify whether parameter setting for the control of leveling is light. (Pgc_Gain → ADDR:0x0212)
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 182 [Meaning]
Operation over duty trouble Count number of brake opening, if it is 180 times in 1 hour.
Detection
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Revision: 0 Page: 93/103 Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] Stop at door zone with door opened for 10 min., and return normal operation automatically.
[Explanation] Stop elevator in order to protect brake coil for 10 min..
[Condition] Stand by 10 min. after door open at door zone.
Revision: 0 Page: 94/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 184 [Meaning]
SDS forced deceleration occurred frequently Forced deceleration occurs 3 times in series.
Detection
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. Check if Slow Down S/W works normally. 2. Check if assembly condition of Slow Down S/W is correct.
[Explanation] Elevator lands at top or bottom floor by forced deceleration in case that the distance between landing level & SDS roller is farther than installation distance when SDS is activated. If above condition occurs 3 times, high speed operation is cut with door opened at door zone, TCD184 is appeared and system holds the trouble.
Installation distance
60 m/ min
90 m/ min
105 m/ min
SD1U(D)
1000 mm
1400 mm
1800 mm
SD2U(D)
x
2000 mm
2700 mm
3. If the allowance is 50mm higher, adjust Slow Down S/W again.
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 188 [Meaning]
Detection
OLS trouble OLS is abnormal In case that OLS is activated for 1080 msec. When CLS & CDS is activated, the trouble is detected.
[Explanation] SWD_I[VI_CDS] Coil[DC_F_CLS] SWD_I[VI_DOLS] SWD_I[VI_RDMC] ERD_Door_Err 0x90B5
0x802B
Coil[AC_OP_ MAINT_MODE]
0x802D
Coil[SW_SS_48V_ DOWN_HOLD]
Coil[AC_OP_FIRE_ FIGHTING_MODE]
0x8060
Coil[SW_GS_ POWER_READY] Coil[DC_DCPU]
Coil[AC_OP_ FIRE_MODE]
Coil[SW_SV_ 1ST_FIRE]
Coil[AC_OP_ FIREMAN_MODE]
check_out
Coil[SW_SV_ 2ND_FIRE]
check_out
TMC_Check(OLS_ERROR_ DETECT_T,FINISH_STATE)
TCD97
1080 msec
TMC_Start(OLS_ ERROR_DETECT_T)
Coil[SW_GS_DOOR_ZONE]
TCD 188
0x9250
SWD_I[VI_CDS] 0x802B
SWD_I[VI_DOLS] 0x802D
TCD97
R
TCD 188
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Revision: 0 Page: 95/103 Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. Check if door PCB is normal. 2. Check CDS(13th column), CLS(14th), & OLS(15th) of 3rd row on annunciator. (If Bit is 1, switch is activated) 3. Check the volt CA-07 on DOC-1XX, Y2-03 on DOM-100, & PJ1-13 on door PCB. If OLS is activated : 0V If OLS is not activated: 48V 4. Check if wiring & connecting is correct.
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 192 [Meaning]
Door position trouble Door trouble
Detection
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Revision: 0 Page: 96/103 Application
[Countermeasures] 1. Check if thermal, voltage, & current are normal. 2. Replace DCD-21X.
[Explanation] In case of the trouble of door thermal, under voltage, over voltage & current, TCD192 occurs.
Si210
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 200 [Meaning]
Detection
CNET LON communication trouble DPRAM communication between Main LON and i186 does not operate
[Explanation] I186EC_Port3_Input & 0x20
*SYS_INPUT_PORT & 0x10
Coil[VALID_186_TOKEN]
Coil[VALID_186_TOKEN]
+1
err_count
0x9300
err_count > 5
*SYS_INPUT_PORT & 0x04
[Condition] LON LED on DOC-1XX will light off.
TCD 200
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Revision: 0 Page: 97/103 Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. If the trouble isn’t disappeared after system reset is done on DOC-1XX, Check if ROM(OS ROM) of DOC-1XX & ROM Main LON are mounted correctly. 2. If the trouble isn’t disappeared after performing 1 item above, Replace ROM(OS ROM) of DOC-1XX & ROM Main LON. 3. Replace DOC-1XX even if nothing is improved after performing item 2 above.
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 202
Detection
Car communication trouble
[Meaning]
Car LON communication trouble on main OPB( OPB ID = 1 )
[Explanation] CND_OPB_Node_State & 0x01
TCD 202
* TCD 202 is detected on MAIN LON and write in DPRAM. variable of appropriate data is read and saved is CND_OPB_Node_State.
[Condition] LON LED of DOC-1XX or LED of DCL-24X is flickering with 1.2 sec. cycle
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Revision: 0 Page: 98/103 Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. Check the ON/OFF state of LON LED in DOC-1XX (0.06 sec. cycle when normal). 2. Check the ON/OFF state of DCL-24X LED (0.2 sec. cycle when normal). 3. Verify if the connector(SC) for LON communication is normally connected. 4. Verify if OPB ID is 1 (DIP 1 ‘ON’). 5. Verify if DCS-24X has a terminal resistor(DIP 8) set. 6. Measure the resistance between pins No. 1, 2 of SC connector. If it is approximately 10 OHM, normal. If there is no resistance, check for disconnection. 7. Replace ROM(OS ROM) of DOC-1XX & ROM Main LON. 8. Replace DCL-24X. 9. Replace DOC-1XX.
Revision: 0 Page: 99/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 211 [Meaning]
Other elevator trouble Communication error with other car is detected in duplex operation.
[Explanation] 1. In duplex, In case there is no transmission data for 1 sec. from other elevator, the trouble occurs. 2. When G/A transmission from other is failed 4 times in series, the trouble occurs.
Detection
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. In case of duplex, No.1 of the SPEC1(DIP S/W) must be on. In case of simplex, it must be off. 2. Check the condition of communication line between 2 elevators. The communication line must be a shield wire. 3. Check if terminal resistor(HJP-SH Jumper) is connected. In case of figure below, don’t connect terminal resistor of No. 1 but No. 2. No. 1
No. 2
HJP SH
SH
SL
HJP SH SL
DHG-16X
DHG-16X
DHG-16X
SH
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 217 [Meaning]
Detection
Hall button jam detection When hall button is being pushed continuously, the trouble is detected.
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Revision: 0 Page: 100/103 Application
[Countermeasures] 1. Check the floor where button jam is detected. The floor can be checked by ‘A21E’.
[Explanation]
2. If abnormal, replace the button.
When hall button is being pushed for the time(Default :180 sec.) that is designated by SPEC, TCD 217 will occur. Button_Jam_Detect[0][UP_INDX]
TCD 217
Button_Jam_Detect[0][DN_INDX]
The floor button Jam detected Address
Floor
0x9954
1st floor ~ 8th floor UP Button
0x9955
9th floor ~ 16th floor UP Button
0x9956
17th floor ~ 24th floor UP Button
0x9957
25th floor ~ 32nd floor UP Button
0x9958
1st floor ~ 8th floor DOWN Button
0x9959
9th floor ~ 16th floor DOWN Button
0x995A
17th floor ~ 24th floor DOWN Button
0x995B
25th floor ~ 32nd floor DOWN Button
Each floor is matched with each Bit.
Si210
Revision: 0 Page: 101/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 223
Detection
Hall nod trouble (More than 1)
[Meaning] 1 or more communication trouble on DHG-16X, detected.
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. Check the floor of communication not activated by ANN - A21E and the type of button to check DHG-16X of the failed floor for failure.
[Explanation] HND_Fail_Node[ 0 ]
TCD 223
0x8762
* HND_Fail_Node : 4Byte( 32bit ) If transmission failures to the appropriate floor of the appropriate type of button occur 3 times or more, set it to ‘1’.
Address
Floor
0x8762
1st floor ~ 8th floor
0x8763
9th floor ~ 16th floor
0x8764
17th floor ~ 24th floor
0x8765
25th floor ~ 32nd floor
Each floor is matched with each Bit. Ex) ADDR:0x8762 - DATA:0x04 means 3rd floor is out of order.
[Checking of hall button trouble] Enter as below on annunciator K: A21E ADDR:DAT K : 8762E If 8762=x02(0000 0010) DFG-16X of 2nd floor is failure. If 8762 =x30(0011 0000) DFG-16X of 5th, 6th floors are failure. To see floor 8th or higher is required to enter KEY-PAD ‘0’ of annunciator. 2. Verify if the control panel XHA MIC is connected, and see if voltage between HA plug pin 3-4 of DHG-16X at failed floor is DC24V. 3. Verify if the ID of DHG-16X at failed floor is set correctly. 4. Resistance between HA connector pin1-2 in DHG-16X at the failed floor must be 2±0.5Ω. If not so, the pulse transformer(PT1, position in DHG-16X) in DHG-16X is a failure. 5. Check between pin 3-4 of HA connector in DHG-16X at the failed floor. if it is open circuit, replace DHG-16X.
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 224
Detection
Hall nod trouble (All)
[Meaning] Communication error with all floor in hall line is detected
NCD_P_SVC_Fl[ 0 ]
check_floor
Application
Si210
[Countermeasures]
[Explanation]
Normal_Floor[ 0 ]
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
Revision: 0 Page: 102/103
check_floor
TCD 224
H_Data_Receive_Wait_Counter == 0
[Condition] When TCD224 occurs, operation mode would be ACD26 and perform backup operation.
1. Check if the jumper(HJP-SH) of DOC-1XX is set correctly. 2. Check if XHA MIC of DOP-1XX is connected. 3. Check if SH connector of DOC-1XX is connected. 4. Check if terminal resistor(120 Ω) in diverging box at bottom floor is connected. 5. Check if the volt of XHA MIC of DOP-1XX is DC24V after removing XHA MIC . 1) 1th ~ 8th floor: XHA 3-4 is to be DC24V. 2) 9th ~ 16th floor: XHA 5-6 is to be DC24V. 3) 17th ~ 24th floor: XHA 7-8 is to be DC24V. 4) 25th ~ 32th floor: TB2(Terminal Block) 5-6 is to be DC24V.
Revision: 0 Page: 103/103
MMR Elevator_SI / Trouble Shooting TCD 237
Detection
CRT communication trouble
[Meaning] When communication error between CRT & CP occurs
Application
Si210
[Countermeasures] 1. Check if CRT option is applied. (When SPEC has CRT option even if a project does not apply for CRT, the trouble will occur)
[Explanation] In case that there is no receive data from CRT for 8 sec., TCD237 would be occurs.
CRT_Comm_Error_Counter == 0
○ Operation CPU ○ Speed CPU
TCD 237
Crt_Id ADDR:0x0002 Crt_Operation ADDR:0x0020 2. Check if the connection between CRT & CP is correct. (SM connector) Communication cable should be twisted & shielded. 3. Check if HJP-SL jumper is connected.
Spec Table
Appendix #1 SPEC TABLE
PART
Address
1. FUNC -TION SPEC
0000H 0002H 0004H 0006H 0008H AH - EH 0010H 0012H 0014H 0016H 0018H
001AH 001CH 001EH 0020H 0022H 0024H
LABEL Crt_id Housing_Corp Observation Car_Door_Lock Unused Earthquake_Slow Earthquake Voice_to_RS232 Rope_Compen Weight Sensor
ESMI_ID ESMI_Operation ALP_Operation CRT_Operation Running_Open Mis_Call_Cancel
0026H
Legend(**H:Hex,****B:Binary, No-mark:Decimal 00H:Without,01H:With) DEFAULT DATA DESCRIPTION *H 00 / 01 00 / 01 00 / 01
CRT Supervisory panel ID ( E/L No .ID) Special Option (Korea) Observation E/L : 01 Car Door Locking Option : 01
00 / 01 00 / 01 00 / 01 00 / 01 *H
Earthquake Low speed operation Earthquake Control operation SAV,MAV,DAV DOOR, DOV-200 applied Slack rope compen. Load Sensor Type + Number of sensor Strain-Gauge:20H, Pontio-Meter:40H DFTR:80H , Weighing Device : 00H ex) Two P-Meter installed: 42,43H One S-Gauge installed: 21H ESMI ID Setting ESMI Operation ALP Operation Supervisory panel RUNNING OPEN function Anti-nuisance control (Control spec: 015A setting) Car call cancel function (00:No func., 01:One touch, 02:Two Touch, 04:One Touch Holding) Chime attached to hall Hall call cancel function ( 00:No func., 01:One Touch, 02:Two Touch) Fireman operation function Door close standby when fireman operation arriving(When Door open B/T pressed OPEN :01H)
*H 00 / 01 00 / 01 00 / 01 00 / 01 00 / 01 *H
Call_Cancel 0028H 002AH
Hall_Chime_Gong
00 / 01
Hall_Call_Cancel
*H
002CH 002EH
Fireman_Drive
00 / 01
Fireman_Open_Cut
00 / 01
0030H 0032H 0034H
0036H
0038H
Call_Cancel_Non_Stop_ SW Auto_Private_Power Voice_Guide_Spec1
Voice_Guide_Spec2
00 / 01 00 / 01 1 Announ. Assigned per 1 bit 1 Announ. Assigned per 1 bit
Chime_RTC_Spec
003AH
Ref_FL_RTC_Spec 00 / 01
003CH
Force_Stop_Operation
00 / 01
1
21H
00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 01H 00H 00H 00H 01H
Call deletion function by Non Stop switch On
01H
Standby power operation 1 bit : DOWN 0 bit : UP 3 bit : Getting off 2 bit : Door closing 5 bit : Overload 4 bit : Full(80%) 7 bit : VIP 6 bit : Service floor 1 bit : Power fail 0 bit : Fire detec. 3 bit : Failure 2 bit : Auto rescue 5 bit : Standby power 4 bit : Parking operation 6 bit : Earthquake
00H
Night chime prohibition function (When applied: Volume, Chime Cut) (Time control function spec setting) Function of changing reference floor 1stor 2nd According to the traffic. (Time control function spec setting) Compulsion stop FL function(01H) (Compulsion stop floor spec setting)
00/01
01H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H
FFH
FFH
00H
00H
00H
Appendix #1 SPEC TABLE PART
Address
LABEL
Legend(**H:Hex,****B:Binary, No-mark:Decimal 00H:Without,01H:With) DEFAULT DATA DESCRIPTION 00 / 01 OBS switch function(01H) 01H Heavy wind control operation(01H) 00H 00 / 01
003EH 0040H
OBS_Operation Heavy_Wind_Oper
0042H
Russia_Code
00 / 01
RUSSIA CODE
00H
0044H
Rope_Gripper
00 / 01
Rope Gripper
00H
0046H
Load_Auto_Adjust
00 / 01
Load auto compensation function(01H)
00H
00 / 01
M’sia Fireman
00 / 01
Oversea_Field
00 / 01
Dir_Reverse
00 / 01
0050H
Photo_Shoe
00 / 01
Fire detection sensor attached to escape floor nd (Exist 2 escape floor) (UAE) Fireman operation without F4FS signal (M’sia) Emergency E/L Cut the priority service for operation direction by car call Photo Shoe (01H)
00H
Exit Floor Fire Detect
01H
0052H
Housing Corp.Local CRT Hall_Lantern
Local CRT (Korea)
01H
Hall Lantern (01H)
00H
0048H
004AH 004CH 004EH
0054H 0056H
00 / 01 00 / 01
Voice_Output_Time
*H
Chime_Output_Time
*H
Annunc. Starting time for arrival(Unit:sec) * Available range(2~5sec) Chime Starting time for arrival(Unit:sec) * In case that the annunc. Is applied 4sec, is not applied 2sec Multi-step deceleration function * Address 011AH, 0422H, 0424H
0058H
005AH 005CH 005EH *Time control spec (RTC)
0060H
Multi_Step_Decel
00 / 01
Housing_Corp_Fire_ Option
00 / 01
Cooler operation
00 / 01
Special fire option (Korea)
Chime_Removal_Time
23 hour is registered as 23H (ex) To prohibit noise for 23:30~06:30
0068H 006AH
Ref1_Select_Time Ref1_Select_Time
0060H : 23H 0062H : 30H 0064H : 06H 0066H : 30H (Address Time) Same as Above
006CH
Ref1_Select_Time
006EH
Ref1_Select_Time
0070H
Ref2_Select_Time
0072H
Ref2_Select_Time
0074H
Ref2_Select_Time
0062H 0064H 0066H
Chime_Removal_Time Chime_Removal_Time Chime_Removal_Time
Same as Above
prohibition
starting
time
prohibition
finishing
time
prohibition
finishing
time
01H
02H 04H 00H
00H 22H 00H 06H
00H : Start time for using 1st reference floor(Hour) st Start time for using 1 reference floor (Minute) Finish time for using 1st reference floor (Hour) Finish time for using 1st reference floor (Minute) Start time for using 2nd reference floor (Hour) Start time for using 2nd reference floor (Minute) Finish time for using 2nd reference floor (Hour)
2
00H
00H
Operation for draining water from Airconditioner Chime/Gong prohibition starting time(Hour) Chime/Gong (Minute) Chime/Gong ( Hour) Chime/Gong (Minute)
00H
18H 00H 19H 00H 07H 00H 08H
Appendix #1 SPEC TABLE PART
2. Control spec
Address
LABEL
0076H
Ref2_Select_Time
0100H
Capacity
Legend(**H:Hex,****B:Binary, No-mark:Decimal 00H:Without,01H:With) DEFAULT DATA DESCRIPTION nd Finish time for using 2 reference floor 00H (Minute) Capacity CODE *H *(16=17 persons)
0102H
Motor
0104H Contract_Velocity
0106H
0108H
Traction_Machine_code
Person s Code Person s Code
6
8
9
10
11
06H
08H
09H
0AH
0BH
13
15
17
20
24
0DH 0FH 11H 14H 18H MOTOR CODE (310V, 50Hz, 4P, INV MOTOR) *Speed kW 4.5 5.5 7.5 9.5 90m/min, Motor 01H 02H 03H 04H Data 15kw => “08” kW 11 15 18 22 05H 06H 07H 08H Data (MOTOR for LOCAL modernization) kW 7.5 11 15 22 0AH 0BH 0CH 0DH Data (MOTOR for modernization) kW 7.5 11 15 22 11H 12H 13H 14H Data (Sigma MOTOR) kW 4.5 5.5 7.5 9.5 11 21H 22H 23H 24H 25H Data kW 13 15 18 22 26H 27H 28H 29H Data (Si-MMR MOTOR) Kw 5.5 6.7 11.1 8.8 10.7 Data 60H 61H 62H 63H 64H Kw 17.7 9.7 9.9 11.7S 11.7Y Data 65H 66H 67H 68H 69H Kw 19.4 Data 6AH Rated speed CODE (m/min) Speed 15 30 45 60 *H 01H 02H 03H 04H Code Speed 75 90 105 05H 06H 07H Code TR M/C CODE Worm Gear Type:01H *H 01H Helical Gear Type:02H GEARLESS Type: 04H T/M M/C CODE(Worm Gear Type) *H
TKXS 38.5 01H TKL 26.67
3
TKXS 22.67 02H TKXL 47
TKM 38.5 03H TKXL 26.67
TKM 22.67 04H TYS 31.33
TKL 47 05H TYM 38
06H
07H
08H
09H
0AH
TYS 56
TYS 56
TYS 28.33
TYM 67
TKXL 26.67
0BH
0CH
0DH
0EH
0FH
Appendix #1 SPEC TABLE PART
Address
LABEL
Legend(**H:Hex,****B:Binary, No-mark:Decimal 00H:Without,01H:With) DEFAULT DATA DESCRIPTION
ex) TKXS(X)38.5 M/C TYPE : TKXS (X) : 38.5 : Gear ratio OBH:TYS 56/710 OCH:TYS 56/600 08H:TKXL 26.67/600 0FH:TKXL 26.67/520
*H
TM M/C CODE(Worm Gear Type) TKM 30.33
TKM 45.5
TKM 62
EM 65
10H
11H
12H
13H
14H
TKL 31.33
TKL 37.5
TKL 55
TKL 75
TYS 31.33
15H
16H
17H
18H
19H
TYS TYS EM TYS TKM 37 37.5 56 42 67 1AH 1BH 1CH 1DH 1EH TKM EM WLC-2 WLC-2 WLC-2 17.25 24.5 24 28 32.67 1FH 20H 21H 22H 23H WLC-2 WLC-2 WLC-2 EM EM 22 25.67 38.5 27.67 53 24H 25H 26H 27H 28H TYS TYS DL DL 21.75 33.33 49 27.5 29H 2AH 2BH 2CH TYS TYS TKL 37 42 23.25 30H 31H 32H TR M/C CODE (Helical Gear Type) H438B H422B H437C H439C (-S) (-S) 36.41 38.68 37.85 21.92 01H 02H 03H 04H H322C H421C H317C H309B 21.69 20.98 17.371 9.0 05H 06H 07H 08H H438B H422B H438B HYS (-2) (-2) (-D) 8.98 37.85 21.92 37.85 09H 0AH 0BH 0CH H422B (-D) 21.92 0DH
**Caution** DL 49 : Dalian Local TR M/C (49/620) DL 27.5 : Dalian Local TR M/C (27.5/620)
TR M/C CODE(Gearless Code) GL_103 GL_212 GL_YASKAWA 01H 02H 03H GL_MMR GL_MMR GL_MMR_480 _400 _410 04H 05H 06H IGBT Capacity (A) 50,75 100 150 200 01H 02H 03H 04H
010AH IGBT
TKL 25.33
*H
4
03H
Appendix #1 SPEC TABLE PART
Address
LABEL
010CH
Legend(**H:Hex,****B:Binary, No-mark:Decimal 00H:Without,01H:With) DEFAULT DATA DESCRIPTION 01H 1 Turn(13kW or more) 02H
2 Turn(11kW or less) CT_Turn
01H
*H
3 Turn
03H
4 Turn
04H
010EH Encoder
*H
72 01H
Roping
*H
1:1
0110H
*H
0114H 0116H
Brake_C_Cntl Brake_Current
00 / 01 *H
0118H
Unused *H
High_FHM-V
*H
011CH
011EH 0120H 0122H 0124H 0126H 0128H 012AH 0142H0144H 0146H0148H
Two_Speed_Err_Run
00 / 01
Acceleration Jerk PMSM_ENC_DIR
*H *H *H
Motor_Thermal
*H
Slack Rope Switch
*H
C1SW
*H
03H
4:1
01H
2nd uniform velocity data (When applied Multistep deceleration function) * Refer to the Rated speed code High FHM speed code * Refer to the Rated speed code Caution: Set the data smaller than permitted speed that lift crash into buffer Permitting normal operation after 2nd deceleration error occurrence (01H) Acceleration Jerk MAIN ENCORDER Direction decision 0x01；immediately stop 0x02; after leveling stop 0x01; immediately stop 0x02; after leveling stop
011AH Second_Ref_V
2:1
1024 03H
01H 02H 04H Maintenance and floor height measurement operation speed CODE 15m/min ⇒ 01H, 30 m/min ⇒ 02H Brake current control function Brake maintain current (00H ~ 32H)
0112H Maint_Velocity
Encoder pulse count 512 02H ROPING CODE
01H 01H 00H
00H
00H
00H 06H 06H 02H 02H 00H 00H 00H 00H
Compen_Rope_Adjust
*H
Compensation chain/T-cable load compen. (For Strain Gauge) – Field setting
No_Load_Point
*H
No load Offset point - Field setting
014AH014CH
Full_Load_Point
*H
Full load Offset point - Field setting
00H
014EH – 0150 H
Half_Load_Point
*H
Half load Offset point - Field setting
00H
0152H
Inv_Noload_Cur
No load current compensation data
00H
0154H
Inv_Slip_C
Motor 2nd time constant compensation data
00H
0156H
Unused
0158H
Full_Load_Detect_ Percent
Bypass point of load
50H
*H
5
00H 00H
00H
Appendix #1 SPEC TABLE PART
Address 015AH
LABEL
Legend(**H:Hex,****B:Binary, No-mark:Decimal 00H:Without,01H:With) DEFAULT DATA DESCRIPTION Nuisance call detection count :HEX
No_Of_Mis_Call
*H
015CH0162H
LDC_Point.On
*H
LDC
ON – DELAY PULSE COUNT
00H
0164H 016AH
LDC_Point.Off
*H
LCD
OFF – DELAY PULSE COUNT
00H
LDU_Point.On
*H
LDU ON – DELAY PULSE COUNT
00H
0174H – 017AH
LDU_Point.Off
*H
LDU
OFF – DELAY PULSE COUNT
00H
017CH – 0182H
LDD_Point.On
*H
LDD
ON – DELAY PULSE COUNT
00H
LDD_Point.Off
*H
LDD
OFF – DELAY PULSE COUNT
00H
016CH – 0172H
0184H – 018AH 018CH – 019AH
Unused
019CH01A2H
Unused
ex)Total 10 floors B/D Æ
6
10*0.8=8
00H
Appendix #1 SPEC TABLE
PART 3. Invert er spec
Address
LABEL
Legend(**H:Hex,****B:Binary,No-mark:Decimal 00H:without,01H:with) DATA
DESCRIPTION
DEFALT
Input data within 46H ~ 82H(70~130) Speed command when level before 10mm Advanced distance adjusting value for leveling control Compen. value of distance 125mm
64H 07H 06H
0200H 0202H 0204H
INV_V_PI_Gain Inv_Linear_10 Inv_Comp_Dist
*H *H *H
0206H 0208H
Inv_Adj_125 Load_Compen_Gain * Reverse shock Adj. 1. Opposite side:↑
*H
Load compen. value gain (E/L speed; 60m/min -> 30H E/L speed ; 90~105m/min->50H)
*H
2. Straight side: ↓ 020AH Load_Regen_Factor
*H
020CH
Load_Compen_Offset[0]
*H
020EH
Load_Compen_Offset[1]
*H
0210H
Load_Compen_Offset[2]
*H
0212H
Pgc_Gain
*H
0214H
Short_Pgc_Gain
*H
Gain value during regener. (E/L speed; 60m/min -> 07H E/L speed ; 90~105m/min->1EH) Higher floor rope compen. (Not applied compen. Chain) Intermediate floor rope compen. (Not applied compen. Chain) Lower floor rope compen. (Not applied compen. Chain) Profile deceleration specification position gain (Long distance traveling) Profile deceleration specification position gain (Shot distance traveling)
7
0FH 30H OR 50H
07H OR 1EH 00H 00H 00H 10H 00H
Appendix #1 SPEC TABLE
PART
Address
LABEL
4. Floor spec
0300H 0306H 0308H 030AH
Total Display_Char[0][0] Display_Char[0][1] Display_Char[1][0]
030CH 030EH 0310H 0312H 0314H 0316H 0318H 031AH 031CH 031EH 0320H 0322H 0324H 0326H
Display_Char[1][1] Display_Char[2][0] Display_Char[2][1] Display_Char[3][0] Display_Char[3][1] Display_Char[4][0] Display_Char[4][1] Display_Char[5][0] Display_Char[5][1] Display_Char[6][0] Display_Char[6][1] Display_Char[7][0] Display_Char[7][1] Display_Char[8][0]
0328H 032AH 032CH 032EH
Display_Char[8][1] Display_Char[9][0] Display_Char[9][1] Display_Char[10][0]
0330H 0332H
Display_Char[10][1] Display_Char[11][0]
0334H 0336H
Display_Char[11][1] Display_Char[12][0]
0338H 033AH
Display_Char[12][1] Display_Char[13][0]
033CH 033EH
Display_Char[13][1] Display_Char[14][0]
0340H 0342H
Display_Char[14][1] Display_Char[15][0]
0344H 0346H
Display_Char[15][1] Display_Char[16][0]
0348H 034AH
Display_Char[16][1] Display_Char[17][0]
034CH 034EH
Display_Char[17][1] Display_Char[18][0]
0350H 0352H
Display_Char[18][1] Display_Char[19][0]
0354H 0356H
Display_Char[19][1] Display_Char[20][0]
Legend(**H:Hex,****B:Binary,No-mark:Decimal 00H:without,01H:with) DEFAUT DATA DESCRIPTION *H Total floor (Number of shelter plate installed) 8 20H Unused 20H 20H Unused 20H *H 1FL 2-figures indicating character ‘B’ (Nothing:20H) *H 1FL 1-figure indicating character ‘1’ ASCII CODE *H 2FL 2-figures ‘’ "0" "A" *H 2FL 1-figure 30H 41H ‘1‘ "1" "B" *H 3FL 2-figures 31H 42H ‘‘ "2" "C" *H 3FL 1-figure 32H 43H ‘2’ "3" "D" *H 4FL 2-figures 33H 44H ‘‘ "4" "E" *H 4FL 1-figure 34H 45H ‘3‘ *H 5FL 2-figures "5" 35H "F" 46H ‘’ "6" "G" *H 5FL 1-figure 36H 47H ‘5‘ "7" "H" *H 6FL 2-figures 37H 48H ‘’ "8" "L" *H 6FL 1-figure 38H 4CH ‘6‘ "9" "M" *H 7FL 2-figures 39H 4DH ‘’ "U" "P" *H 7FL 1-figure 55H 50H ‘7‘ *H 8FL 2-figures Nothi ‘’ “-“ 20H 2DH ng *H 8FL 1-figure ‘8‘ *H 9FL 2-figures ‘’ *H 9FL 1-figure ‘9’ *H 10FL ‘’ 2-figures *H 10FL 1-figure ‘8‘ *H 11FL ‘’ 2-figures *H 11FL 1-figure ‘9‘ *H 12FL ‘1’ 2-figures *H 12FL 1-figure ‘0’ *H 13FL ‘1’ 2-figures *H 13FL 1-figure ‘1’ *H 14FL ‘1’ 2-figures *H 14FL 1-figure ‘2’ *H 15FL ‘1’ 2-figures *H 15FL 1-figure ‘3’ *H 16FL ‘1’ 2-figures *H 16FL 1-figure ‘4’ *H 17FL ‘1’ 2-figures *H 17FL 1-figure ‘5’ *H 18FL ‘1’ 2-figures *H 18FL 1-figure ‘6’ *H 19FL ‘1’ 2-figures *H 19FL 1-figure ‘7’ *H 20FL ‘1’ 2-figures
8
Appendix #1 SPEC TABLE PART
Address
LABEL
Legend(**H:Hex,****B:Binary,No-mark:Decimal 00H:without,01H:with) DEFAUT DATA DESCRIPTION *H 20FL 1-figure ‘8’
0358H
Display_Char[20][1]
035AH
Display_Char[21][0]
*H
035CH 035EH
Display_Char[21][1] Display_Char[22][0]
*H *H
0360H 0362H
Display_Char[22][1] Display_Char[23][0]
*H *H
0364H 0366H
Display_Char[23][1] Display_Char[24][0]
*H *H
0368H 036AH
Display_Char[24][1] Display_Char[25][0]
*H *H
036CH
Display_Char[25][1]
*H
0386H
Display_Char[32][0]
*H
0388H 03CEH 03D0H 03D2H 03D4H 03D6H 03D8H 03DAH 03DCH 03DEH 03E0H
Display_Char[32][1] Display_Char[3][1] Display_Char[3][2] Display_Char[3][3]
*H *H *H *H *H *H *H *H *H *H *H
03E2H
*H
03E4H
*H
03E6H
*H
03E8H
*H
03EAH
*H
03ECH
*H
03EEH
*H
03F0H
*H
21FL 2-figures 21FL 1-figure 22FL 2-figures 22FL 1-figure 23FL 2-figures 23FL 1-figure 24FL 2-figures 24FL 1-figure 25FL 2-figures 25FL 1-figure
32FL 2-figures 32FL 1-figure 1FL 3-figures 2FL 3-figures 3FL 3-figures 4FL 3-figures 5FL 3-figures 6FL 3-figures 7FL 3-figures 8FL 3-figures 9FL 3-figures 10FL 3-figures 11FL 3-figures 12FL 3-figures 13FL 3-figures 14FL 3-figures 15FL 3-figures 16FL 3-figures 17FL 3-figures 18FL 3-figures
9
‘1’ ‘9’ ‘2’ ‘1’ ‘2’ ‘2’ ‘2’ ‘3’ ‘2’ ‘4’
‘3’
3-DIGIT applied
‘2’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘’ ‘’
Appendix #1 SPEC TABLE PART
Address
LABEL
Legend(**H:Hex,****B:Binary,No-mark:Decimal 00H:without,01H:with) DEFAUT DATA DESCRIPTION
040AH
*H
04ACH
*H
038AH 038CH
Service_Inform[0][0] Service_Inform [0][1]
31FL 3-figures 32FL 3-figures
*H
Service information on 1st FL LDC-installed stop floor and LDC-installed nonstop floor to be classified With shelter plate Non-stop FL->
*H 03C8H
03CCH040CH 040EH 0410H 0412H 0414H 0416H 0418H
041AH 041CH 041EH 0420H 0422H
Service_Inform [0][32]
*H
B7 1
B6 0
B5
B0
Floor Data 1 1 Stop FL -> Ex) 2 FL non-stop : 82H = 10000010B 3 FL stop : C3H = 11000011B Service information on 32nd FL (Non-stop floor does not need marking)
C1H C2H C3H C8H 00H
00H
Unused Parking Reference1 Reference2 Exit1 Exit2
*H *H *H *H *H
Dispersion1
*H
Dispersion2 Top Middle Bottom
*H *H *H *H *H
Up_Decel_Zone
0424H
*H Down_Decel_Zone
5. Car node spec
‘’
Unused
038EH
03CAH
‘’
042CH 042EH 0430H 0432H 0434H 0436H 0500H
Installed_Node[0]
0502H
Hall_Lantern_Dir Security_Opt
00 / 01 00/01 *B
If use PARKING floor (01H) Reference FL(If '0', no return to reference FL) 2nd reference FL Escape floor 2nd escape floor Dispersion FL during DUPLEX (If ‘0’, no dispersion) * Dispersion FL =( reference FL +top FL)/2 Unused Top floor Intermediate FL Bottom floor Multi-step deceleration start floor in up direction (Two rows shelter plate installed floor) Multi-step deceleration start floor in down direction (Two rows shelter plate installed floor) Lantern with direction lamp function Close to Security floor succor run
01H 01H 00H 01H 00H 00H
08H 04H 01H 00H 00H 00H
Close to Security_floor bit set
00H 00H 00H 00H
00 / 01
ID No.1 OPB
01H
Installed_Node[1]
00 / 01
ID No.2 OPB
00H
0504H
Installed_Node[2]
00 / 01
ID No.3 OPB
00H
0506H
Installed_Node[3]
00 / 01
ID No.4 OPB Unused
00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H
0508H
Security_Floor
10
Appendix #1 SPEC TABLE PART
Address
LABEL
050CH 050EH
Bt_Bz_Cut Bt_Bz_Toggle
0510H 0512H 0514H
DML_Indi Lamp_Indi Sub_Lamp1
Legend(**H:Hex,****B:Binary,No-mark:Decimal 00H:without,01H:with) DEFAUT DATA DESCRIPTION 00 / 01 Cage button BZ sound cut 00H 00 / 01 EFO(Russia) BZ sound applied 00H 00 / 01
DML CPI Unused Setting usage of additional CPI lamp 1
VIP
3H
4H
Safety Off
8H
Emergen cy
2H
Full
7H
Inspect
1H
Auto
In use 6H
Full
Without 0H
*H
01H 00H 06H
9H
0516H
Sub_Lamp2
*H
Setting usage of additional CPI lamp 2
02H
0518H
Sub_Lamp3
*H
Setting usage of additional CPI lamp 3
00H
051AH
Sub_Lamp4
*H
Setting usage of additional CPI lamp 4
051CH – 051EH
Unused
11
Appendix #1 SPEC TABLE
PART
Address
6. Hall node spec
0600H 0602H~ 0608H
LABEL
Legend(**H:Hex,****B:Binary,No-mark:Decimal 00H:without,01H:with) DEFAULT DATA DESCRIPTION *H Two rows of Hall net (ex> Duplex) 00H
Use_Bside VIP_Button
Unused *B
060AH 060CH 060EH 0610H
VIP B/T Installed FL (Max. 3 FL) 1 - 8 FL 5000060AH Add 9 - 16FL 5000060CH Add 17 - 24FL 5000060EH Add 25 - 32FL 50000610H Add
0612H 0632H
Unused
0634H 0636H 0638H
DML Indi Sub_Lamp1
00 / 01 *H
00H 00H 00H 00H
DML Indi Unused Setting usage of additional indicator lamp 1
Start
VIP
8H
3H
4H
5H
Safety Off
7H
Full
Auto
In use 6H
2H
Emergen cy
1H
Inspect
Full
Without 0H
01H 00H 01H
9H
063AH 063CH 063EH
Sub_Lamp2
*H
Setting usage of additional indicator lamp 2
02H
Sub_Lamp3
*H
Setting usage of additional indicator lamp 3
00H
Sub_Lamp4
*H
Setting usage of additional indicator lamp 4
00H
0640H 0642H
0644H – 064AH 064CH
Unused Button_Jam_Detect_ Time
Button Jam Detecting time z Unit : sec ex) In case 180sec (3 min) =>
*H
Unused Lamp_Indi
00 / 01
064EH
Call_Related_INDI
00 / 01
0650H 0656H
Indi_On_Floor
0658H
B4H 0xB4
*B
Lamp Type INDI B/T call related Indicator (VIX-532)
00H
B/T call related Indicator usually on floor 0650H 0652H 0654H 0656H
PAR_COM
00H
00/01
12
1 ~ 8FL 9 ~ 16FL 17 ~ 24FL 25 ~ 32FL
00H 00H 00H 00H
Use DOH PCB Hall select communication ways
00H
Appendix #1 SPEC TABLE
Legend(**H:Hex,****B:Binary,No-mark:Decimal 00H:without,01H:with) PART
Address
7. Door spec
0700H
DAV_Door
00 / 01
When DAV1 Door applied
00H
0702H 0704H 0706H 0708H 070AH
Nudging Unused Door_Lock_Magnet Close_Buzzer
00 / 01 00 / 01 00 / 01 00 / 01
Nudging device DAV or Car door locking Close buzzer
00H 00H 00H 00H
Open_Bt_Flick
00 / 01
Open button lighting ON
01H
00 / 01
Door closing after completion of earthquake control operation Door closing after completion of fire control operation Door closing after completion of private power control operation
00H
070CH
LABEL
Earthquake_Door_Close
070EH
Fire_Door_Close
0710H
Auto_Private_Power_ Door_Close Unused
0712H 0714H
Close_Lock_Limit_Count
DATA
DESCRIPTION
00 / 01 00 / 01
Door operation count for detecting Close Lock
*H
0716H – 0796H
DEFAULT
00H 00H
0CH
Unused
0798H 079AH 079CH
Open_Time[0] Open_Time[1] Open_Time[2]
FFH 00H *H
079EH 07A0H
Open_Time[3] Open_Time[4]
*H *H
07A2H 07A4H 07A6H 07B8H
Open_Time[5] Open_Time[6] Unused Door_Type
*H *H
07CAH 07CCH
Russia_OPZX Return Floor Auto Open
00 / 01H 00 / 01
07CEH 07D0H 07D2H 07D4H 07D6H
Photo_Reopen_Cut_Cnt Photo_Cut_Buzzer Photo_Cut_Limit LDS_Off_BZ_Time
*H 00 / 01 *H *H
Unspecified Door Time Door Opening Time for hall call (sec) 3 sec=03H, 2 sec = 02H, 1sec = 01H Door Opening Time for car call (sec) Door Opening Time of non-condition (sec) Opening Time for disabled persons (sec) Opening Time for Control operation (sec)
*H
CLS_Hold
13
Door Machine Type setting 00H 01H 02H 03H 04H 05H ANLI SBD A D S S AV, DAV SM K MAV SO Applied for Russia APT (TCD 240) Door open automatically, arrived at escape floor under fire operation.(Russia) Max. Reopen count by Photo sensor Buzzer work when photo beam cut (close) Photo beam cut limit time (sec) Landing Door open detecting time(sec) CLS contact holding DMC Cut (Only for SBD1 door)
FFH 00H 03H 02H 05H 05H 0FH 00H
00H 00H 05H 01H 20H 0AH 00H
Appendix #1 SPEC TABLE
PART
Address
8. Call service spec
0800H 0808H 080AH 080CH
LABEL
Legend(**H:Hex,****B:Binary,No-mark:Decimal 00H:without,01H:with) DEFAULT DATA DESCRIPTION Unused
Non_Stop1_Trigger_Con d Non_Stop2_Trigger_Con d
00 / 01
NON STOP1 Switch
01H
00 / 01
NON STOP2 Switch
01H
080EH 081CH 081EH 0820H 0822H 0824H 0826H 0828H 082AH 082CH 082EH 0830H 0832H 0834H 0836H 083CH
8. Call service spec
Unused 00H Hall_Up_Call
*B
Setting in HALL UP CALL available FL bit
7FH 00H 00H 00H
Hall_Down_Call
*B
Setting in HALL DOWN CALL available FL bit
FEH
A_Cage_Call_Patt
Setting in E/L #1 A type(front side) CAR CALL available bit
Unused 00H
083EH 0840H 0842H 0844H 0846H 084CH
B_Cage_Call_Patt
084EH 0850H
Non_Stop_1
0852H 0854H 0856H 0858H 085AH 085CH
*B
00H 00H 00H FFH 00H 00H 00H
*B
Setting in E/L #1 B type(rear side) CAR CALL available bit
FFH 00H 00H 00H
Unused
Non_Stop_2
Force_Stop[0]
*B
Setting in NON STOP1 specified FL bit Svc pattern used when switch input. * Set to service FL
*B
Setting in NON STOP2 specified FL bit Svc pattern used when switch input. * Set to service FL Setting in compulsion stop FL bit for UP direction 085EH 1 ~ 8FL 0860H 9 ~ 16FL 0862H 17 ~ 24FL 0864H 25 ~ 32FL
*B
085EH 0860H 0862H 0864H
14
55H 55H 55H 55H ABH 00H 00H 00H
00H 00H 00H 00H
Appendix #1 SPEC TABLE PART
Address
LABEL Force_Stop[1]
0866H
Legend(**H:Hex,****B:Binary,No-mark:Decimal 00H:without,01H:with) DEFAULT DATA DESCRIPTION Setting in compulsion stop FL bit for DOWN direction *B
0866H
1 ~ 8FL
00H
0868H
0868H
9 ~ 16FL
00H
086AH
086AH
17 ~ 24FL
00H
086CH
25 ~ 32FL
00H
086CH 086EH08DEH 08E0H
Unused Hall_Service_Map[0]
*H
Normal call service map
83H
08E2H
Hall_Service_Map[1]
*H
Unused
00H
08E4H
Hall_Service_Map[2]
*H
Disabled person call service map
23H
08E6H
Hall_Service_Map[3]
*H
Unused
00H
Definition of service map
08E8H – 09FCH
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 A B C D Hold E/L No.2 E/L No.1 Type Type Type Type Flag B/T B/T B/T B/T * Hold Flag : In case hall call is registered , even if service type is changed to non-stop floor, it will service before reset. z A Type B/T : HALL NET 1 line DHG HU/HD z B Type B/T : HALL NET 2 lines DHG HU/HD z C Type B/T : HALL NET 1 line DHG HUC/HDC z D Type B/T : HALL NET 2 lines DHG HUC/HDC ☞) 83H Æ A Type B/T setting for E/L No. 1 and 2 21H Æ C Type B/T setting for E/L No. 1 Unused *H
15
00H
Appendix #1 SPEC TABLE
PART
Address
9. Dispat ch spec
0A00H 0A02H
LABEL
Ref_Fl_Wait_Car
0A04H 0A06H 0A08H 0A0AH 0A0CH 0A0EH
10. Parall el runnin g spec
0A10H 0A12H 0A14H 0A16H 0A80H 0A82H 0A84H 0A86H
Non_Dir_Car Closed_Car Ready_To_Run_Car Run_Car Unused
Legend(**H:Hex,****B:Binary,No-mark:Decimal 00H:without,01H:with) DEFAULT DATA DESCRIPTION *H 32H Addition value for stand-by lift at reference floor 0032H = 50 00H *H Delay time = 50 * 100 ms = 5 s Addition value for stand-by lift without *H 32H direction *H 00H 5sec *H *H *H
Subtraction value for door closed lift 300ms Subtraction value for ready to running 200 ms
*H *H *H *H *H
Subtraction value for running lift
SPD_Nplex_Timer[0]
*H
SPD_Nplex_Timer[1]
*H
SPD_Nplex_Timer[2]
*H
Assistance operation detecting timer (sec) Setting time :28H(40sec)~78H(120sec) Start of dispersion delay timer (sec) Setting time :00H ~ 3CH(60sec) Unused
SPD_Nplex_Timer[3]
*H
Unused
16
03H 00H 02H 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H 32H (50sec) 1EH (30sec) FFH FFH
Appendix #1 SPEC TABLE
PART
Address
LABEL
11. Virtual input spec
0B00H 0B2EH
Fixed input area
0B30H 0B32H 0B34H 0B36H 0B38H 0B52H
VID_Vi_Map[0][12][0] VID_Vi_Map[0][12][1] VID_Vi_Map[0][13][0] VID_Vi_Map[0][13][1] Fixed input area
0B54H 0B56H 0B58H 0B5AH 0B5CH 0B5EH 0B60H 0B62H 0B64H
VID_Vi_Map[1][5][0] VID_Vi_Map[1][5][1] VID_Vi_Map[1][6][0] VID_Vi_Map[1][6][1] VID_Vi_Map[1][7][0] VID_Vi_Map[1][7][1]
Legend(**H:Hex,****B:Binary,No-mark:Decimal 00H:without,01H:with) DATA VIRTUAL INPUT SPEC VID_Vi_Map[port no.][bit no.][0] : input specification VID_Vi_Map[port no][ bit no.][][1] : state specification state specification) 01H ⇒ reverse (B-CON) 00H ⇒ normal (A-CON) VI_SD2U ex) VID_Vi_Map[0][3][0] = VI_DLD 01H VID_Vi_Map[0][3][0] = 00H VI_SD2D Bit 3 of port No. 0 is used DLD input, 01H input state is A-CON
VI_LDU 01H VI_LDD 01H VI_R4FM 00H
Fixed input area VID_Vi_Map[1][9][0]
VI_R4EQ
0B66H 0B68H 0B6AH
VID_Vi_Map[1][9][1] VID_Vi_Map[1][10][0]
00H VI_R7NP
VID_Vi_Map[1][10][1]
0B6CH 0B6EH
VI_NULL VI_R5SC VI_UL VI_DL VI_R5SCS
16H 17H 18H 19H 1AH 1BH 1DH 1EH 1FH
VI_R4HW VI_MAINT_C
01H
09H 0AH 0BH
20H 21H 22H
VI_SD1U VI_SD2U
VID_Vi_Map[1][11][0]
VI_R4GS
0CH
23H
VI_SD1D
VID_Vi_Map[1][11][1] VID_Vi_Map[1][12][0] VID_Vi_Map[1][12][1] VID_Vi_Map[1][13][0] VID_Vi_Map[1][13][1]
0DH
24H
VI_SD2D
0EH 0FH 10H 11H 12H
25H 26H 27H 28H 29H
VI_LDC
0B7AH 0B7CH 0B7EH 0B80H 0B82H 0B84H
VID_Vi_Map[1][14][1] VID_Vi_Map[1][15][0] VID_Vi_Map[1][15][1] VID_Vi_Map[2][0][0] VID_Vi_Map[2][0][1]
00H VI_R4CT 00H VI_R2UL 00H VI_PARKIN G 00H 00H 00H 00H 00H
VID_Vi_Map[2][1][0]
00H
0B86H 0B88H 0B8AH 0B8CH 0B8EH 0B90H 0B92H
VID_Vi_Map[2][1][1] VID_Vi_Map[2][2][0] VID_Vi_Map[2][2][1] VID_Vi_Map[2][3][0] VID_Vi_Map[2][3][1] Fixed input area
00H 00H 00H 00H 00H
0B94H 0B96H 0B98H 0B9AH
VID_Vi_Map[2][5][0] VID_Vi_Map[2][5][1] Fixed input area
00H 00H
0B9CH 0B9EH
VID_Vi_Map[2][7][0] VID_Vi_Map[2][7][1]
0B70H 0B72H 0B74H 0B76H 0B78H
00H 01H 02H 03H 04H 05H 06H 07H 08H
VID_Vi_Map[1][14][0]
00H 00H
17
13H 14H 15H 2DH 2EH 2FH
VI_V48 VI_R5SX VI_MAINT_M VI_R1MU VI_R1MD VI_DOLS VI_DCLS VI_SAFETY_ SHOE
2AH 2BH 2CH 4DH 4EH 4FH
30H 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H
50H 51H 52H 53H 54H 55H
36H 37H 38H 39H
56H 57H 58H 59H
3AH
5AH
3BH 3CH
5BH 5CH
VI_LDU VI_LDD VI_C1BR VI_C1ST VI_CDS VI_LDS VI_R4GS VI_R4CT
Appendix #1 SPEC TABLE PART
Address 0BA0H 0BBEH
*
LABEL Unused
Legend(**H:Hex,****B:Binary,No-mark:Decimal 00H:without,01H:with) DATA VIRTUAL INPUT SPEC 3DH 5DH VI_1ST_FIRE
mark is fixed input (can’t editing)
3EH 3FH 40H 41H 42H 43H 44H 45H
VI_R7RD VI_R4FM VI_R4FS
46H
VI_EQ
47H 48H 49H 4AH 4BH 4CH
18
VI_R7NP
5EH 5FH 60H 61H 62H 63H
VI_2ND_FIRE VI_R1MM VI_RDMC VI_PARKING VI_HIGH
Appendix #1 SPEC TABLE
LABEL
Legend(**H:Hex,****B:Binary,No-mark:Decimal 00H:without,01H:with) DATA VIRTUAL INPUT SPEC VID_Vo_Map[Variable][0] : Output port specification VID_Vo_Map[Variable][1] : Output bit specification VID_Vo_Map[Variable][2] : Output state specification state specification) 01H ⇒ reverse (B-CON) 00H 00H 00H ⇒ normal (A-CON) 00H ex) VID_Vo_Map[0][0] = 1H 00H VID_Vo_Map[0][1] = 0H 00H VID_Vo_Map[0][2] = 0H 00H Bit 0 of port No. 1 is used C1BR output, non-reverse. Variabl 00H Description e 00H 0 VO_C1BR 00H 1 VO_C1ST 01H 2 VO_R5SC 0DH 3 VO_OPEN 00H 4 VO_CLOSE 02H 5 VO_WHEEL_CHAIR_DOOR 05H 6 VO_NUDGING 00H 7 VO_R1ML
PART
Address
12. Virtual Output spec
0C00H 0C52H
Fixed output area
0C54H 0C56H 0C58H 0C5AH 0C5CH 0C5EH
VID_Vo_Map[14][0] VID_Vo_Map[14][1] VID_Vo_Map[14][2] VID_Vo_Map[15][0] VID_Vo_Map[15][1]
0C60H
VID_Vo_Map[16][0]
0C62H 0C64H 0C66H 0C68H 0C6AH 0C6CH 0C6EH 0C70H
VID_Vo_Map[16][1] VID_Vo_Map[16][2] VID_Vo_Map[17][0] VID_Vo_Map[17][1] VID_Vo_Map[17][2] VID_Vo_Map[18][0] VID_Vo_Map[18][1] VID_Vo_Map[18][2]
0C72H 0C76H
Fixed output (R1HI)
9
VO_CAR_LIGHT
0C78H
VID_Vo_Map[20][0]
02H
10
VO_CAR_FAN
0C7AH
VID_Vo_Map[20][1]
03H
11
VO_INV_FAN
0C7CH
VID_Vo_Map[20][2]
00H
12
VO_R4F1
0C7EH
VID_Vo_Map[21][0]
02H
0C80H 0C82H
VID_Vo_Map[21][1] VID_Vo_Map[21][2]
02H 00H
0CBEH
VID_Vo_Map[31][2]
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
VO_R4F2 VO_EQ_RESET VO_V_WAVE_RESET VO_RESCUE_RETURN VO_R2DM VO_R4RF VO_R1H1 VO_ROPE_GRIPPER VO_R4FSX VO_LDS_OFF_BUZZER VO_RDZ
VID_Vo_Map[15][2]
8
19
VO_COOLER
Appendix #1 SPEC TABLE
PART
Address
13. Timer spec
0D00H 0D30H 0D38H 0D40H 0D48H 0D50H 0D58H 0D78H
LABEL Fixed Timer area
Direction error detecting R5SC On/Off error detecting C1ST On/Off error detecting Operation mode input error detecting Fixed Timer area
Legend(**H:Hex,****B:Binary,No-mark:Decimal 00H:without,01H:with) DATA DESCRIPTION m sec. is indicated according to timer spec. timer value is 4 byte variable. Value is specified in address and reverse order in EEPROM. 540 Ex.) TM_PHOTO_OFF_DETECT is 540 displayed by 540 $50000D10H | 990 ($50000D12H